Vehicle - Flood Damage Inspection And Handling
L-SB-0113-12
November 21, 2012
Flood Damaged Vehicle Inspection & Handling
Service Category
Power Source/Network
Section
Battery/Charging
Market
USA
Applicability
Introduction
In the event that a Lexus vehicle becomes submerged in water, many components may be physically damaged. Electrical and electronic components,
including wiring harnesses, are particularly susceptible to corrosion and subsequent malfunction. Although any flooding can be damaging, salt water
flooding elevates the potential for abnormal conditions and may increase risks due to its highly corrosive and conductive nature. Salt residue also
continues to corrode and remain conductive even after a vehicle dries. This bulletin is intended to assist with safe handling and inspection of flood
damaged vehicles as well as provide basic guidance on likely needed repairs.
NOTE
^ Damage associated with a vehicle being submerged in water is not covered by the Lexus new vehicle Warranty policy.
^ VIN and inspection results for vehicles currently within the warranty period should be forwarded to the DSPM for their reference and
updates to the Warranty system.
^ This bulletin provides general guidance and inspection areas. Each individual vehicle must be carefully reviewed based on the situation
(water level, water type, and duration of exposure).
Service Bulletin Overview
This bulletin contains 3 main sections:
1. Vehicle Safing - Making sure the vehicle is in a safe condition and the electrical system is disabled to minimize risks from corrosion, damaged
circuits, and attempted operation.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 2
2. Vehicle Inspection - Assessing the level of damage and determining necessary parts replacement, cleaning procedures, and potential long term
effects.
3. Vehicle Repair - Guidance for repair decisions on vehicle systems, sub-systems, and components.
NOTE
^ Due to the potential level of damage after an extended partial or full submersion, some vehicles may not be repairable and should be
decommissioned.
^ Final decisions on repair costs, vehicle value, and possible salvage or decommissioning are the responsibility of the customer, dealership, and
insurer. Inspection and repair of flood damaged vehicles is NOT warrantable.
Warranty Information
Required Tools & Equipment
1. Vehicle Safing
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 3
The most important aspect of handling flooded vehicles is making sure the vehicle is safe. Water entry and resulting corrosion may cause
electrical system anomalies or performance issues including:
^ Improper power distribution / system operation / overcurrent conditions.
^ High resistance from corrosion and abnormal heat generation that could lead to a potential fire.
^ Potential SRS Airbag, Pretensioner and/or Side Curtain Airbag false activation/deployment.
1. Determine if the vehicle has been flooded with water above the rocker panels into the floor of the vehicle.
HINT
If no standing water is detected on the vehicle floor and the carpet is wet, assume that internal flooding has occurred.
^ If YES - Continue to step 2.
^ If NO - Go to section 2 for vehicle inspection.
2. Open doors and trunk or hatch to release trapped water, ventilate the cabin and allow the interior to air dry.
3. Locate and remove body drain plugs at the rear corners of cabin floor and/or in spare tire well (if available) to assist with draining the
vehicle.
4. Disconnect the 12V battery and make sure the cable is folded down and away from the terminal.
5. On hybrid vehicles, disconnect the HV Battery Service Plug Connector (ONLY after the 12V auxiliary battery is disconnected).
CAUTION
If battery area contains standing water, drain BEFORE removing HV Battery Service Plug Connector.
6. Using a floor jack or GoJaks move and store the vehicle away from structures and vehicles.
2. Vehicle Inspection
Determining the level of water intrusion and whether the vehicle was contaminated with fresh or salt water will help assess the extent of damage
that has occurred and may continue to occur. As salt water is more damaging, this bulletin focuses primarily on salt water flooding. If the vehicle
was driven in flood waters, additional inspections may be necessary.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 4
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 5
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 6
Use the illustration to identify inspection level based on depth and angle of vehicle submersion.
Driven Vehicle Inspection - Salt Water
NOTE
If the vehicle was driven in flood waters, continue with the following checks after performing static inspection items.
Additional inspections must be made when the vehicle has been driven through or in flood waters. After a full inspection, repair of electrical
systems, replacement of fluids, and other potential repairs, the vehicle should be driven while monitoring live Techstream data for each
vehicle system. A full Health Check should be performed to complete confirmation of vehicle operation.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 7
Please review the above inspection list.
NOTE
For Fresh Water Flooding:
^ The dynamic inspection tables serve as a general inspection guide.
^ Residual corrosion and conductivity, once vehicle is dried, is not as great a concern as with salt water. All flooding situations should be
inspected and judged individually.
3. Vehicle Repair
After identifying affected components and when making repair decisions, please consider the following.
Electrical
Any electrical components that have been submerged in salt water (examples: harnesses, connectors, terminals, ECUs, hybrid and PHV batteries,
switches, buttons, sensors) need to be replaced before operating the vehicle and should NOT be reused.
NOTE
^ Even after salt water has dried, salt residue may remain on nearby surfaces.
^ Cleaning and/or replacement of surrounding components may also be necessary to ensure proper operation of electrical systems.
Chassis
Brakes and suspension components not only need to move and slide freely for proper operation, but additional consideration needs to be given for
subsequent corrosion that could impact future system performance. Disassemble, clean, reassemble, and lubricate all chassis components that have
been submerged or subjected to extensive salt water exposure.
Powertrain
As in-depth performance analysis can be conducted using Techstream, repair must include testing and confirmation of proper live data performance,
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 8
general Health Check (full Health Check for possible DTCs), inspection for oil and fuel contamination, consideration of all electrical components (as
previously described in this bulletin), inspection and replacement of any rubber, plastic, and metal components that are deteriorating or damaged,
and removal of salt water residue using appropriate cleaning agents.
Body and Interior
Vehicle body designs generally incorporate pressure relief vents (to minimize door closing pressure). These can allow water entry into the passenger
cabin during a flood situation and also have inherent low points or pockets that can retain flood water. Be sure to inspect, drain, and clean these
locations.
Any component that became wet or saturated that has fabric, cloth, padding, or soft trim such as those listed below may need to be replaced and/or
require follow-up mold remediation.
^ Carpet and padding ^ Console
^ Seats ^ Package tray
^ Door trim panels ^ Seals
Remaining salt water residue in any part of the vehicle may accelerate corrosion and affect vehicle operation. Be sure to clean all affected internal
and external surfaces thoroughly to prevent long term damage.
? 2012 Lexus, a division of Toyota Motor Sales, USA
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0109-12 Date: 121105
Interior - Fibers Protrude From Front Seat Cushion Perforations
L-SB-0109-12
November 5, 2012
Fibers Protruding Through Front Seat Cushion Perforations
Service Category
Vehicle Interior
Section
Seat
Market
USA
Applicability
Introduction
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 9
Some RX 350 and RX 450h vehicles may exhibit fibers of the seat leather protruding through the leather perforations of the front seat cushion
covers. Replace the Front Seat Cushion Cover Sub-Assembly to address this condition.
Production Change Information
This bulletin applies to vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VINs shown.
Parts Information
Required Tools & Equipment
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 10
Warranty Information
1. Remove the front seat assembly.
Refer to the Technical Information System (TIS) applicable model and model year Repair Manual.
2. Disassemble the front seat assembly. Follow disassembly steps up to and including "Remove Separate Type Front Seat Cushion Cove< (do NOT
remove Front Seat Cushion Heater Assembly) from the applicable Repair Manual.
Refer to TIS applicable model and model year Repair Manual.
3. Reassemble the replacement cushion cover. Follow reassembly steps beginning with "1nstall Separate Type Front Seat Cushion Cove< from the
applicable Repair Manual.
Refer to TIS applicable model and model year Repair Manual.
4. Install the seat assembly.
Refer to TIS applicable model and model year Repair Manual.
5. Reconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
6. Perform zero point calibration and sensitivity check if the front passenger seat is repaired.
7. Confirm the seat cushion condition for proper appearance.
8. Reinitialize the following Systems (if applicable) after the negative battery cable is reconnected:
^ Parking Assist Monitor System.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 11
^ Side Monitor System (w/ Parking Assist Monitor System)
^ Back Door Closer System
^ Power Back Door System
? 2012 Lexus, a division of Toyota Motor Sales, USA2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # CAN-TSB3190L Date: 120724
Canada - Engine Controls - Accelerator Pedal Sensor Precaution
L-TCI-3190
July 24, 2012
ACCELERATOR PEDAL SENSOR ASSEMBLY SERVICE PRECAUTION
Service Category
Engine/Hybrid System
Section
Engine Control
Market
Canada
APPLICABILITY:
INTRODUCTION:
This bulletin provides a service precaution related to the accelerator pedal sensor assembly during inspection, removal, and installation.
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 12
SERVICE PRECAUTION:
? 2012 Lexus, a division of Toyota Motor Sales, Canada2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # CRIB163R Date: 120901
Body - Sealing Hem Flanges And Body Seams
COLLISION REPAIR INFORMATION
FOR THE COLLISION REPAIR PROFESSIONAL
TITLE: SEALING HEM-FLANGES & BODY SEAMS
SECTION: EXTERIOR BULLETIN #163 REVISED
MODELS: ALL TOYOTA, LEXUS and SCION
DATE: SEPTEMBER 2012
To insure that factory-applied corrosion prevention measures are replicated during body repairs, always use a like-kind and quality automotive grade
sealer on hem-flanges and body seams.
During the manufacturing process, specialized seam sealing materials are used. Following a body repair, however, aftermarket seam sealer materials
are readily available that match factory quality, application, and purpose. OE replacement body components are not supplied with seam sealer.
If replacement body components are not properly seam sealed, or if poor quality seam sealing materials are used; the Toyota new car corrosion
warranty may become void. This includes not only the affected components, but may include any adjoining parts that may also fail or rust.
Refer to CPS-Toyota/Scion Policy 4.17 and CPS-Lexus Policy 4.15 for exclusions in the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Note:
Replacement seam sealer must be applied to all original equipment locations in addition to specifications. Review repair manuals for guidance
when performing these tasks.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 13
Refer to model-specific Collision Damage Repair Manuals for Body Panel Sealing Area specifications, available from the Technical Information
System (TIS) at (www.techinfo.toyota.com). Use the following door sealing illustration as an example.
? 2012 Lexus, a division of Toyota Motor Sales, USA
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0101-12 Date: 120925
Navigation System - HDD Navigation Program Set Up
L-SB-0101-12
September 25, 2012
HDD Navigation Program Setup
Service Category
Audio/Visual/Telematics
Section
Navigation/Multi Info Display
Market
USA
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 14
Applicability
Introduction
Lexus models equipped with Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Navigation may have their map data, Compact Disc Database (CDDB), and navigation head
unit software updated using the Navigation Update Tool and the HDD Navigation Programs Installer.
The Navigation Programs Installer is a PC application available on the Technical Information System (TIS) and must be installed on TIS Techstream
or an equivalent PC. The Navigation Update Tool is an essential service tool and the device must be properly configured before initial use.
Follow the procedures in this bulletin to locate and install the HDD Navigation Programs Installer and properly configure the Navigation Update
Tool. The HDD Navigation Programs Installer is a mandatory application that will be used to update the vehicles, map data, as well as the CDDB
data.
This bulletin will outline two processes that must be completed to prepare the Navigation Update Tool for initial use:
^ Download and install the Navigation Programs Installer onto a PC.
^ Perform initial setup of the Navigation Update Tool.
NOTE
^ In order to perform the download and setup procedure, the PC being used MUST be put in ADMINISTRATOR MODE. Software will NOT
complete setup if this is not met.
^ Before performing this procedure, disconnect all other USB peripheral and external storage devices (i.e., USB thumb drives, hard drives,
cameras, mice, etc.)
^ For additional details, refer to the "Navigation Update Tool Operating Manual" on TIS (under Diagnostics / Tools & Equipment / Navigation
Update Tool tabs, "Reference Documents.")
Warranty Information
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 15
Required Tools & Equipment
Application Installation
The Navigation Programs Installer should be installed on one or more of the dealership's TIS Techstream units, or any equivalent service department
PC.
Minimum PC requirements for the application to operate properly include:
^ Internet Explorer Version 6 SP2
^ 512 MB RAM
^ 1.0 GHz processor
^ 20 GB free hard drive space
^ 2 free USB ports
Download and Install Navigation Programs Installer
1. Turn on TIS Techstream.
2. Log into TIS (http://tis.toyota.com).
3. Download the "Navigation Programs Installer" from TIS.
A. Click on the TIS tab.
B. Click on the Diagnostics tab.
C. Click on the Tools and Equipment tab.
D. Click on the Navigation Update Tool tab under Tools.
E. Click on the "Navigation Programs Installer" under Available Software.
NOTE
If the TIS division preference is NOT set to Lexus (under the My Account area), the Navigation Update Tool tab will NOT display. HDD
Navigation information is a Lexus ONLY TIS option at this time.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 16
4. Click Run from the "File Download - Security Warning" screen to begin download.
5. Click Run to install program onto PC.
6. Click Next.
NOTE
If "Everyone" is NOT selected, future installation errors could occur.
7. Ensure the "Everyone" radio button is selected and click Next.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 17
8. Click Next.
9. Click Close.
Tool Setup
Setup ONLY needs to be completed once for each Navigation Update Tool.
1. Open the Navigation Programs Installer by clicking the icon on the desktop.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 18
2. Click Setup in the "Navigation Update Tool Main Menu".
3. Connect the Navigation Update Tool and press Continue.
A. Make sure the USB cable is secured in both the PC and the Navigation Update Tool USB ports.
B. Connect A/C power supply.
C. Turn power ON and press Continue.
4. Click the desired default language radio button and click Save and Continue Setup.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 19
5. Allow Setup to complete (it requires about 1 hour).
6. Confirm that the Setup screen appears with "Setup has finished successfully".
If an error screen appears, please consult the "Navigation Update Tool Operating Manual" on TIS (under Diagnostics / Tools & Equipment/
Navigation Update Tool tabs, "Reference Documents.")
? 2012 Lexus, a division of Toyota Motor Sales, USA
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # CAN-TSB3049L Date: 111021
Canada - Cooling System - Water Pump Diagnostic Information
L-TCI-3049
October 21, 2011
WATER PUMP INSPECTION AND DIAGNOSTIC TIPS
Service Category
Engine/Hybrid System
Section
Cooling
Market
Canada
APPLICABILITY:
INTRODUCTION:
This service bulletin contains water pump leak inspection and diagnostic Ups
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 20
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 21
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE:
NOTE:
Issue of this Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available. IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN
AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable, will apply.
? 2012 Lexus, a division of Toyota Motor Sales, Canada2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # CAN-TSB3105L Date: 120208
Canada - Engine - Oil Cooler Pipe, Oil Leak
Bulletin
L-TCI-3105
Issue Date
February 08, 2012
Market
Canada
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 22
Title
OIL COOLER PIPE SEEP
Service Category
Engine/Hybrid System
Section
Lubrication
APPLICABILITY:
INTRODUCTION:
Some 2007-2011 model year RX350 and 2010-2011 model year RX450h vehicles may exhibit an oil seep from the engine oil cooler pipes. Please
refer to the following repair procedure to address this condition.
PRODUCTION CHANGE INFORMATION:
This TSB applies to vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VINs shown.
PARTS INFORMATION:
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 23
1. Confirm the seep is from either of the oil cooler pipes. If neither oil cooler pipe is seeping, this TSB does NOT apply.
2. Remove and replace the oil cooler pipe assembly following the appropriate Repair Manual procedure.
Refer to the ETAS/TIS Library, applicable model and model year Repair Manual: Engine/Hybrid System - Engine Mechanical - 2GR-FE Engine
Mechanical: Engine Unit:
- 2007 - 2011 RX350: Disassembly / Reassembly
- 2010 - 2011 RX450h (2GR-FXE): Disassembly / Reassembly
3. Confirm the engine oil level is correct.
4. Start the engine and confirm there is no seeping from the oil cooler pipes.
NOTE:
Issue of this Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available. IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN
AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable, will apply.Technical Service
Bulletin # CAN-TSB3093L Date: 120113
Canada - A/C - Dust From A/C Vents
Bulletin
L-TCI-3093
Issue Date
January 13, 2012
Market
Canada
Title
DUST FROM HVAC VENTS
Service Category
Vehicle Interior
Section
Heating/Air Conditioning
APPLICABILITY
TSB SUPERSESSION NOTICE
The information contained in this TSB supersedes the information for ES350 in TSB L-TCI-2577.
- Production Change Information, Warranty Information, Parts Information, and Repair Procedure sections have all been updated.
TSB L-TCI-2577 is no longer applicable for 2007-2008 model year ES350. Be sure to review the entire content of this service bulletin before
proceeding.
INTRODUCTION
Some vehicles may exhibit a condition where dust or powder is visible from the HVAC vents. A newly designed evaporator and HVAC system
cleaning procedure has been developed to address this condition. The procedure listed below details evaporator removal, HVAC system cleaning,
blower motor cleaning, and installation.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 24
PARTS INFORMATION:
PRODUCTION CHANGE INFORMATION
This TSB applies to:
- 2007 - 2010 ES350 vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VIN shown.
- ALL 2010 - 2011 North American produced RX350 vehicles.
- 2010 Japan produced RX350 vehicles built BEFORE the Production Change Effective VINs shown.
- 2010 RX450h vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VINs shown.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 25
REQUIRED TOOLS & EQUIPMENT
REPAIR PROCEDURE
1. Confirm the condition.
Check for white dust or powder on the top of the instrument panel and interior surfaces.
If white dust or debris is present, check the cabin air filter for damage and for other external sources of debris. Proceed to step 2 for evaporator
replacement if no external debris sources are found.
2. Remove the evaporator.
Refer to ETAS/TIS Library, applicable model and model year Repair Manual:
Vehicle Interior-Heating/Air Conditioning-"Air Conditioning: Air Conditioning Unit:
- 2007 ES350: Removal / Disassembly"
- 2008 ES350: Removal / Disassembly"
- 2009 ES350: Removal / Disassembly"
- 2010 ES350: Removal / Disassembly"
- 2010 RX350: Removal / Disassembly"
- 2011 RX350: Removal / Disassembly"
- 2010 RX450h: Removal / Disassembly"
3. Remove the HVAC ducts and registers from the dash pad.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 26
4. Remove the center console ducts from the center console.
5. Verify all HVAC ducts and registers have been removed.
6. Blow out ALL the HVAC ducts with shop air.
7. Wipe out ALL the HVAC ducts with a damp shop rag.
8. Visually inspect the HVAC ducts and verify all of the dust has been removed. If additional dust is discovered, repeat steps 6 and 7 until the dust
has been completely removed.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 27
9. Clean the HVAC registers by blowing the registers out with shop air.
NOTE
If dust remains it may be necessary to clean in-between the vent fins with a small soft brush.
10. Clean the side window defroster vents by blowing them out with shop air as shown.
11. Disassemble the HVAC case and remove the evaporator. If the HVAC case was not previously disassembled and the evaporator removed, refer
to the disassembly procedure in step 2.
12. Remove the heater core and blow out with shop air.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 28
13. Blow out the evaporator tray with shop air. If there is still dust on the tray, use a small brush or damp shop rag to clean the tray.
14. Clean the thermistor with shop air.
NOTE
Do NOT remove the blend doors from the servo motors.
15. Use compressed air to blow out the evaporator case.
16. Wipe the evaporator case with a damp shop rag.
17. Clean the evaporator cover with a soft brush or damp shop rag.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 29
18. Wipe out the blower motor housing with a damp shop rag.
NOTE
It is critical to completely clean the blower motor housing as it may contain copper particles that can damage the protective coating on
the evaporator.
19. Use shop air and blow in-between the fan and the blower motor housing.
20. Install the NEW evaporator.
Refer to ETAS/TIS Library, applicable model and model year Repair Manual:
Vehicle Interior-Heating/Air Conditioning-"Air Conditioning: Air Conditioning Unit:
- 2007 ES350: Reassembly / Installation"
- 2008 ES350: Reassembly / Installation"
- 2009 ES350: Reassembly / Installation"
- 2010 ES350: Reassembly / Installation"
- 2010 RX350: Reassembly / Installation"
- 2011 RX350: Reassembly / Installation"
- 2010 RX450h: Reassembly / Installation"
21. Remove the dust cover on the back of the blower motor.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 30
22. Use shop air and blow dust out of the blower motor commutator, brushes and windings.
23. Reassemble the blower motor assembly.
24. After repair, confirm proper operation of the HVAC controls, and cooling and heater functions.
NOTE:
Issue of this Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available. IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN
AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable, will apply.Technical Service
Bulletin # CAN-TSB3088L Date: 111219
Canada - Air Bag System - Seat Cover Side Airbags
Bulletin
L-TCI-3088
Issue Date
December 19, 2011
Market
Canada
Title
SEAT COVER REPLACEMENT FOR SIDE AIRBAG EQUIPPED VEHICLES
Service Category
Vehicle Interior
Section
Seat
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 31
APPLICABILITY:
INTRODUCTION:
Beginning in 1998, Lexus introduced side airbags as optional equipment.
Lexus does NOT recommend replacement of original seat covers with non-Lexus leather or other seat cover materials on vehicles due to the
following:
- Seat covers NOT recommended by Lexus may affect side airbag performance, in general or in part, during an accident.
- Modifications that negatively affect side airbag performance can result in severe occupant injuries.
- Seat covers are an integral part of this safety system. Replacing fabric seat covers with non-Lexus leather or other seat cover materials may
compromise the effectiveness of this safety system.
- The design of the seat is complex, integrating safety and strength with comfort and luxury.
NOTE
Lexus original seat covers that were NOT designed for side airbag equipped seats cannot be used due to the effect on proper airbag
performance.
Lexus strongly discourages modifying original equipment seats that have optional side airbags.
Additionally, Lexus strongly advises against the installation or use of aftermarket seat covers, which could impair the performance of the side airbags
in the event of an accident.
WARRANTY INFORMATION:2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # CAN-TSB3086L Date: 111223
Canada - Suspension - Shock/Strut Replacement
Bulletin
L-TCI-3086
Issue Date
December 23, 2011
Market
Canada
Title
SHOCK ABSORBER REPLACEMENT CRITERIA
Service Category
Suspension
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 32
Section
Front Suspension
APPLICABILITY:
TSB SUPERSESSION NOTICE
The information contained in this TSB supersedes TSB No. T-TCI-2364.
- Applicability has been updated to include 2008 - 2012 model year Lexus vehicles.
TSB No. T-TCI-2364 is Obsolete and any printed versions should be discarded. Be sure to review the entire content of this service bulletin
before proceeding.
INTRODUCTION:
The purpose of this TSB is to provide a quick reference to assist in making easy judgements regarding shock absorber and strut replacements.
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 33
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 34
INSPECTION:
NOTE:
Issue of this Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available. IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN
AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable, will apply.Technical Service
Bulletin # CAN-TSB3042L Date: 110928
Canada - Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P2420 Set
Bulletin
L-TCI-3042
Issue Date
September 28, 2011
Title:
MIL "ON" DTC P2420
Service Category
Vehicle Interior
Section
Meter/Gauge/Display
Market
Canada
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 35
APPLICABILITY:
INTRODUCTION:
Some 2009 - 2010 model year Lexus vehicles may exhibit a MIL "ON" condition with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P2420 (Evaporative
Emission System Switching Valve Control Circuit High) present. The charcoal canister has been updated to address this condition.
PRODUCTION CHANGE INFORMATION:
This TSB applies to vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VIN shown.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 36
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
REQUIRED TOOLS & EQUIPMENT:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 37
PARTS INFORMATION:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
1. Using ETAS Techstream, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).
2. Are codes other than P2420 present?
- YES - Diagnose other DTC(s) first.
- NO - Continue to step 3.
3. Inspect VSV for proper power and ground circuits.
Perform the following checks with the Canister Pump Module Connector connected and back probe the pins to obtain the readings.
A. Check for voltage between Pin 9 (VLVB) and Chassis Ground. With IG ON, voltage should read between 9 V and 14 V.
- YES - Proceed to next step (3B).
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 38
- NO - This TSB does NOT apply - inspect and repair wiring.
B. Check for voltage between pin 8 (VGND) and Chassis Ground. With IG ON, voltage should read between 9 V and 14 V.
- YES - Proceed to next step (3C).
- NO - Vent Valve is open - proceed to step 4.
C. Using ETAS Techstream, activate the VSV and check voltage between pin 8 (VGND) and Chassis Ground.
Powertrain > Engine > Active Test > Activate the VSV for Vent Valve
- 9 V - 14 V present - This TSB does NOT apply - inspect and repair wiring.
- < 1 V present - Proceed to step 4.
4. Replace the Charcoal Canister Assembly.
Refer to TIS, applicable model and model year Repair Manual:
- 2010 ES350:
Engine/Hybrid System - Emission Control - "2GR-FE Emission Control: Canister: Removal / Installation"
- 2009 GS350:
Engine/Hybrid System - Emission Control - "2GR-FSE Emission Control: Canister: Removal / Installation"
- 2010 GS350:
Engine/Hybrid System - Emission Control - "2GR-FSE Emission Control: Canister: Removal / Installation"
- 2010 GS450h:
Engine/Hybrid System - Emission Control - "2GR-FSE Emission Control: Canister: Removal / Installation"
- 2010 GS460:
Engine/Hybrid System - Emission Control - "1UR-FSE Emission Control: Canister: Removal / Installation"
- 2010 HS250h:
Engine/Hybrid System - Emission Control - "2AZ-FXE Emission Control: Canister: Removal / Installation"
- 2010 IS250:
Engine/Hybrid System - Emission Control - "4GR-FSE Emission Control: Canister: Removal / Installation"
- 2010 IS350:
Engine/Hybrid System - Emission Control - "2GR-FSE Emission Control: Canister: Removal / Installation"
- 2010 IS250C:
Engine/Hybrid System - Emission Control - "4GR-FSE Emission Control: Canister: Removal / Installation"
- 2010 IS350C:
Engine/Hybrid System - Emission Control - "2GR-FSE Emission Control: Canister: Removal / Installation"
- 2010 IS-F:
Engine/Hybrid System - Emission Control - "2UR-GSE Emission Control: Canister: Removal / Installation"
- 2009 LS460/460L:
Engine/Hybrid System - Emission Control - "1UR-FSE Emission Control: Canister: Removal / Installation"
- 2010 LX570:
Engine/Hybrid System - Emission Control - "3UR-FE Emission Control: Canister: Removal / Installation"
- 2010 RX350:
Engine/Hybrid System - Emission Control - "2GR-FE Emission Control: Canister: Removal / Installation"
- 2010 RX450h:
Engine/Hybrid System - Emission Control - "2GR-FXE Emission Control: Canister: Removal / Installation"
- 2010 SC430:
Engine/Hybrid System - Emission Control - "3UZ-FE Emission Control: Canister: Removal / Installation"
5. Clear all DTCs using ETAS Techstream.
6. Perform the Automatic EVAP System Check and verify that no pending DTCs set.
System > Engine and ECT > Utility > EVAP System Check
NOTE
If the Automatic EVAP System Check fails to run, perform the following:
- Turn the ignition OFF.
- Turn ETAS Techstream OFF.
- Turn the ignition ON and ETAS Techstream ON and restart the Automatic EVAP System Check.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 39
NOTE:
Issue of this Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available.
IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable,
will apply.2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # CAN-TSB2972L Date: 110829
Canada - A/T - Torque Converter Bolt Installation
Bulletin
L-TCI-2972
Issue Date
August 29, 2011
Title:
TORQUE CONVERTER BOLT INSTALLATION
Service Category
Drivetrain
Section
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle
Market
Canada
APPLICABILITY:
INTRODUCTION:
The purpose of this TSB is to provide information regarding the installation of the correct torque converter bolts during automatic
transmission/transaxle assembly replacement. Incorrect torque converter bolts or missing washers can cause damage to the torque converter
assembly. Use the information in this bulletin when installing an automatic transmission/transaxle assembly.
NOTE
Not all applications will use washers on the torque converter bolts.
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE:
- When removing torque converter bolts and washers, take special care that the same bolts and washers are used when installing the torque
converter.
- Using an incorrect size bolt or washer may cause damage to the torque converter assembly.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 40
- Torque the bolts to the specification found in the applicable Repair Manual.
NOTE
In most applications there will be 1 black torque converter bolt, be sure to install this bolt first to aid in aligning the torque converter to
the flywheel assembly.
NOTE:
Issue of this Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available.
IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable,
will apply.2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # CAN-TSB2971L Date: 110907
Canada - Body - Tonneau Cover Rattle Noises
Bulletin
L-TCI-2971
Issue Date
September 7, 2011
Title:
TONNEAU COVER RATTLE NOISE
Service Category
Vehicle Interior
Section
Interior Panels/Trim
Market
Canada
Applicability
Introduction
Some 2010 - 2011 model year North American Produced (NAP) RX350 vehicles may exhibit a condition where there is a tonneau cover rattle noise
from the rear hatch area over rough roads. A revised tonneau cover has been developed to address this condition.
Production Change Information
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 41
This TSB applies to vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VINs shown.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
Repair Procedure
1. While driving down a rough road or raised pavement markers, confirm the rattle noise from the rear hatch area. Retest with the tonneau cover
removed.
- If noise is no longer present, this TSB may apply.
- If noise is still present, follow the Repair Manual for additional diagnostics.
2. Replace the tonneau cover assembly.
A. Press the release buttons to remove the tonneau cover.
B. Install the NEW tonneau cover assembly ensuring that the tonneau cover latches are fully engaged.
3. Confirm the repair.
NOTE:
Issue of this Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available.
IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable,
will apply.2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # CAN-TSB2964L Date: 110824
Canada - A/C - Side To Side Temperature Variation
Bulletin
L-TCI-2964
Issue Date
August 24, 2011
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 42
Title:
HEATER CORE RESTRICTION
Service Category
Vehicle Interior
Section
Heating/Air Conditioning
Market
Canada
APPLICABILITY:
INTRODUCTION:
Some 2008 - 2010 model year RX350, 2008 model year RX400h, and 2010 model year RX450h vehicles may exhibit a variation greater than 11°C
(20°F) in HVAC vent temperatures between the driver and passenger side when heat is utilized at the same temperature setpoint.
Use the following repair procedure to address this condition.
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 43
REQUIRED TOOLS & EQUIPMENT:
PARTS INFORMATION:
RX350:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 44
RX400h:
RX450h:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
1. Using a thermometer, confirm the condition matches the Introduction.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 45
2. Inspect for corrosion sediment under the radiator cap and in the bottom of the radiator reserve tank.
- If corrosion sediment is found - Continue to step 3.
- If no corrosion is found - Refer to the Technical Information System (TIS), applicable model and model year Repair Manual: Vehicle
Interior - Heating/Air Conditioning - "Air Conditioning System: Air Conditioning System: Problem Symptoms Table".
3. Drain all coolant from the radiator and reserve tank and close the radiator drain. Thoroughly rinse the reserve tank and pick-up tube with water
and reinstall.
4. Remove the thermostat from its housing and reassemble the housing.
IMPORTANT
This will allow the cleaning solution to circulate without first requiring the engine to reach operating temperature.
Refer to the Technical Information System (TIS), applicable model and model year Repair Manual: Engine/Hybrid System - Cooling - "2GR-FE
Cooling: Thermostat: Removal"
- 2008 / 2009 / 2010 RX350
- 2008 RX400h
- 2010 RX450h
5. Install a cooling system flush adapter between the heater core inlet and outlet hoses, bypassing the heater core.
6. Install a radiator neck fill adapter (not the funnel) and install a hose of equal diameter into neck adapter. Ensure length is sufficient for your
selected drain location.
NOTE
Selected drain must be direct to coolant waste or a pan/receptacle that can be transferred to coolant waste.
7. Install a fresh water hose onto the cooling system flush adapter.
8. Turn on the water and then start the engine and allow to idle. Continue to flush with a minimum of 95 liters (25 gallons) of water to completely
flush the system.
9. Turn off the engine and the fresh water supply.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 46
10. Install the cap over the fresh water inlet on the adapter.
11. Drain water from the radiator and then close the radiator drain.
12. Create a 10% citric acid solution by mixing 900 grams of citric acid powder with water in a clean 1 gallon container until well dissolved.
13. Fill the cooling system through the radiator neck with the citric acid solution. Add water to fill the cooling system.
14. Start the engine and allow to idle for 30 minutes.
15. Drain the citric acid solution from the radiator and close the drain.
16. Perform steps 6 - 15 again.
17. Perform steps 6 - 9 again.
18. Remove the cooling system flush adapter, then replace the heater core, radiator, water inlet housing, water inlet, water outlet, bypass pipe, ATF
cooler (if applicable), seals, and gaskets for your vehicle as listed in the Parts Information section and reinstall the thermostat in the housing.
Then proceed to step 19 at the end of this bulletin.
For parts replacement, refer to TIS, applicable model and model year Repair Manual:
RX 350:
- Radiator:
Engine/Hybrid System - Cooling - "2GR-FE Cooling: Radiator:
- 2008 RX350: Removal / Installation"
- 2009 RX350: Removal / Installation"
- 2010 RX350: Removal / Installation"
- Inlet Pipe/Thermostat:
Engine/Hybrid System - Cooling - "2GR-FE Cooling: Thermostat:
- 2008 RX350: Removal / Installation"
- 2009 RX350: Removal / Installation"
- 2010 RX350: Removal / Installation"
- Water Outlet/Bypass Pipe:
Engine/Hybrid System - Cooling - "2GR-FE Cooling: Water Pump:
- 2008 RX350: Removal / Installation"
- 2009 RX350: Removal / Installation"
- 2010 RX350: Removal / Installation"
- Heater Core:
Vehicle Interior - Heating/Air Conditioning - "Air Conditioning: Air Conditioning Unit:
- 2008 RX350: Removal / Installation"
- 2009 RX350: Removal / Installation"
- 2010 RX350: Removal / Installation"
- Oil Cooler:
Engine/Hybrid System - Lubrication - "2GR-FE Lubrication: Engine Oil Cooler (w/Oil Cooler):
- 2008 RX350: Removal / Installation"
- 2009 RX350: Removal / Installation"
- 2010 RX350: Removal / Installation"
RX 400h:
- Radiator:
Engine/Hybrid System - Cooling - "3MZ-FE Cooling: Radiator:
- 2008 RX400h: Removal / Installation"
- Inlet Pipe/Thermostat:
Engine/Hybrid System - Cooling - "3MZ-FE Cooling: Thermostat:
- 2008 RX400h: Removal / Installation"
- Water Outlet/Bypass Pipe:
Engine/Hybrid System - Cooling - "3MZ-FE Cooling: Water Pump:
- 2008 RX400h: Removal / Installation"
- Heater Core:
Vehicle Interior - Heating/Air Conditioning - "Air Conditioning: Air Conditioning Unit:
- 2008 RX 400h: Removal / Installation"
RX450h:
- Radiator:
Engine/Hybrid System - Cooling - "2GR-FXE Cooling: Radiator:
- 2010 RX450h: Removal / Installation"
- Inlet Pipe/Thermostat:
Engine/Hybrid System - Cooling - "2GR-FXE Cooling: Thermostat:
- 2010 RX450h: Removal / Installation"
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 47
- Water Outlet/Bypass Pipe:
Engine/Hybrid System - Cooling - "2GR-FXE Cooling: Water Pump:
- 2010 RX450h: Removal / Installation"
- Heater Core:
Vehicle Interior - Heating/Air Conditioning - "Air Conditioning: Air Conditioning Unit:
- 2010 RX450h: Removal / Installation"
- Oil Cooler:
Engine/Hybrid System - Lubrication - "2GR-FXE Lubrication: Engine Oil Cooler (w/Oil Cooler):
- 2010 RX450h: Removal / Installation"
19. Fill the system with the required coolant amount.
20. Confirm proper vehicle operation.
NOTE:
Issue of this Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available.
IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable,
will apply.2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # CAN-TSB2957L Date: 110825
Canada - Steering - Steering Column Rattle Noise
Bulletin
L-TCI-2957
Issue Date
August 25, 2011
Title:
STEERING COLUMN RATTLE NOISE
Service Category
Steering
Section
Steering Column
Market
Canada
APPLICABILITY:
INTRODUCTION:
Some 2010 - 2011 model year RX350 vehicles may exhibit a rattle noise from the EPS (Electric Power Steering) Column when turning the steering
wheel and/or when driving on rough surfaces. A new EPS steering column assembly is available to address this condition.
PRODUCTION CHANGE INFORMATION:
This TSB applies to:
- All 2010 - 2011 TMK built RX350 vehicles.
- 2010 - 2011 TMMC built RX350 vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VINs shown.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 48
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
PARTS INFORMATION:
REQUIRED TOOLS & EQUIPMENT:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
1. Conduct a road test to confirm a noise from the EPS steering column.
Did the EPS column exhibit a rattle noise from the column when turning steering wheel and/or driving on rough surfaces?
YES - This TSB DOES apply.
Review the Steering System and Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) PRECAUTION below, and then proceed to step 2 for EPS column
assembly replacement.
For complete Steering System Precaution information, refer to the Technical Information System (TIS), applicable model year Repair Manual:
2010 / 2011 RX350: Steering - Steering Column - "Steering Column: Steering System Precaution"
2. Remove the EPS Steering Column Assembly.
For complete removal procedures, refer to TIS, applicable model year Repair Manual:
2010 / 2011 RX350: Steering - Steering Column - "Steering Column: Steering Column Assembly: Removal"
3. Disassemble the EPS column assembly.
For complete EPS column disassembly procedures, refer to TIS, applicable model year Repair Manual:
2010 / 2011 RX350: Steering - Steering Column - "Steering Column: Steering Column Assembly: Disassembly"
4. Assemble the NEW EPS column assembly.
For complete EPS column reassembly procedures, refer to TIS, applicable model year Repair Manual:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 49
2010 / 2011 RX350: Steering - Steering Column - "Steering Column: Steering Column Assembly: Reassembly"
5. Install the NEW EPS column assembly.
For complete EPS column installation procedures, refer to TIS, applicable model year Repair Manual:
2010 / 2011 RX350: Steering - Steering Column - "Steering Column: Steering Column Assembly: Installation"
6. Perform Steering Lock ECU Registration Process.
Perform ECU communication ID registration to register recognition codes in ECUs (Procedure F).
For complete Key Registration procedures, refer to TIS, applicable model year Repair Manual:
2010 / 2011 RX350: Engine Immobilizer System - Theft Deterrent / Keyless Entry - "Engine Immobilizer System: Registration"
7. Clear the rotation angle sensor calibration value, initialize the rotation angle sensor, and calibrate the torque sensor zero point.
For complete initialization procedures, refer to TIS, applicable model year Repair Manual:
2010 / 2011 RX350: Steering - Power Assist Systems - "Power Assist Systems: Power Steering System: Calibration"
8. Verify SRS Warning Light Operation and that NO SRS system DTC(s) are present.
For complete SRS inspection procedures, refer to TIS, applicable model year Repair Manual:
2010 / 2011 RX350: Vehicle Interior - Supplemental Restraint Systems - "Supplemental Restraint Systems: Airbag System: Diagnosis System"
9. After the repair is complete, road test the vehicle to confirm the EPS column rattle noise condition is NO longer present.
NOTE:
Issue of this Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available.
IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable,
will apply.2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # CAN-TSB2955L Date: 110712
Canada - A/T - A/T World Standard Fluid
Bulletin
L-TCI-2955
Issue Date
July 12, 2011
Title:
WORLD STANDARD AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID
Service Category
Drivetrain
Section
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle
Market
Canada
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 50
Applicability
TSB SUPERSESSION NOTICE
The information contained in this TSB supersedes TSB No. 2451.
- Applicability has been updated to include 2009 - 2011 model year Lexus vehicles.
TSB No. 2451 is Obsolete and any printed versions should be discarded. Be sure to review the entire content of this service bulletin before
proceeding.
Introduction
World Standard (WS) Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) has been introduced in certain Lexus vehicles since 2004 Model Year. Here are some
important tips when working with ATF-WS in vehicles requiring its use.
Warranty Information
Required Tools & Equipment
Parts Information
Important Information
- The use of Genuine Toyota ATF-WS is recommended.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 51
- The use of additives or aftermarket fluids that are considered compatible or substitutes may result in shift concerns and damage to the
internal transmission components.
- ATF-WS is NOT compatible with T-IV or Dexron ATF.
- Containers storing Toyota ATF-WS should ALWAYS be sealed - If exposed to the atmosphere, ATF-WS may absorb moisture and
potentially cause shift concerns if used in operation.
- One time use only.
- When performing repairs on ATF-WS equipped transaxles, it is important to use only new, clean ATF-WS when refilling the ATM.
- ATF-WS equipped ATMs may use the overflow type procedure - Any fluid drained from the overflow plug should be discarded
following proper local regulations and never reused. Failure to do so could result in shift concerns and damage to the internal
transmission components.
NOTE:
Issue of this Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available.
IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable,
will apply.2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # CAN-TSB2953L Date: 110430
Canada - Interior - Front Seat Track Loose/Rattles
Bulletin
TSB2953
Issue Date
April 30, 2011
Title:
FRONT SEAT TRACK ABNORMAL OPERATION AND/OR RATTLE
Component
BODY COMPONENTS
Models:
'10 RX350
INTRODUCTION:
Some 2010 model year North American Produced (NAP) RX350 vehicles may exhibit a condition where the front seat track(s):
- Feel loose when entering and/or exiting the vehicle.
- Rattle when the seat is unoccupied.
An inspection and adjustment procedure has been developed to address this condition.
APPLICABILITY:
PRODUCTION CHANGE INFORMATION:
This TSB applies to vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VIN shown.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 52
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
PARTS INFORMATION:
REQUIRED TOOLS & EQUIPMENT:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
1. While sitting in the seat, confirm the condition by leaning against the seat back. If the seat feels slightly loose, this TSB may apply. If not, follow
the Repair Manual for additional diagnostics.
2. Remove the front and rear seat track covers.
3. Follow Repair Manual instructions to remove the affected seat assembly from the vehicle. Refer to the Repair Manual within E-TAS / TIS
library:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 53
- Division: Lexus
- Model: RX350
- Year: 2010
- Service Category: Vehicle Interior
- Section: Seat
- Keyword: Front Seat Assembly: Removal
4. Locate the two 12 mm front rail end cap nuts.
5. Using a 0.15 mm (0.006 in.) feeler gauge, measure the gap between the end cap nut and helical gear.
- If there is a gap of 0.15 mm (0.006 in.) or greater, proceed to step 6.
- If the gap is less than 0.15 mm (0.006 in.), refer to the Repair Manual within E-TAS / TIS library:
- Division: Lexus
- Model: RX350
- Year: 2010
- Service Category: Vehicle Interior
- Section: Seat
- Keyword: Front Seat Assembly: Inspection
6. Install the seat assembly into the vehicle leaving the seat mounting bolts finger tight.
Refer to the Repair Manual within E-TAS / TIS library:
- Division: Lexus
- Model: RX350
- Year: 2010
- Service Category: Vehicle Interior
- Section: Seat
- Keyword: Front Seat Assembly: Installation
7. Using the fore and aft adjuster, slide the seat to the foremost position.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 54
NOTICE
If the nuts are loosened in any position other than foremost, the drive screw can be rotated with the nut and misalignment between the
outer/inner tracks may occur.
8. With a 12 mm socket on a 6 inch extension, loosen the two end cap nuts. Do NOT remove the end cap nuts at this step.
9. Using the fore and aft adjuster, slide the seat to the rearmost position, and remove the two end cap nuts.
10. With a wire brush clean the stud threads.
11. Install the NEW end cap nuts (P/N 41315-48010) and torque the end cap nut. There should be 0 mm gap between the end cap nut and the top of
the helical gear.
Torque: 3.0 N-m (30.6 kgf-cm, 27 in-lbf)
NOTICE
- Do NOT over-tighten the end cap nut as it may damage the helical gear.
- If the seat track position is NOT set at the rearmost position when the nuts are installed, the drive screw can rotate.
12. Torque the seat bolts and install the bolt covers following the Repair Manual. Refer to the Repair Manual within E-TAS / TIS library:
- Division: Lexus
- Model: RX350
- Year: 2010
- Service Category: Vehicle Interior
- Section: Seat
- Keyword: Front Seat Assembly: Installation
13. Confirm the repair using the procedure in step 1. If excessive movement is present, follow the Repair Manual for additional diagnostics.
NOTE:
Issue of this Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available.
IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable,
will apply.2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # CAN-TSB2952L Date: 110908
Canada - Entertainment - USB/Ipod Limited Compatibility
Bulletin
L-TCI-2952
Issue Date
September 8, 2011
Title:
USB/iPod NOT RECOGNIZED
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 55
Service Category
Audio/Visual/Telematics
Section
Audio/Video
Market
Canada
APPLICABILITY:
INTRODUCTION:
Some 2010 Lexus vehicles may exhibit an intermittent operation of USB/iPod(TM) device condition while in use. A newly designed Multi-Media
Interface ECU has been developed to correct this condition.
PRODUCTION CHANGE INFORMATION:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 56
This TSB applies to vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VIN shown.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 57
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
REQUIRED TOOLS & EQUIPMENT:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 58
PARTS INFORMATION:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
1. Please compare customer's iPod(TM) with the compatible models table listed. If the customer's iPod(TM) is NOT listed, this TSB does NOT
apply.
2. Verify the condition.
NOTE
If USB device error occurs during every use, visually inspect port.
3. Verify the error condition continues when using a known good USB cable.
4. Replace the Multi-Media Interface ECU by following procedures in the repair manual. Refer to the Repair Manual within E-TAS / TIS library:
- Division: Lexus
- Model: Applicable Model
- Year: 2010
- Service Category: Audio/Visual/Telematics
- Section: Audio/Video
- Keyword: Multi-Media Interface ECU: Removal / Installation
5. Verify normal USB operation after repair.
NOTE:
Issue of this Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available. IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN
AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable, will apply.Technical Service
Bulletin # CAN-TSB2838L Date: 100831
Canada - Body - Rear Bumper Cover Gaps Develop
Bulletin
TSB2838
Issue Date
August 31, 2010
Title
REAR BUMPER COVER POOR FIT
Component
BODY
Models
'10 RX350; RX450h
INTRODUCTION:
Some 2010 model year RX350 and RX450h models may exhibit a condition where a gap develops at the left and/or right corners of the rear bumper
cover. This condition may occur more frequently in high ambient temperatures. An improved bumper cover and support have been developed to
correct this condition.
Follow the procedure in this bulletin to install the improved bumper cover and supports.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 59
APPLICABILITY:
PRODUCTION CHANGE INFORMATION:
This TSB applies to vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VIN shown.
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 60
PARTS INFORMATION:
REQUIRED TOOLS & EQUIPMENT:
TSB OVERVIEW:
This TSB provides an inspection and rear bumper cover replacement procedure to correct excessive gaps at the corners of the rear bumper.
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
1. Confirm that the rear bumper cover is loose at either the left and/or right side corner(s), below the taillight assembly as shown in Figure 1.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 61
A. If the rear bumper cover is loose, proceed to step 2 of the procedure.
B. If the rear bumper cover is NOT loose, STOP.
This TSB does NOT apply.
2. Remove No. 2 luggage compartment side cover protector.
A. Remove the 2 screws and grommet.
B. Remove the 4 screws, 2 Bolts and 3 Clips.
C. Disengage the 2 claws and remove the No. 2 luggage compartment side cover protector.
3. Remove the No. 1 luggage compartment side cover protector.
A. Remove the 2 bolts and 2 screws.
B. Remove the 2 clips and No. 1 luggage compartment side cover protector.
4. Remove rear bumper assembly.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 62
A. Put protective tape around the rear bumper assembly.
B. Using a clip remover, remove the 2 clips.
C. Remove the 2 screws and 2 rear bumper upper stoppers.
D. Remove the screw.
HINT
Use the same procedure for the RH side and LH side.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 63
E. Disengage the 7 claws.
HINT
Use the same procedure for the RH side and LH side.
F. Disconnect the No. 3 luggage room wire harness connector.
G. Disengage the 4 claws and 4 guides, and remove the rear bumper assembly as shown in the illustration.
5. Remove both the left and right side rear bumper supports and discard.
A. Remove the 2 screws.
B. Disengage the 2 claws and remove the rear bumper side supports and discard.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 64
6. Send the vehicle to the body shop for painting and finishing of the new bumper cover.
Refer to the Technical Information System (TIS), and the following manuals:
- Lexus Fundamental Body Repair Procedures manual
- Complete set of Lexus Collision Repair manuals
7. Transfer components from original bumper cover to new bumper cover,Refer to the Repair Manual within E-TAS / TIS library:
- Division: Lexus
- Model: RX350
- Year: 2010
- Service Category: Vehicle Exterior
- Section: Exterior Panels/Trim
- Keyword: Rear Bumper: Disassembly / Reassembly
8. Install the New left and right side rear bumper supports.
A. Engage the 2 claws.
B. Install the rear bumper side support LH with the 2 screws.
Torque: 7.5 N-m (77 kgf-cm, 66 in-lbf)
HINT
Use the same procedure for the RH side and LH side.
9. Install rear bumper assembly.
A. Connect the No. 3 luggage room wire harness connector.
B. Engage the 4 claws and 4 guides, and install the rear bumper assembly as shown in the illustration.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 65
C. Engage the 7 claws.
HINT
Use the same procedure for the RH side and LH side.
D. Install the screw.
Torque: 2.5 N-m (26 kgf-cm, 22 in-lbf)
HINT
Use the same procedure for the RH side and LH side.
E. Engage the 2 rear bumper upper stoppers and install the 2 screws.
Torque: 7.5 N-m (77 kgf-cm, 66 in-lbf)
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 66
F. Install the 2 clips.
10. Confirm fit and finish of rear bumper cover.
NOTE:
Issue of this Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available. IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN
AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable, will apply.Technical Service
Bulletin # CAN-TSB2811L Date: 100728
Canada - Interior - Front Center Console Side Inoperative
Bulletin
TSB2811
Issue Date
July 28, 2010
Title
FRONT CENTRE CONSOLE SLIDE INOPERATIVE
Component
BODY COMPONENTS
Models
'10 RX350, RX450h
INTRODUCTION:
Some 2010 model year RX350 and RX450h vehicles may exhibit a condition where the front centre console lid may be difficult to slide.
A revised Console Compartment Door Lock Assembly has been developed to improve this condition.
APPLICABILITY:
PRODUCTION CHANGE INFORMATION:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 67
This TSB applies to vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VIN shown.
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
PARTS INFORMATION:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 68
REQUIRED TOOLS & EQUIPMENT:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
1. Remove the Console Compartment Door Lock Sub-Assembly, No.1 Upper Box Plate and No. 2 Upper Box Plate. Refer to the Repair Manual
within E-TAS / TIS library:
- Division: Lexus
- Model: RX350/RX450h
- Year: 2010
- Service Category: Vehicle Interior
- Section: Interior Panels/Trim
- Keyword: Front Console Box: Disassembly
2. Install the New Console Compartment Door Lock Sub-Assembly, No.1 Upper Box Plate and No. 2 Upper Box Plate. Refer to the Repair Manual
within E-TAS / TIS library:
- Division: Lexus
- Model: RX350/RX450h
- Year: 2010
- Service Category: Vehicle Interior
- Section: Interior Panels/Trim
- Keyword: Front Console Box: Reassembly
3. Confirm front console box lock operation.
NOTE:
Issue of this Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available. IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN
AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable, will apply.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 69
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # CAN-TSB2810L Date: 100728
Canada - Emissions - MIL ON DTC P0456
Bulletin
TSB2810
Issue Date
July 28, 2010
Title
MIL "ON" CODE P0456
Component
FUEL
Models
'10 RX350
INTRODUCTION:
Some 2010 model year RX350 vehicles may exhibit a MIL "ON" condition with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0456 stored in the Engine
Control Module or ECM (SAE term: Powertrain Control Module/PCM).
Use the following repair procedure to address this condition.
APPLICABILITY:
PRODUCTION CHANGE INFORMATION:
This TSB applies to vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VIN shown.
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 70
PARTS INFORMATION:
REQUIRED TOOLS & EQUIPMENT:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
1. Using ETAS Techstream, clear any stored DTCs.
2. Using ETAS Techstream, perform the EVAP System Check to confirm DTC P0456 - Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected
(Very Small Leak), is pending.
3. Refer to the Repair Manual within E-TAS / TIS library:
- Division: Lexus
- Model: RX350
- Year: 2010
- Service Category: Engine/Hybrid System
- Section: Engine Control
- Keyword: 2GR-FE Engine Control: SFI System: Data List / Active Test
NOTE
If DTC P0456 does not return, this TSB does not apply.
4. If P0456 is present confirm the charcoal canister pump electrical connector is fully seated and verify no Evap leaks are present.
5. If no Evap leaks are found replace the charcoal canister assembly. Refer to the Repair Manual within E-TAS / TIS library:
- Division: Lexus
- Model: RX350
- Year: 2010
- Service Category: Engine/Hybrid System
- Section: Engine Control
- Keyword: 2GR-FE Emission Control: Canister: Removal/ Installation
6. After the repair is complete, clear any DTCs, and perform the EVAP System Check again confirm normal system operation and there are NO
pending DTCs.
NOTE:
Issue of this Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available. IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN
AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable, will apply.Technical Service
Bulletin # CAN-TSB2807L Date: 100728
Canada - Engine Control - MIL ON/O2 Sensor DTC's Set
Bulletin
TSB2807
Issue Date
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 71
July 28, 2010
Title
MIL "ON" DTC P2195, P2197, P0138, P0158, P0031, OR P0051
Component
ENGINE ELECTRICAL
Models
'10 RX350
INTRODUCTION:
Some 2010 model year RX350 vehicles may exhibit a MIL "ON" condition with one or more of the following Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)
stored in the Engine Control Module/ECM (SAE term: Powertrain Control Module/PCM):
- P2195 - Oxygen (A/F) Sensor Signal Stuck Lean (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
- P2197 - Oxygen (A/F) Sensor Signal Stuck Lean (Bank 2 Sensor 1)
- P0138 - Oxygen Sensor Circuit High Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
- P0158 - Oxygen Sensor Circuit High Voltage (Bank 2 Sensor 2)
- P0031 - Oxygen (A/F) Sensor Heater Control Circuit Low (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
- P0051 - Oxygen (A/F) Sensor Heater Control Circuit Low (Bank 2 Sensor 1)
Use the following repair procedure to address this condition.
APPLICABILITY:
PRODUCTION CHANGE INFORMATION:
This TSB applies to vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VIN shown.
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
PARTS INFORMATION:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 72
NOTE
To ensure correct sensor diagnosis, be certain to follow the steps outlined in the Repair Procedure prior to replacing parts.
REQUIRED TOOLS & EQUIPMENT:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
1. Using ETAS Techstream, verify DTC P2195, P2197, P0138, P0158, P0031, or P0051 are present.
2. Follow the procedure outlined in TSB2678, "MIL 'ON' DTC P0138 and/or P0158 Diagnostic Tips", to inspect the appropriate A/F and O2
sensor and circuit.
3. If the A/F sensor requires replacement, follow the procedure in the Repair Manual.
Refer to the Repair Manual within E-TAS / TIS library:
Removal:
- Division: Lexus
- Model: RX350
- Year: 2010
- Service Category: Engine/Hybrid System
- Section: Engine Control
- Keyword: 2GR-FE Engine Control: Air Fuel Ratio Sensor: Removal
Installation:
- Division: Lexus
- Model: RX350
- Year: 2010
- Service Category: Engine/Hybrid System
- Section: Engine Control
- Keyword: 2GR-FE Engine Control: Air Fuel Ratio Sensor: Installation
4. Clear DTCs.
5. Test drive the vehicle to confirm the condition has been corrected.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 73
NOTE:
Issue of this Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available. IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN
AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable, will apply.Technical Service
Bulletin # CAN-TSB2806L Date: 100618
Canada - Body - Power Back Door,Popping/Creaking Noise
Bulletin
TSB2806
Issue Date
June 18, 2010
Title
POWER BACK DOOR NOISE
Component
BODY
Models
'04-'06 RX330, '06-'08 RX400h;'07-'10 RX350;'10 RX450h
TSB SUPERSESSION NOTICE
The information contained in this bulletin supersedes TSB2459.
- Applicability has been updated to include 2009 - 2010 RX350, 2008 RX400h and 2010 RX450h vehicles.
- Parts Information has been updated.
TSB2459 is Obsolete and any printed versions should be discarded. Be sure to review the entire content of this service bulletin before
proceeding.
INTRODUCTION:
Some customers may experience a condition where the power back door will make a "popping" or "creaking" noise from the power back drive unit.
The power back door drive assembly has been improved to remedy this condition. Use the following procedure to remove and replace the power
back door drive assembly.
APPLICABILITY:
PRODUCTION CHANGE INFORMATION:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 74
This TSB applies to all 2004 - 2006 RX330, 2007 - 2009 RX350, 2006 - 2008 RX400h and 2010 RX350 and RX 450h vehicles produced BEFORE
the Production Change Effective VINs shown.
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
PARTS INFORMATION:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 75
REQUIRED SSTS:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
1. Record radio presets.
2. Disconnect the battery from the negative (-) battery terminal.
For 2004 - 2009 model year vehicles continue to step 3.
For replacement of the Power Back Door Unit Assembly on 2010 MY RX350 and 2010 RX450h. Refer to the Repair Manual within E-TAS /
TIS library:
- Division: Lexus
- Model: RX350 / RX450h
- Year: 2010
- Service Category: Vehicle Exterior
- Section: Door/Hatch
- Keyword: Power Back Door Drive Unit: Removal
3. Remove the trim panel and power back door linkage from the back door.
Using the plastic pry tool, disengage the 3 claws and remove the trim panel.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 76
4. Remove the back window panel trim upper.
A. Using the plastic pry tool, disengage the 2 claws and 7 clips and remove the trim upper.
B. Remove the 2 bolts holding the linkage to the door.
5. Remove the roof headlining assembly. Refer to the Repair Manual within E-TAS / TIS library:
- Division: Lexus
- Model: RX330
- Year: 2004 / 2005
- Service Category: Vehicle Interior
- Section: Interior Panels/Trim
- Keyword: Roof Headlining Assy: Replacement
- Division: Lexus
- Model: RX330
- Year: 2006
- Service Category: Vehicle Interior
- Section: Interior Panels/Trim
- Keyword: Interior: Roof Headlining Assy: Removal
- Keyword: Interior: Roof Headlining Assy: Installation
- Division: Lexus
- Model: RX350
- Year: 2007 / 2008 / 2009
- Service Category: Vehicle Interior
- Section: Interior Panels/Trim
- Keyword: Interior: Roof Headlining Assy: Removal
- Keyword: Interior: Roof Headlining Assy: Installation
- Division: Lexus
- Model: RX400h
- Year: 2006 / 2007 / 2008
- Service Category: Vehicle Interior
- Section: Interior Panels/Trim
- Keyword: Interior: Roof Headlining Assy: Removal
- Keyword: Interior: Roof Headlining Assy: Installation
6. Remove the power back door drive assembly.
A. Disconnect the connector.
B. Remove the 4 bolts and the power back door drive assembly.
7. Install the NEW power back door drive assembly.
A. Apply adhesive to the threads of the 6 bolts.
Adhesive: Three Bond 1324 (P/N 08833-00070) or equivalent
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 77
B. Install the NEW drive unit to the vehicle body with the 4 bolts in the order shown.
Torque: 31 N-m (316 kgf-cm, 23 ft-lbf)
C. Install the drive unit arm to the door with the 2 bolts.
Torque: 31 N-m (316 kgf-cm, 23 ft-lbf)
D. Install the trim panel.
8. Install the roof headlining assembly in reverse order of disassembly.
9. Re-initialize any affected power systems.
10. Set radio presets and clock.
NOTE:
Issue of this Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available. IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN
AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable, will apply.Technical Service
Bulletin # CAN-TSB2801L Date: 100526
Canada - Body - Roof Rack Crossbar Installation
Bulletin
TSB2801
Issue Date
May 26, 2010
Title
ROOF RACK CROSSBAR INSTALLATION POSITION
Component
BODY
Models
'10 RX350; RX450h
INTRODUCTION:
To prevent the creation of excessive wind noise condition due to improper positioning, the position of the roof rack crossbars during PPO/DIO
installation has been standardized. Please follow the instructions in this bulletin to ensure proper positioning of the roof rack crossbars.
APPLICABILITY:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 78
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
PARTS INFORMATION:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
Install the front crossbar in the most forward position just touching the front stopper and install the rear crossbar in the most rearward position just
touching the rear stopper. Updated installation instructions are posted on ETAS.
Refer to ETAS -> Customization -> Installation Instructions -> CIIL0177 2010 model year RX 350 / RX 450h, Cross Bars.
NOTE:
Issue of this Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available. IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN
AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable, will apply.Technical Service
Bulletin # CAN-TSB2799L Date: 100526
Canada - Engine Control - MIL ON DTC's P0138/P0607
Bulletin
TSB2799
Issue Date
May 26, 2010
Title
MIL "ON" DTC P0138 AND P0607
Component
ENGINE ELECTRICAL
Models
'10 RX350
INTRODUCTION:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 79
Some North American produced 2010 model year RX350 vehicles may exhibit a MIL "ON" condition with the following Diagnostic Trouble Codes
(DTCs) stored in the Engine Control Module/ECM (SAE term: Powertrain Control Module/PCM).
- P0138 - Oxygen Sensor Circuit High Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
- P0607 - Control Module Performance
Use the following repair procedure to address this condition.
APPLICABILITY:
PRODUCTION CHANGE INFORMATION:
This TSB applies to vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VIN shown.
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
REQUIRED TOOLS & EQUIPMENT:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
1. Using ETAS Techstream, confirm DTCs P0138 and P0607 are present.
2. Inspect connector AF2 for any signs of corrosion or moisture intrusion.
- If any concerns are noted with connector AF2, refer to TSB2791, "Water Intrusion from A-Pillar Seam Sealer", for the appropriate repair
procedure.
- If NO concerns are noted with connector AF2, refer to TSB2678, "MIL 'ON' DTC P0138 and/or P0158 Diagnostic Tips", for further
diagnostic information.
3. After the repair is completed clear all DTCs and test drive the vehicle to confirm the condition has been corrected.
NOTE:
Issue of this Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available. IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN
AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable, will apply.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # CAN-TSB2793L Date: 100621
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 80
Canada - Windows - Front Door Glass, Wind Noise
Bulletin
TSB2793
Issue Date
June 21, 2010
Title
WIND NOISE FROM FRONT SIDE GLASS
Component
BODY
Models
'10 RX350
INTRODUCTION:
Some 2010 RX350 vehicles may exhibit a wind turbulence noise condition noticeable from the front side window area. This condition is most
notable at highway speeds. New acoustic glass is available to improve this condition.
NOTE
This TSB addresses unusual interior noise that may be present in some vehicles, by carefully following the instructions in this TSB, noise
levels may be improved. Customers should be made aware that some level of wind turbulence noise, especially in cross wind conditions, is
present in all vehicles. A vehicle, such as the RX350, which is one of the quietest vehicles in its segment today, may tend to draw attention to
normal wind turbulence or rushing sounds because of the relative absence of other ambient noises.
APPLICABILITY:
PRODUCTION CHANGE INFORMATION:
This TSB applies to vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VIN shown.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 81
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
PARTS INFORMATION:
REQUIRED TOOLS & EQUIPMENT:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
Use the same procedure for the left and right sides of the vehicle as needed.
1. Confirm front side windows are the source of wind turbulence noise.
A. If noise is verified, proceed to step 2 - Remove the side window glass.
B. If noise is NOT confirmed from the side window, STOP. The source of the noise may be coming from a different location. This TSB does
NOT apply. Diagnose the source of the wind turbulence noise and repair as needed.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 82
2. Remove the side window glass.
For side window glass removal instructions refer to the Repair Manual within E-TAS / TIS library:
- Division: Lexus
- Model: RX350
- Year: 2010
- Service Category: Vehicle Exterior
- Section: Door/Hatch
- Keyword: Front Door: Disassembly
3. Replace the front side window glass.
For side window glass installation instructions refer to the Repair Manual within E-TAS / TIS library:
- Division: Lexus
- Model: RX350
- Year: 2010
- Service Category: Vehicle Exterior
- Section: Door/Hatch
- Keyword: Front Door: Reassembly
4. Glass Breakage Sensor Calibration, if applicable.
A. For vehicles equipped with a Glass Breakage Sensor, the sensor position and/or system sensitivity will need to be calibrated for the new
glass.
B. Determine if the Glass Breakage Sensor was installed at the Factory or as a Post Production Option (PPO)/ Dealer Installed Option (DIO).
C. If Factory Installed, follow the PPO/DIO Glass Breakage Sensor Accessory Installation Procedure in TIS to adjust GBS system sensitivity
for acoustic glass.
D. If PPO/DIO, follow the PPO/DIO Glass Breakage Sensor Accessory Installation Procedure in TIS to adjust GBS system sensitivity and
relocate the GBS microphone for acoustic glass.
NOTE
System Sensitivity should be set to 9.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 83
5. Confirm that noise has been reduced.
NOTE:
Issue of this Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available. IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN
AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable, will apply.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # CAN-TSB2791L Date: 100521
Canada - Body - A-Pillar Water Leak
Bulletin
TSB2791
Issue Date
May 21, 2010
Title
WATER INTRUSION FROM A-PILLAR SEAM SEALER
Component
BODY
Models
'10 RX350
INTRODUCTION:
Some North American produced 2010 model year RX350 vehicles may exhibit water intrusion from the A-Pillar area that may be accompanied by a
MIL "ON and one or more Air Fuel Sensor related Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Please use the following repair procedure to address this
condition.
APPLICABILITY:
PRODUCTION CHANGE INFORMATION:
This TSB applies to vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VIN shown.
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 84
PARTS INFORMATION:
REQUIRED TOOLS & EQUIPMENT:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
1. Confirm the water leak.
Run water over the exterior of the vehicle (near top of windshield) and check interior for water intrusion.
2. Confirm the water leak location.
A. Remove the A-pillar garnish.
2010 RX 350 vehicles with a production date of 07/2009 and earlier [steps 1 - 3]:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 85
1. Pull the upper part of the garnish toward the inside of the cabin and disengage the 2 clips.
2. Cut off clip A.
3. Disengage the 2 guides and remove the front pillar garnish.
2010 RX 350 vehicles with a production date of 08/2009 and later [steps 4 - 6]:
4. Pull the upper part of the garnish toward the inside of the cabin and disengage the garnish from the base of the 2 clips.
5. Turn the end of the front pillar garnish clip A 90° with needle-nosed pliers and remove it from the front pillar garnish.
HINT
Tape the tips of the needle-nosed pliers before use.
6. Disengage the 2 guides and remove the front pillar garnish.
NOTE
- Front pillar garnish clips are reusable if they are NOT removed from the vehicle and have NO damage.
- Replace the front pillar garnish clips with new ones if they are removed from the vehicle.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 86
B. Run water over the roof drip moulding area and inspect the interior A-pillar area for water intrusion.
3. If water is present in the interior, use a plastic pry tool to disengage the front clip and remove the roof drip side finish moulding on the affected
side.
If water is NOT present in the interior, continue diagnostics using the repair manual.
4. Clean the affected area using 3M(TM) General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner or equivalent and apply body seam sealer (3M(TM) Flexiclear or
equivalent) to the concern area.
5. Confirm the repair by running water over the effected area.
6. Reinstall the roof drip side moulding, making sure to engage the front clip.
7. Reinstall the A-Pillar garnish.
2010 RX 350 vehicles with a production date of 07/2009 and earlier [step A]:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 87
A. Using the NEW front pillar garnish, engage the 2 guides and 2 clips, and then install the front pillar garnish LH.
2010 RX 350 vehicles with a production date of 08/2009 and later [steps B - E]:
B. Confirm that the front pillar garnish clip is NOT damaged.
NOTICE
- If there is any damage, replace the garnish clip with a new one.
- When a garnish clip is being replaced, make sure to install it in the direction shown in the illustration.
C. Engage the 2 guides.
D. Turn the end of the front pillar garnish clip 90 with needle-nosed pliers and install it to the front pillar garnish.
E. Engage the 2 clips to install the front pillar garnish.
8. Inspect the AF2 connector for corrosion and clean/repair as needed.
9. Clear all DTCs and test drive to verify the repairs.
10. If the MIL "ON" condition continues to occur after this procedure, refer to the Repair Manual for further diagnostic procedures and
specifications.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 88
NOTE:
Issue of this Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN
AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable, will apply.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # CAN-TSB2770L Date: 100203
Canada - Cell Phone - Bluetooth(R) Sound Quality Improvement
Bulletin
TSB2770
Issue Date
February 3, 2010
Title
BLUETOOTH SYSTEM LANDLINE SIDE SOUND QUALITY IMPROVEMENT
Component
BODY ELECTRICAL
Models
'10 ES350; HS250h; IS F; IS250; IS250C; IS350; IS350C; LX570; RX350; RX450h; SC430
INTRODUCTION:
Some customers may experience a condition, when using the Bluetooth hands-free system to make a phone call, where the person on the landline
side of the phone call hears static noise or distortion.
An updated radio assembly has been developed to address this condition.
APPLICABILITY:
PRODUCTION CHANGE INFORMATION:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 89
This TSB applies to all 2010 SC 430 vehicles, and to 2010 vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VINs shown.
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 90
PARTS INFORMATION:
REQUIRED TOOLS & EQUIPMENT:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
1. Confirm the condition using the customer's mobile phone.
2. Replace the radio assembly.
Refer to the Repair Manual within E-TAS / TIS library:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 91
- Division: Lexus
- Model: Applicable Model
- Year: 2010
- Service Category: Audio/Visual/Telematics
- Section: Audio/Video
- Keyword: Audio/Video: Radio Receiver: Removal / Installation
3. Pair the customer's mobile phone to the Bluetooth system.
4. Confirm normal Bluetooth system operation including improved sound quality on the landline side.
NOTE:
Issue of this Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available. IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN
AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable, will apply.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # CAN-TSB2767L Date: 091224
Canada - Engine Control - MIL ON DTC's P0351- P0356 Set
Bulletin
TSB2767
Issue Date
December 24, 2009
Title
MIL "ON" DTC P0351, P0352, P0353, P0354, P0355 OR P0356
Component
ENGINE ELECTRICAL
Models
'08-'09 ES350; '08-'10 RX350
INTRODUCTION:
Some 2008 - 2009 model year ES 350 and 2008 - 2010 model year RX 350 vehicles may exhibit a MIL "ON" condition with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC) P0351, P0352, P0353, P0354, P0355, or P0356 (Ignition Coil Primary/Secondary Circuit) stored in the Engine Control Module / ECM
(SAE term: Powertrain Control Module/PCM). Use the following repair procedure to address this condition.
APPLICABILITY:
PRODUCTION CHANGE INFORMATION:
This TSB applies to vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VIN shown.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 92
PARTS INFORMATION:
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
REQUIRED TOOLS & EQUIPMENT:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
1. Using ETAS Techstream, confirm one of the following DTCs is present:
- P0351 - Ignition Coil "A" Primary / Secondary Circuit
- P0352 - Ignition Coil "B" Primary / Secondary Circuit
- P0353 - Ignition Coil "C" Primary / Secondary Circuit
- P0354 - Ignition Coil "D" Primary / Secondary Circuit
- P0355 - Ignition Coil "E" Primary / Secondary Circuit
- P0356 - Ignition Coil "F" Primary / Secondary Circuit
2. Inspect the wire harness, connectors, and power source per Repair Manual procedure.
Refer to the Repair Manual within E-TAS / TIS library:
- Division: Lexus
- Model: ES350
- Year: 2008/ 2009
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 93
- Service Category: Engine/Hybrid System
- Section: Engine Control
- Keyword: 2GR-FE Engine Control System: SFI System: P0351-P0356: Ignition Coil "A" Primary / Secondary Circuit
- Division: Lexus
- Model: RX350
- Year: 2008/ 2009/ 2010
- Service Category: Engine/Hybrid System
- Section: Engine Control
- Keyword: 2GR-FE Engine Control System: SFI System: P0351-P0356: Ignition Coil "A" Primary / Secondary Circuit
3. If NO concerns are noted with the wire harness, connectors, or power source, replace the affected ignition coil.
Refer to the Repair Manual within E-TAS / TIS library:
- Division: Lexus
- Model: ES350
- Year: 2008/ 2009
- Service Category: Engine/Hybrid System
- Section: Engine Control
- Keyword: 2GR-FE Ignition: Ignition Coil: Removal / Installation
- Division: Lexus
- Model: RX350
- Year: 2008/ 2009
- Service Category: Engine/Hybrid System
- Section: Engine Control
- Keyword: 2GR-FE Ignition: Ignition Coil: Removal / Installation
- Division: Lexus
- Model: RX350
- Year: 2010
- Service Category: Engine/Hybrid System
- Section: Engine Control
- Keyword: 2GR-FE Ignition: Ignition Coil and Spark Plug: Removal / Installation
4. Test drive the vehicle to confirm the condition has been corrected.
NOTE:
Issue of this Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available. IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN
AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable, will apply.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # CAN-TSB2766L Date: 100114
Canada - Lighting - Vanity Mirror Light Flickers
Bulletin
TSB2766
Issue Date
January 14, 2010
Title
VANITY MIRROR LIGHT FLICKER
Component
BODY ELECTRICAL
Models
'10 RX350
INTRODUCTION:
Some 2010 model year RX350 TMMC produced vehicles may exhibit flickering of the sunvisor vanity mirror light. A revised visor assembly has
been developed to address this condition.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 94
APPLICABILITY:
PRODUCTION CHANGE INFORMATION:
This TSB applies to vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VIN shown.
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
PARTS INFORMATION:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 95
REQUIRED TOOLS & EQUIPMENT:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
1. Fold the visor down.
2. Open the visor mirror door.
3. Confirm the vehicle's visor mirror vanity light exhibits flicker condition.
NOTE
The visor may have to be moved forward and backwards for flicker condition to appear.
4. Replace the visor assembly exhibiting flicker condition.
For removal procedures refer to the Repair Manual within E-TAS / TIS library:
- Division: Lexus
- Model: RX350
- Year: 2010
- Service Category: Vehicle interior
- Section: Interior Panels/Trim
- Keyword: Roof Headlining: Removal
5. Confirm successful repair.
NOTE:
Issue of this Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available. IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN
AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable, will apply.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # CAN-TSB2757L Date: 091216
Canada - A/C - Warm Air From Vents With A/C On
Bulletin
TSB2757
Issue Date
December 16, 2009
Title
WARM AIR FROM HVAC VENTS WITH A/C ON - DTC B1479
Component
HEATING/ AIR CONDITIONING
Models
'10 RX350
INTRODUCTION:
Some RX 350 vehicles may exhibit a condition where the HVAC system intermittently blows warm air from the vents with the A/C on.
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) B1479 (Flow Sensor Circuit) may be stored in the A/C system as either a Current or History DTC. A
malfunctioning A/C compressor flow sensor may cause this condition.
Follow the procedure in this TSB to determine if this service bulletin is applicable and to repair the vehicle.
APPLICABILITY:
PRODUCTION CHANGE INFORMATION:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 96
This TSB applies to vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VIN shown below.
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
PARTS INFORMATION:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 97
REQUIRED TOOLS & EQUIPMENT:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
1. Using ETAS Techstream, check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in the A/C system.
- If DTC B1479 is stored as a Current or History DTC, go to step 2.
- If DTC B1479 is NOT stored as Current or History, this TSB does NOT apply. Refer to the problem symptoms table of the Repair Manual.
Refer to the Repair Manual within E-TAS / TIS library:
- Division: Lexus
- Model: RX350
- Year: 2010
- Service Category: Vehicle Interior
- Section: Heating/Air Conditioning
- Keyword: Air Conditioning System/ Problem Symptoms Table
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 98
2. Using Techstream, inspect the the flow sensor.
- If the flow sensor value does NOT change when switching the A/C system/blower ON and OFF, and is stuck between 0.7 and 4.0 V, go to
step 4.
- If the flow sensor voltage is normal, go to step 3 (wire harness check).
3. Check the harness and connector (A/C compressor flow sensor - A/C amplifier).
A. Disconnect the A/C amplifier connector.
B. Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 99
Standard Resistance:
- If any of the harness resistance tests fail, this TSB does NOT apply.
Repair or replace the harness and go to step 5.
- If all tests are within specifications, proceed to step 4.
4. Remove and replace the A/C compressor.
Refer to the Repair Manual within E-TAS / TIS library:
- Division: Lexus
- Model: RX350
- Year: 2010
- Service Category: Vehicle Interior
- Section: Heating/Air Conditioning
- Keyword: Heating/Air Conditioning: Compressor: Removal/Installation
5. Clear all DTCs and confirm the A/C system has returned to proper operation.
NOTE:
Issue of this Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available. IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN
AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable, will apply.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # CAN-TSB2754L Date: 091203
Canada - Towing - 4WD Towing Precautions
Bulletin
TSB2754
Issue Date
December 3, 2009
Title
4WD TOWING PRECAUTIONS
Component
DRIVELINE
Models
'10 RX350
INTRODUCTION:
The only acceptable towing method for vehicles equipped with an Active Torque Control 4WD system is to have all four wheels off the ground. Flat
towing or towing where only the front or rear wheels are supported may damage the all-wheel drive system. Follow the procedures below for proper
towing methods.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 100
APPLICABILITY:
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
TOWING PRECAUTIONS:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 101
NOTICE
To prevent damaging the vehicle when towing:
- Never tow a vehicle equipped with an Active Torque Control 4WD system with the front or rear wheels on the ground.
- See the owner's Manual for your specific vehicle to find complete towing instructions.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 102
NOTE:
Issue of this Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available. IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN
AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable, will apply.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # CAN-TSB2749L Date: 091116
Canada - Body - Front Bumper Cover Poor Fit
Bulletin
TSB2749
Issue Date
November 16, 2009
Title
FRONT BUMPER COVER POOR FIT
Component
BODY
Models
'10 RX350; RX450h
INTRODUCTION:
Some 2010 model year RX 350 and RX 450h models may exhibit a condition where a gap develops at the left and/or right corners of the front
bumper cover. This condition may occur more frequently in high ambient temperatures. An improved bumper retainer has been developed to correct
this condition. Please follow the procedure in this bulletin to install the improved bumper retainers.
APPLICABILITY:
PRODUCTION CHANGE INFORMATION:
This TSB applies to all RX 350, 450h vehicles built at TMK and RX 350 vehicles built at TMMC produced BEFORE the Production Change
Effective VINs shown below.
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 103
PARTS INFORMATION:
REQUIRED TOOLS & EQUIPMENT:
TSB OVERVIEW.
This TSB provides an inspection and bumper retainer replacement procedure to correct excessive gaps at the corners of the front bumper.
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
1. Confirm that the front bumper cover is loose at either the left and/or right side corner(s), below the headlight assembly as shown in Figure 1.
A. If the front bumper cover is loose, replace both retainer assemblies and proceed to step 2 of the removal procedure.
B. If the front bumper cover is NOT loose, STOP. This TSB does NOT apply.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 104
2. Remove the engine room side cover.
A. Remove the 4 clips.
B. Disengage the guide and remove the engine room side cover.
3. Remove the engine room side cover LH.
A. Remove the 4 clips.
B. Disengage the guide and remove the engine room side cover LH.
4. Remove the 6 clips and cool air intake duct seal.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 105
5. Remove the 2 hood center cushions.
6. Remove the front bumper assembly.
HINT
Use the same procedure for the RH side and LH side.
A. Apply protective tape around the front bumper assembly.
B. Using a screwdriver, turn the pins 90 degrees and remove the 2 pin hold clips.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 106
C. Slightly pull the fender liner away and remove the screw and front bumper seal clip.
HINT
Remove the fender liner clip just above the seam for additional access.
NOTICE
Remove the bumper seal clip completely before pulling on the bumper cover to prevent damage.
D. Remove 3 screw style clips on top and 1 lower clip behind the emblem from the front bumper assembly.
E. Remove the 2 center bolts from the bottom of the front bumper assembly.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 107
F. Remove the 2 clips and 2 screws from the bottom of the front bumper assembly.
G. Disengage the 4 claws on each side.
NOTE
To prevent damage to the front bumper cover, carefully disengage the 4 claws.
H. Using a moulding remover, disengage the claw under the headlamp.
I. Disconnect the fog light connector.
J. Disconnect the No. 1 ultrasonic sensor connector (with Intuitive Parking Assist System).
K. Disconnect the headlight cleaner hose (with Headlight Cleaner System).
NOTICE
Prepare a drain pan in case washer fluid leaks.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 108
L. Remove the front bumper assembly as shown in Figure 14.
NOTE
To ensure the effectiveness of the repair, inspect the bumper cover mounting tabs for any damage or deformation.
7. Remove both the left and right side front bumper retainers and discard.
A. Remove the bolt and screw.
B. Disengage the 2 claws and remove the front bumper side retainer for both left and right side.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 109
8. Cut the ridge from the forward clip on the NEW REPLACEMENT retainer as shown in Figures 16 and 17. Cut the shaded area with a knife so it
is even with the clip.
9. Install the NEW left and right side front bumper retainers.
A. Engage the 2 claws.
B. Install the bolt and screw.
10. Install the front bumper cover in the reverse order of removal.
For front bumper cover installation instructions, Refer to the Repair Manual within E-TAS / TIS library:
- Division: Lexus
- Model: RX35 ; RX450h
- Year: 2010
- Service Category: Vehicle Exterior
- Section: Exterior Panels/Trim
- Keyword: Exterior Panels/Trim: Front Bumper: Installation
NOTE:
Issue of this Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available. IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN
AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable, will apply.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # CAN-TSB2704L Date: 091118
Canada - Entertainment - XM Satellite Radio Inoperative
Bulletin
TSB2704
Issue Date
November 18, 2009
Title
XM SATELLITE RADIO INOPERATIVE UNTIL IGNITION KEY IS CYCLED
Component
BODY ELECTRICAL
Models
All Models equipped with XM Satellite Radio
INTRODUCTION:
Some customers with vehicles that are equipped with a PPO/DIO accessory XM Satellite Radio Receiver (P/N 86180-0W030 or 86180-0W031)
may exhibit one or more of the following conditions:
- XM Satellite Radio becomes non-operational or locked while in use.
- Sound output becomes sporadic or non-existent.
When either of these conditions occur, cycling the ignition from "ON"-"OFF"-"ON" restores normal operation.
Improved XM Satellite Radio Receiver exchange units are available to correct this condition.
NOTE
- This condition is NOT reception related. Switching modes will not correct the condition.
- This condition affects XM ONLY - AM/FM reception is normal when this condition occurs.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 110
- If cycling the ignition key does NOT restore normal operation, this TSB does NOT apply.
APPLICABILITY:
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 111
REQUIRED TOOLS & EQUIPMENT:
PARTS INFORMATION:
SERVICE EXCHANGE PART IDENTIFICATION:
Countermeasure parts have a "P" marking on the parts label following the Toyota part number (see Figure 1).
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
1. Verify the condition in the Introduction.
2. Perform diagnostic troubleshooting to confirm the problem is related to the condition described in this TSB.
Refer to Tech TIP# 2194 "XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNER TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE" within E-TAS.
3. Order a replacement XM Satellite Radio Receiver through the Pioneer exchange program. As per the Lexus Warranty Policy and Procedures:
Policy 11.1 "Entertainment/Navigation Systems Program .
4. Refer to the applicable CIIT installation TSB on ETAS for part replacement.
5. Register the new XM Receiver Radio Identification Number (RID).
A. Be prepared with the VIN, OLD Radio Identification Number (RID), and NEW Radio Identification Number (RID).
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 112
B. Call the XM Radio Listener line at 1-800-967-2346.
C. Provide the necessary information and the representative will complete the request.
D. If the customer has an active account, confirm XM Satellite Radio service has been refreshed and the radio is active. Once you can listen to
channels 4, 11, and 41, you know the activation was successful.
NOTE:
Issue of this Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available. IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN
AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable, will apply.Technical Service
Bulletin # CAN-TSB2678L Date: 090915
Canada - MIL ON DTC's P0138/P0158 Set
Bulletin
TSB2678
Issue Date
September 15, 2009
Title
MIL "ON" DTC P0138 AND/OR P0158 DIAGNOSTIC TIPS
Component
ENGINE ELECTRICAL
Models
'07-'10 ES350; RX350
INTRODUCTION:
Some vehicles may exhibit a MIL "ON" Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0138 and/or P0158 (Oxygen Sensor Circuit High Voltage Bank 1 or 2).
In some instances a P2195 or P2197 (A/F Sensor Signal Stuck Lean) DTC may also be present. This condition may be caused by incorrect Air Fuel
Ratio Sensor response. Additionally, a P0606 (ECM/PCM Processor) DTC may be present due to incorrect Oxygen Sensor operation. The following
repair procedures should be used to properly diagnose and repair this condition.
NOTE
Refer to TSB No.2030, "Engine Bank 1 and Bank 2 A/F and O2 Identification" before proceeding to confirm diagnostic is performed on the
correct engine bank.
APPLICABILITY:
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE:
HINT
For information on checking circuit open, short, or resistance test procedures refer to the Repair Manual within E-TAS / TIS library:
- Division: Lexus
- Model: ES350/RX350
- Year: Applicable Year
- Service Category: General
- Section: Introduction
- Keyword: How to Troubleshoot ECU Controlled Systems: Electronic Circuit Inspection Procedure
- Division: Lexus
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 113
- Model: ES350
- Year: 2008/2009
- Service Category: General
- Section: Identification
- Keyword: How to Troubleshoot ECU Controlled Systems: Electronic Circuit Inspection Procedure
1. Check all DTCs.
Are DTC(s) other than P0138 or P0158 present?
Yes:
- P2195 and/or P2197 DTC also present: Go to step 3.
- P0606 DTC also present: Go to step 4.
No:
- Go to step 2.
2. Check the A/F and O2 sensor values for the appropriate bank DTC Freeze Frame Data (FFD). Is the AFS Voltage B#S1 = 3.35~3.70V AND the
O2S B#S2 = 0.70~0.90V?
Yes:
- Replace the appropriate bank Air Fuel Ratio Sensor ONLY (NOT O2 Sensor) to correct the P0138 or P0158 DTC condition.
No:
- Inspect the O2 B#S2 circuit for open, short, or high resistance. If no trouble is found, refer to ETAS, applicable model and model year
Repair Manual for P0138/P0158 diagnosis:
Refer to the Repair Manual within E-TAS / TIS library:
- Division: Lexus
- Model: ES350/RX350
- Year: Applicable Year
- Service Category: Engine/Hybrid System
- Section: Engine Control
- Keyword: SFI System -: 2GR-FE Engine Control System: SFI System: Diagnosis System
3. Inspect Air Fuel Ratio Sensor for the appropriate bank.
Does the Air Fuel Ratio Sensor have an open or short on the A1A+ or A1A- wires?
Yes:
- Repair the harness and revaluate the Air Fuel Ratio Sensor operation. Confirm the previous DTC(s) do not reset.
No:
- Replace the applicable bank Air Fuel Ratio Sensor ONLY to correct the P2195/P0138 or P2197/P0158 DTC condition. Test drive the
vehicle to confirm none of the previous DTC(s) reset.
4. Inspect Oxygen Sensor 2 Freeze Frame Data (FFD) values.
Is the O2S B#S2 voltage more than 1.10v and/or the O2S Impedance B#S2 more than 300ohms when engine is at normal operating temperature?
Yes:
- Inspect O2 B#S2 circuit for open, short, or high resistance. If no, harness issues are found, replace the appropriate bank O2 Sensor ONLY to
correct the P0606 DTC.
No:
- Follow the Repair Manual diagnosis procedure for P0138/P0158 DTC:
Refer to the Repair Manual within E-TAS / TIS library:
- Division: Lexus
- Model: ES350/RX350
- Year: Applicable Year
- Service Category: Engine/Hybrid System
- Section: Engine Control
- Keyword: SFI System -: 2GR-FE Engine Control System: SFI System: Diagnosis System
If the MIL "ON" condition continues to occur after this procedure, refer to the Repair Manual for further diagnostic procedures and
specifications.
NOTE:
Issue of this Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available. IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN
AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable, will apply.Technical Service
Bulletin # CAN-TSB2675L Date: 090708
Canada - Brake - Brake Booster Check Valve, Noise
Bulletin
TSB2675
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 114
Issue Date
July 8, 2009
Title
BRAKE BOOSTER VACUUM CHECK VALVE RATTLE/BUZZ NOISE
Component
BRAKES
Models
'04-'06 RX330; '07-'10 RX350
INTRODUCTION:
Some RX 330/350 vehicles may exhibit a rattle or buzz type noise coming from the driver's side instrument panel area. The noise can be duplicated
when lightly accelerating and then decelerating, or when depressing the brake pedal with the shift lever in Park and then releasing the brake pedal.
An improved vacuum check valve is now available to reduce this noise.
APPLICABILITY:
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
PARTS INFORMATION:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 115
1. Confirm the noise is coming from the brake booster vacuum check valve.
NOTE
Replace vacuum check valve with the same type as originally equipped (straight or 90°).
2. Remove the vacuum tube clip from the brake booster check valve.
3. Remove and replace the brake booster vacuum check valve.
NOTE
Make sure NEW valve is fully seated into brake booster grommet and returned to original condition.
4. Reconnect vacuum hose to the brake booster check valve and secure with clip.
5. Confirm that there are no vacuum leaks.
6. Confirm the noise has been eliminated.
NOTE:
Issue of this Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available. IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN
AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable, will apply.Technical Service
Bulletin # CAN-TSB2674L Date: 090708
Canada - Fuel System - MIL ON, DTC P0505 Set
Bulletin
TSB2674
Issue Date
July 8, 2009
Title
MIL "ON" DTC P0505
Component
ENGINE MECHANICAL
Models
'07-'09 ES350; '07-'10 RX350
INTRODUCTION:
Some vehicles with 2GR-FE engines may exhibit a MIL "ON" condition with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0505 stored in the Engine Control
Module or ECM (SAE term: Powertrain Control Module/PCM). Use the following repair procedure to address customer concerns.
APPLICABILITY:
PRODUCTION CHANGE INFORMATION:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 116
This TSB applies to vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VIN shown.
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
PARTS INFORMATION:
REQUIRED TOOLS & EQUIPMENT:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 117
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
1. Using ETAS Techstream, check for any stored DTCs.
Verify that DTC P0505 is present.
NOTE
If other DTCs are present along with P0505, this TSB does NOT apply. Follow Repair Manual procedures to diagnose those DTCs.
2. Inspect the PCV hose connections and air induction system for leaks.
3. If no concerns are found, replace the throttle body assembly.
Refer to the Repair Manual within E-TAS / TIS library:
- Division: Lexus
- Model: ES350
- Year: 2007/2008/2009
- Service Category: Engine/Hybrid System
- Section: Engine Control
- Keyword: 2GR-FE Engine Control System: Throttle Body: Removal
- Keyword: 2GR-FE Engine Control System: Throttle Body: Installation
- Division: Lexus
- Model: RX350
- Year: 2007/2008/2009/2010
- Service Category: Engine/Hybrid System
- Section: Engine Control
- Keyword: 2GR-FE Engine Control System: Throttle Body: Removal
- Keyword: 2GR-FE Engine Control System: Throttle Body: Installation
4. Start the engine, allow it to reach normal operating temperature, and test drive to verify the repair.
NOTE:
Issue of this Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available. IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN
AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable, will apply.Technical Service
Bulletin # CAN-TSB2537LR3 Date: 071203
Canada - Navigation System - Navigation Map Update
Bulletin
TSB2537R
Issue Date
December 3, 2007
Title
HDD NAVIGATION MAP UPDATE PROCESS
Component
TOOLS & EQUIPMENT
Models
All vehicles equipped with HDD Navigation
TSB REVISION NOTICE:
- October 12, 2010: Parts Information table has been updated.
- Generation 6 steps have been added.
Previous versions of this TSB should be discarded. Be sure to review the entire content of this service bulletin before proceeding.
INTRODUCTION:
Lexus models equipped with Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Navigation require a Special Service Tool and follow a unique process for updating map,
points of interest, and system software. Instead of individual DVDs installed into the vehicle, all Map Data is uploaded directly to the HDD system.
Map Data will be released annually through the direct shipment of one Map Data DVD to each dealership service manager. The annual Map Data
release must then be installed onto the Navigation Update Tool. Individual map updates are then loaded into vehicles with special map security keys.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 118
These keys are available through the normal parts ordering system. Keys are loaded onto the Navigation Update Tool through a PC or ETAS
Techstream unit using software found on ETAS.
Follow the procedures listed in this bulletin to:
- Identify the current version of Map Data on the vehicle and on the Navigation Update Tool.
- Load Map Data onto the Navigation Update Tool.
- Load map security key(s) onto the Navigation Update Tool.
- Connect the Navigation Update Tool to the vehicle and update the Map/System Data to the latest version.
NOTE
- In order to perform the procedures outlined in this TSB, you MUST have completed the setup procedure in TSB2438, "HDD
Navigation Program Setup" using new software version 1.3.3 as posted on E-TAS
- Before performing this procedure, disconnect all other USB peripheral and external storage devices (i.e., USB thumb drives, hard
drives, cameras, mice, etc.).
- For additional details, refer to the Navigation Update Tool Operator's Manual on ETAS.
APPLICABILITY:
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
PARTS INFORMATION:
REQUIRED MATERIALS:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 119
REQUIRED TOOLS & EQUIPMENT:
VERSION VERIFICATION:
Checking for Map Data Version on Navigation Update Tool
1. Open the Navigation Programs Installer.
NOTE
- When properly installed, the Navigation Programs Installer icon will be found on the ETAS Techstream desktop.
- Please ensure that you have the latest software version 1.3.3 installed.
- If the application is NOT properly installed, refer to TSB2438, "HDD Navigation Program Setup".
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 120
2. Click Version Check on the Navigation Update Tool Main Menu.
3. Connect the Navigation Update Tool.
A. Make sure the USB cable is secured in both the PC and the Navigation Update Tool USB ports.
B. Confirm that the Navigation Update Tool is powered correctly.
C. Turn power ON.
D. Press Continue.
4. Compare the Map version with the Map version shown on the DVD.
NOTE
- If the Map version on the Navigation Update Tool is the same as shown on Navigation Programs Installer, then go to the "Security Key
Load" in this TSB.
- If the Map version on the Navigation Update Tool is NOT the same as shown on Navigation Programs Installer, then go to the "Tool
Load" in this TSB.
Checking Map Data version on Vehicle HDD Navigation System (Generation 5):
1. Turn vehicle ignition ON (engine OFF).
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 121
2. From the multi-information display, press I Agree.
3. Press the MENU button
4. From the multi-information display, press HDD Data.
5. Compare the Map Data version on the Navigation System to that on the Navigation Update Tool.
NOTE
- If the Map version on the Navigation System is the same as shown on Navigation Update Tool, then the vehicle does NOT need the
update.
- If the Map version on the Navigation System is NOT the same as shown on Navigation Update Tool, then go to the "Tool Load" in this
TSB.
Checking Map Data version on Vehicle HDD Navigation System (Generation 6):
1. Turn vehicle ignition ON (engine OFF).
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 122
2. Press the INFO/PHONE button.
3. From the multi-information display, press Map Data.
4. Compare the Map Data version on the Navigation System to that on the Navigation Update Tool.
NOTE
- If the Map version on the Navigation System is the same as shown on the navigation update tool, then the vehicle does NOT need the
update.
- If the Map version on the Navigation System is NOT the same as shown on the navigation update tool, then go to the "Tool Load" in
this TSB.
TOOL LOAD:
NOTE
There are three separate processes used to update the Map Data on the vehicle:
- Loading the Map Data onto the Navigation Update Tool
- Loading the Map Data security key onto the Navigation Update Tool
- Loading the Map Data into the vehicle HDD Navigation System
1. Generation 5
2. Generation 6
If the Map version on the Navigation Update Tool is the same as shown on Navigation Update Tool, then go to the "Security Key Load" in
this TSB.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 123
If the Map version on the Navigation Update Tool is NOT the same as shown on Navigation Update Tool, then follow the instructions below.
Loading Map Data onto Navigation Update Tool
NOTE
Before performing this procedure, disconnect all other USB peripheral and external storage devices (i.e., USB thumb drives, hard drives,
cameras, mice, etc.).
1. Open the Navigation Programs Installer.
NOTE
- When properly installed, the Navigation Programs Installer icon will be found on the ETAS Techstream desktop.
- Please ensure that you have the latest software version 1.3.3 installed.
- If the application is NOT properly installed, refer to TSB2438, "HDD Navigation Program Setup".
2. Select Load Map Data on the Navigation Update Tool Main Menu.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 124
3. Connect the Navigation Update Tool.
A. Make sure the USB cable is secured in both the PC and the Navigation Update Tool USB ports.
B. Confirm that the Navigation Update Tool is powered correctly.
C. Turn power ON.
D. Press Continue.
4. Insert Map Disk 1 into the CD/DVD-ROM drive and press Continue.
5. Allow Map Data to copy onto the PC hard drive (requires about 30 minutes).
If necessary:
- Insert the additional Map Disk (if provided) as instructed into the CD/DVD-ROM drive.
- Allow the additional Map Data to copy onto the PC hard drive (requires about 30 minutes).
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 125
6. Verify the correct version of Map data to load onto the Navigation Update Tool.
7. Click Continue to load Map Data onto the Navigation Update Tool.
Map Data will then copy to the Navigation Update Tool (requires about 15 minutes).
8. Verify the Map Data is loaded onto the Navigation Update Tool and can now be used to update the vehicle.
SECURITY KEY LOAD:
NOTE
- In order to load the Map Data onto the vehicle's Navigation System, you MUST load a security key EACH time.
- The Navigation Update Tool will hold up to ten security keys. One key is required per vehicle update.
- Storing keys on the Navigation Update Tool is NOT recommended.
- Map Data MUST be loaded onto the Navigation Update Tool before a Key File can be loaded.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 126
- Before performing this procedure, disconnect all other USB peripheral and external storage devices (i.e., USB thumb drives, hard drives,
cameras, mice, etc.).
1. Open the Navigation Programs Installer.
NOTE
- When properly installed, the Navigation Programs Installer icon will be found on the ETAS Techstream desktop.
- Please ensure that you have the latest software version 1.3.3 installed.
- If the application is NOT properly installed, refer to TSB2438, "HDD Navigation Program Setup".
2. Select Load Key File on the Navigation Update Tool Main Menu.
3. Connect the Navigation Update Tool.
A. Make sure the USB cable is secured in both the PC and the Navigation Update Tool USB ports.
B. Confirm that the Navigation Update Tool is powered correctly.
C. Turn power ON.
D. Press Continue.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 127
4. Connect USB Key File and press Continue.
5. Click Load to continue.
6. Allow the Key File to copy onto the Navigation Update Tool (requires about 5 seconds).
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 128
7. Verify the Key File is loaded onto the Navigation Update Tool and can now be used to update the vehicle.
NOTE
- The Navigation Update Tool will hold up to ten security keys. One key is required per vehicle update.
- Storing keys on the Navigation Update Tool is NOT recommended.
VEHICLE LOADING:
NOTE
- The Map Data security key MUST be loaded onto the Navigation Update Tool before Map Data can be loaded to the vehicle.
- Prior to connecting to the vehicle you MUST disconnect the Navigation Update Tool from the PC.
- Connect the battery charger to the vehicle prior to beginning the process to ensure constant battery voltage.
Loading Map Data onto vehicle HDD Navigation System (Generation 5)
NOTE
Prior to connecting to the vehicle you MUST disconnect the Navigation Update Tool from the PC.
1. Connect the Navigation Update Tool to the vehicle.
A. Make sure the IEEE1394 cable is secured in both the Navigation Update Tool and the vehicle connector.
B. Confirm the Navigation Update Tool is powered correctly.
2. Turn vehicle ignition ON (engine OFF).
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 129
3. From the multi-information display, press I Agree.
4. Press the "MENU" button.
5. From the multi-information display, press HDD Data.
6. Press Map Data Update.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 130
7. Press I Agree.
8. Allow Map Data to copy (requires about 25 minutes).
9. Press OK.
10. Disconnect the Navigation Update Tool from the vehicle.
Loading Map Data onto vehicle HDD Navigation System (Generation 6)
NOTE
Prior to connecting to the vehicle you MUST disconnect the Navigation Update Tool from the PC.
1. Connect the Navigation Update Tool to the vehicle.
A. Make sure the IEEE1394 cable is secured in both the Navigation Update Tool and the vehicle connector.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 131
B. Confirm the Navigation Update Tool is powered correctly.
2. Turn vehicle ignition ON (engine OFF).
3. Press the INFO/PHONE button.
4. From the multi-information display, press Map Data.
5. Press Map Data Update.
6. Press I Agree.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 132
7. Allow Map Data to copy (requires about 25 minutes).
8. Press OK.
9. Disconnect the Navigation Update Tool from the vehicle.
NOTE:
Issue of this Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available.
IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable,
will apply.2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # CAN-TSB2656L Date: 090622
Canada - Exhaust - Exhaust Drone Noise
Bulletin
TSB2656
Issue Date
June 22, 2009
Title
EXHAUST DRONE NOISE AT OPERATING TEMPERATURE WHILE STATIONARY IN DRIVE
Component
ENGINE MECHANICAL
Models
'10 RX350
INTRODUCTION:
Some customers may experience a drone noise or slight vibration with the engine at operating temperature and the vehicle stationary in Drive range.
Use the following repair procedure to address customer concerns.
APPLICABILITY:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 133
PRODUCTION CHANGE INFORMATION:
This TSB applies to vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VIN shown.
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
PARTS INFORMATION:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
1. Start the engine and confirm the drone noise/vibration is present while stationary in Drive range after the vehicle has reached operating
temperature.
NOTE
If the drone noise/vibration is NOT present after reaching operating temperature, this bulletin does NOT apply.
2. Inspect the position of the No. 5 exhaust pipe support bracket and exhaust pipe hanger.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 134
If the exhaust pipe hanger is positioned below the No. 5 exhaust pipe support bracket (Figure 1), this bulletin does NOT apply.
3. If the exhaust pipe hanger has rotated upward beside the No. 5 exhaust pipe support bracket (Figure 2), replace the No. 5 exhaust pipe support
bracket.
4. Start the engine and verify the repair.
NOTE:
Issue of this Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available. IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN
AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable, will apply.Technical Service
Bulletin # CAN-TSB2646LR1 Date: 090417
Canada - Navigation System - Update For Various Issues
Bulletin
TSB2646R
Issue Date
April 17, 2009
Title
NAVIGATION SYSTEM FIRMWARE IMPROVEMENT
Component
ELECTRICAL
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 135
Models
'10 All applicable vehicles
TSB REVISION NOTICE
- January 28, 2010: The TSB title has been changed.
- Applicability has been updated to include additional 2010 models.
- The Introduction has been updated.
- The Navigation Program Update Disc is no longer used. ETAS is now used to download the software.
Any previous printed versions of this service bulletin should be discarded.
INTRODUCTION:
NOTE
Do NOT perform a map update until this TSB has been performed.
Some customers with certain 2010 Lexus models may express concerns about one or more of the following conditions:
- Steering wheel volume controls are intermittently inoperative.
- Navigation System region code intermittently will reset to region US9.
- Slow response from Bluetooth address book voice commands.
- Black screen condition after shifting from reverse to park.
- Air conditioning screen may not appear when changing blower speed.
- iPod scrolling speed is slow.
- Display constantly shows "Calculating" on right side of screen while driving on freeway.
- Slow response at times from navigation system.
- GPS coordinates shown instead of destination address.
Navigation firmware has been updated to allow updating map to version 9.1 or later. Updated navigation system software has also been developed to
remedy these conditions. Use the following procedure to address customers' concerns.
APPLICABILITY:
PRODUCTION CHANGE INFORMATION:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 136
This TSB applies to all 2010 GS 460 vehicles with navigation systems and to vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VINs
shown.
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
Loading Map Firmware onto Navigation Update Tool
NOTE
Navigation Update Tool MUST have latest "Navigation Program Installer" before performing this TSB. For installation procedure, refer
to TSB2438.
1. Turn on ETAS Techstream.
2. Log into ETAS.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 137
3. Download the "Vehicle Navigation Software Update" from ETAS.
A. Click on the TOOLS tab.
B. Click on the DIAGNOSTIC TESTER tab.
C. Click on the SOFTWARE and UPDATES tab.
D. Click on the appropriate "Vehicle Navigation Software Update" under Available Software Updates.
4. Click Save from the "File Download - Security Warning" screen and choose the desktop as the location to save this file.
5. Connect the Navigation Update Tool to the PC using the USB cable.
6. Turn the Navigation Update Tool power supply ON. Select the Navigation Program Installer and Display the Navigation Update Tool Main
Menu screen on the PC.
7. Click the "Load Navigation Unit Update" icon.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 138
8. Click "Browse" and navigate to the desktop, choose the appropriate update file.
NOTE
Please verify the version matches the applicable vehicle.
9. Click "Load".
NOTE
Please verify the version matches the applicable vehicle.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 139
10. Verify that both the Transfer Mode Display Light (green) and Power Supply Display Light (blue) are lit, then click "Continue".
11. The software will perform a connection check with the Navigation Update Tool, in the event an error is shown please recheck USB connection.
12. Navigation Firmware is ready to be loaded onto the Navigation Update Tool, click "Continue".
NOTE
Please verify the version matches the applicable vehicle.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 140
13. Navigation Firmware will now load into the Navigation Update Tool.
14. Once the Navigation Firmware is successfully loaded onto the Navigation Update Tool, Click "Continue" to finish the installer.
15. Disconnect the navigation tool from the PC.
Loading Map Firmware into Vehicle Navigation System
NOTE
Vehicle ignition should be OFF before starting this procedure.
1. Connect the Navigation Update Tool to the vehicle (Tool MUST be disconnected from the PC).
2. Connect the GR8 battery diagnostic station to the vehicle.
3. Turn the Ignition ON (engine OFF) and wait for the "Caution" screen to appear.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 141
4. Select "Show on Map" switch.
5. Hold down the Menu button on the Remote Touch interface and turn the light switch from OFF to tail light position 3 or more times until the
navigation system enters the diagnostic mode.
For touch screen vehicles (ES 350, IS 250C/350C, GS 350/450h/460, LX 570, SC 430): Press the INFO switch and turn the light switch from
OFF to tail light position 3 or more times until the navigation system enters the diagnostic mode.
6. Select the Program Update button from the Service Menu.
7. Select the OK button.
NOTE
Load time for the program update is between 5 and 15 minutes.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 142
8. When the ECU Selection Screen appears, confirm the current version is less than the New version. If yes, then select the "Select" button. If no,
then select End and go to step 11.
9. When EMV-M screen is shown select OK.
10. After about 1 minute, if the update was successful the display will indicate "Updating complete" at the top of the screen. Select OK to continue.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 143
11. Confirm the Current version matches one of those shown. Select End to complete the procedure.
NOTE
If Current Version does NOT match one of those listed above, switch the vehicle off and start again at step 1 of this bulletin.
12. Cycle the ignition OFF to finish the updating procedure.
13. Cycle the ignition ON and confirm normal Navigation System operation.
NOTE:
Issue of this Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available. IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN
AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable, will apply.Technical Service
Bulletin # CAN-TSB2628LR1 Date: 090129
Canada - Interior - Floor Mat Installation
Bulletin
TSB2628R
Issue Date
January 29, 2009
Title
FLOOR MAT INSTALLATION DURING PDS
Component
GENERAL INFORMATION
Models
2010 LEXUS
TSB REVISION NOTICE:
August 25, 2009: The Applicable Vehicle Information table has been updated.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 144
Previous versions of this TSB should be discarded.
INTRODUCTION:
2010 model year Lexus vehicles are equipped with driver's side floor mat retaining clips to help ensure the floor mat stays in the correct position. In
addition, some models may utilize retaining clips for passenger side floor mats as well. Attach the driver's side and passenger's side (if applicable)
floor mat to the vehicle carpet using the floor mat retaining clips during Pre-Delivery Service (PDS).
CAUTION
- ONLY use floor mats that can be retained using the retaining clips. All OEM Lexus floor mats are specifically designed to fit
correctly and be retained using the retaining clips.
- Make sure the floor mat is properly placed on the vehicle carpet and secured with the retaining clips. If the driver side floor mat is
NOT properly placed and secured, it could slip and interfere with the movement of the pedals during driving and may cause an
accident.
- Verify the operation of the accelerator, brake, and clutch (if equipped) pedals and clearance to the mat.
- NEVER install more than one floor mat at a time in the driver's seating position.
- If applicable, any secondary set of floor mats (based upon customer preference, such as the all weather floor mats or other floor
mats) MUST be placed in the trunk with all the packaging material intact. Do NOT install the secondary mat on top of the primary
floor mat already installed in the driver's seating position.
APPLICABLE VEHICLES:
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE:
Attach the driver and passenger side floor mats to the vehicle carpet using the clips. Secure the mat by inserting the retaining clips through the
grommet holes.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 145
NOTE
If applicable, DO NOT remove the beige "Caution" tag from the floor mat. This should only be removed by the customer.Technical
Service Bulletin # CAN-TSB2626L Date: 090129
Canada - Tire Monitoring System - TPMS Activation
Bulletin
TSB2626
Issue Date
January 29, 2009
Title
TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM ACTIVATION & INITIALIZATION
Component
GENERAL INFORMATION
Models
2010 RX350
INTRODUCTION:
The 2010 model year RX350 is equipped with a direct-type Tire Pressure Warning System (TPWS). Each tire (except the spare tire) has a tire
pressure warning valve/sensor that measures tire pressure data. The data is transmitted to the Tire Pressure Warning System antenna/receiver and
then to the Tire Pressure Warning System ECU.
During Pre-Delivery Service (PDS), the tire pressure warning valves/sensors must be activated for Japan-built vehicles by following the activation
procedure in this TSB. NAP-built vehicles do not require activation, but both Japan-built (VINs start with "J") and NAP-built (VINs start with "2")
vehicles require the TPWS to be initialized by following the initialization procedure in this TSB.
APPLICABLE VEHICLES:
- 2010 model year RX350 vehicles.
REQUIRED TOOLS & EQUIPMENT:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 146
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
REFERENCE:
- After cycling the ignition to the "IG-ON" position, the Low Tire Pressure Warning Light will blink until all the tire pressure warning
valves/sensors are activated.
- The Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) listed may be stored in the TPWS ECU until the tire pressure warning valves/sensors are activated.
- The DTCs will automatically clear when the tire pressure warning valves/sensors are activated.
ACTIVATION PROCEDURE:
NOTE
ONLY perform the following activation procedure on Japan-built vehicles.
1. Connect TIS techstream.
2. Cycle the ignition switch to the "IG-ON" position and check that the Low Tire Pressure Warning Light blinks.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 147
3. Press or remove the valve core to reduce the tire inflation pressure rapidly by 6 psi (0.4 kgf/cm2 ,40kPa), or more, within 30 seconds. If the tire
inflation pressure is NOT reduced by 6 psi (0.4 kgf/cm2, 40 kPa), or more, within 30 seconds, the tire pressure warning valves/sensors will NOT
be activated.
NOTE
This operation is required for the system to be activated and MUST be performed for each tire (except the spare tire) one at a time.
4. Check that the Low Tire Pressure Warning Light goes OFF after all the tire pressure warning valves/sensors are activated.
5. Using TIS Techstream, check for TPWS DTCs.
- If NO DTCs are stored, go to step 1 of the Initialization Procedure.
- If DTCs C2111 - C2114 are stored, repeat step 3.
- If any other DTCs are stored, refer to the Repair Manual.
INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE:
NOTE
Perform the following initialization procedure for BOTH NAP-built and Japan-built vehicles.
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the "IG-ON" mode and connect TIS techstream.
2. Adjust all tires (except the spare tire) to the standard tire inflation pressure, as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label located
inside the driver's door jamb and confirm that the Low Tire Pressure Warning Light is OFF.
NOTE
To adjust tire pressure correctly when outside temperature is significantly colder or warmer than shop temperature, please reference
the Tire Inflation Pressure Compensation and Adjustment Service Bulletin. TSB 0642.
NAP-built:
Remove the ID number labels that are attached to each wheel and place the labels in the glove box.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 148
3. Push and hold the Tire Pressure Warning "SET" Switch for 3 seconds until the Low Tire Pressure Warning Light blinks 3 times and then turns
OFF to set the tire pressure initialization.
4. Cycle the ignition switch to the "OFF" position and then to the "IG-ON" position.
NOTE
It is necessary for the ignition to be in the "IG-ON" mode at LEAST 5 minutes for initialization to complete correctly.
5. Check the tire pressure values of all the tires using TIS techstream.
NOTE
- It can take 2 - 3 minutes for the tire pressure values to be displayed on the TIS techstream Data List.
- If the tire pressure values CANNOT be displayed on the TIS techstream screen, the initialization is NOT completed. Repeat steps 2 -
4.2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # CAN-TSB2625L Date: 090129
Canada -Instruments - Calibration Compass
Bulletin
TSB2625
Issue Date
January 29, 2009
Title
INITIAL CALIBRATION OF COMPASS DURING PDS
Component
GENERAL INFORMATION
Models
2010 RX350
INTRODUCTION:
Some 2009 model RX350 vehicles are equipped with a compass in the rear view mirror. In order for the compass to correctly indicate the direction
that the vehicle is heading, it must be calibrated prior to vehicle delivery. Use the following procedure to perform initial calibration during
Pre-Delivery Service (PDS).
APPLICABLE VEHICLES:
- 2010 model year RX350 vehicles.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 149
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
CALIBRATION PROCEDURE:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the "IG-ON" position and hold the "AUTO" switch for 6 seconds until the zone number appears on the display.
HINT
Pushing the "AUTO" switch for 3 seconds turns ON or OFF the compass display.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 150
2. Push the "AUTO" switch to select the number of the zone where the vehicle is located. See the map in figure 3 for zone reference.
3. Start the engine and push the "AUTO" switch for about 9 seconds until "C" appears on the display.
4. Drive the vehicle slowly at 5 mph (8 km/h), or less, in a circle until the direction is displayed. If there is NOT enough space to drive in a circle,
drive around the block until the direction is displayed.
Once the direction is displayed, the calibration is complete.
NOTE
- Do NOT perform calibration of the compass in a place where the Earth's magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 151
magnetic fields (underground parking, under a steel tower, between buildings, roof parking, near a railroad crossing, near a large vehicle,
etc.)
- During calibration, do NOT operate electric systems (moon roof, power windows, etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration.Technical
Service Bulletin # CAN-TSB2622LR1 Date: 090326
Canada - Engine Control - Engine Ticking Noise/MIL ON/DTC's
Bulletin
TSB2622R
Issue Date
March 26, 2009
Title
ENGINE TICKING NOISE AND / OR MIL ON P0114, P0015, P0024, P0025, P0017, OR P0018
Component
ENGINE MECHANICAL
Models
'07- '09 ES350, '07- '10 RX350
TSB REVISION NOTICE
- April 5, 2010: An important statement has been added to the Introduction - PLEASE READ.
- Applicability, Warranty Information, and Repair Procedure sections have been updated to include 2010 model year RX350.
- Production Change Information with VIN breaks has been added.
- Parts Information has been updated.
Any previous printed versions of this service bulletin should be discarded.
INTRODUCTION:
IMPORTANT
It is mandatory that the VVT-i gear actuator bolts, actuator center section alignment, and actuator body be inspected BEFORE performing
this TSB. If no concerns are noted with these parts, this TSB does NOT apply.
Some 2007 - 2009 model year ES350 and 2007 - 2010 RX350 vehicles may exhibit a ticking/clicking type noise from the cylinder head cover area
that may be accompanied by a M.I.L. "ON" and one or more VVT-I related Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Please use the following repair
procedure to address customer concerns.
APPLICABILITY:
PRODUCTION CHANGE INFORMATION:
This TSB applies to vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VIN shown.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 152
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 153
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 154
PARTS INFORMATION:
REQUIRED TOOLS & EQUIPMENT:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 155
REQUIRED SSTs:
INSPECTION PROCEDURE:
1. Start the engine and listen for any ticking/clicking type noises coming from the VVT-i gear area of the engine.
NOTE
This condition may or may not be accompanied by one or more of the following DTCs stored in the Engine Control Module (ECM)
(SAE term: Powertrain Control Module/PCM).
- P0014: Camshaft Position "B" - Timing Advanced or System Performance (Bank 1)
- P0015: Camshaft Position "B" Timing Over Retarded (Bank 1)
- P0017: Crankshaft Position Camshaft Position Correlation (Bank 1 Sensor B)
- P0018: Crankshaft Position Camshaft Position Correlation (Bank 2 Sensor A)
- P0024: Camshaft Position "B" - Timing Over-Advanced or System Performance (Bank 2)
- P0025: Camshaft Position "B" - Timing Over-Retarded (Bank 2)
2. Remove the cylinder head cover and inspect the Exhaust VVT-i Gear Assembly on the affected cylinder bank.
NOTE
If no concerns are found with the VVT-i gear actuator bolts, the actuator center section alignment or actuator body this TSB does NOT
apply. Refer to Repair Manual procedures for further diagnosis.
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
1. If any concerns are noted with the exhaust VVT-i gear bolts or actuator follow the four steps below:
A. Replace the camshaft housing sub-assembly, exhaust camshaft, and exhaust VVT-i gear assembly on the affected bank.
B. Inspect the intake VVT-i gear assembly and bolts on the affected bank. Replace the intake VVT- gear assembly if necessary.
C. Inspect the opposite bank exhaust VVT-i gear actuator and bolts. If any concerns are noted replace the opposite bank camshaft housing
sub-assembly, exhaust camshaft, and exhaust VVT-i gear assembly.
D. Inspect the opposite bank intake gear actuator assembly and bolts. Replace the intake VVT-i gear assembly if necessary.
For complete disassembly procedures refer to the Repair Manual within E-TAS / TIS library:
- Division: Lexus
- Model: ES350/ RX350
- Year: Applicable year
- Service Category: Engine/Hybrid System
- Section: Engine Mechanical
- Keyword: 2GR-FE Engine Mechanical: Engine Unit: Disassembly
For complete reassembly procedures refer to the Repair Manual within E-TAS / TIS library:
- Division: Lexus
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 156
- Model: ES350/ RX350
- Year: Applicable year
- Service Category: Engine/Hybrid System
- Section: Engine Mechanical
- Keyword: 2GR-FE Engine Mechanical: Engine Unit: Reassembly
2. Start engine and test drive to verify the repair.
NOTE:
Issue of this Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available. IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN
AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable, will apply.Technical Service
Bulletin # CAN-TSB2575L Date: 080331
Canada - Steering - VSC Zero Point Calibration
Bulletin
TSB2575
Issue Date
March 31, 2008
Title
DISCONNECT BATTERY & PERFORM ZERO POINT CALIBRATION AFTER WHEEL ALIGNMENT ADJUSTMENT
Component
BRAKES
Models
'98 - '09 Lexus
INTRODUCTION:
The purpose of this TSB is to provide information on when and how to perform the zero point calibration on vehicles equipped with Vehicle
Stability Control (VSC). Momentarily disconnecting the battery is a necessary step for performing the zero point calibration.
APPLICABLE VEHICLES:
WARRANTY:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 157
REQUIRED SSTS:
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION:
Perform this procedure if any of these repairs have been performed on the vehicle:
- Wheel alignment has been adjusted.
- Any chassis components have been removed/installed or replaced.
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
1. Record the radio station presets.
2. Disconnect the cable from the negative (-) battery terminal for MORE THAN two (2) seconds.
3. Reconnect the cable to the negative (-) battery terminal.
4. Perform the applicable zero point calibration of the yaw rate sensor and/or the steering angle sensor.
HINT:
Refer to the applicable TSB or Repair Manual for the zero point calibration procedure.
5. Re-initialize all applicable systems available on the vehicle (power window, sunroof, power lift door, etc.).
6. Reset the radio presets and clock.
NOTE:
Issue of this Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available.
IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable,
will apply.2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # CAN-TSB2438LR2 Date: 070608
Canada - Accessories - HDD Navigation Program Setup
Bulletin
2438R
Issue Date
June 8, 2007
Title
HDD NAVIGATION PROGRAM SETUP
Component
TOOLS & EQUIPMENT
Models
All vehicles equipped with HDD Navigation
TSB REVISION NOTICE:
- January 28, 2009: Applicability has been updated to include all 2010 model year Lexus vehicles.
Previous versions of this TSB should be discarded. Be sure to review the entire content of this service bulletin before proceeding.
INTRODUCTION:
Lexus models equipped with Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Navigation may have their map data, Compact Disc Database (CDDB), and navigation head
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 158
unit software updated using the Navigation Update Tool and the HDD Navigation Programs Installer.
The Navigation Programs Installer is a PC application available on E-TAS and must be installed on TIS Techstream or an equivalent PC. The
Navigation Update Tool is an essential service tool and the device must be properly configured before initial use.
Follow the procedures in this bulletin to locate and install the HDD Navigation Programs Installer and properly configure the Navigation Update
Tool. The HDD Navigation Programs Installer is a mandatory application that will be used to update the vehicles map data, as well as the CDDB
data.
This TSB will outline two processes that must be completed to prepare the Navigation Update Tool for initial use:
- Download and install the Navigation Programs Installer onto a PC.
- Perform initial setup of the Navigation Update Tool.
NOTE
- In order to perform the following procedure, the PC being used MUST be put in ADMINISTRATOR MODE. Software will NOT
complete setup if this is not met.
- Before performing this procedure, disconnect all other USB peripheral and external storage devices (i.e., USB thumb drives, hard
drives, cameras, mice, etc.)
- For Additional details, refer to the Navigation Update Tool Operator's Manual on E-TAS.
APPLICABILITY:
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 159
REQUIRED SSTs:
APPLICATION INSTALLATION:
The Navigation Programs Installer should be installed on one or more of the dealership's Techstream units, the E-TAS workstation, or any equivalent
service department PC.
Minimum PC requirements for the application to operate properly include:
- Internet Explorer Version 6 SP2
- 512 MB RAM
- 1.0 GHz processor
- 20 GB free hard drive space
- 2 free USB ports
Download and Install Navigation Programs Installer
1. Turn on Techstream.
2. Log into INFOSTREAM.
3. Download the Navigation Programs Installer from E-TAS.
A. Click on the TOOLS tab.
B. Click on the DIAGNOSTIC TESTER tab.
C. Click on the SOFTWARE and UPDATES tab.
D. Click on the "Navigation Programs Installer".
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 160
4. Click Run from the "File Download - Security Warning" screen to begin download.
5. Click Run to install program onto PC.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 161
6. Click Next.
7. Ensure the "Everyone" radio button is selected and click Next.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 162
8. Click Next.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 163
9. Click Close.
TOOL SETUP:
Perform Initial Setup for Navigation Update Tool.
WARNING
Do NOT perform setup if you have key files loaded onto the Navigation Update Tool with an older version; otherwise, the key files could be
erased and key files CANNOT be recovered. Call the Denso Canada Nav Help Desk at 1-866-729-3626 Ext 209 for assistance.
NOTE
- In order to perform the following procedure, the PC being used MUST be put in ADMINISTRATOR MODE. Software will NOT
complete setup if this is not met.
- Before performing this procedure, disconnect all other USB peripheral and external storage devices (i.e., USB thumb drives, hard
drives, cameras, mice, etc.).
Setup ONLY needs to be completed once for each Navigation Update Tool.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 164
1. Open the Navigation Programs Installer by clicking the icon on of the desktop.
2. Click Setup in the "Navigation Update Tool Main Menu".
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 165
3. Connect the Navigation Update Tool and press Continue.
A. Make sure the USB cable is secured in both the PC and the Navigation Update Tool USB ports.
B. Connect A/C power supply.
C. Turn power ON and press Continue.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 166
4. Click the desired default language radio button and click Save and Continue Setup.
5. Allow Setup to complete (it requires about 1 hour).
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 167
6. Confirm that the Setup screen appears with "Setup has finished successfully".
If an error screen appears, please consult the "Navigation Update Tool Operating Manual" on ETAS (under Tools / Diagnostic Tester / Software
& Updates tabs)
NOTE:
Issue of this Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available. IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN
AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable, will apply.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # CAN-TSB2389L Date: 070319
Canada - Drivetrain - Driveshaft Assembly Replacement Info.
Bulletin
2389
Issue Date
March 19, 2007
Title
DRIVESHAFT ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT
Component
DRIVELINE
Models
'90 - '07 Lexus
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 168
INTRODUCTION:
The purpose of this bulletin is to provide information regarding anti-corrosion grease that is present on replacement driveshaft assemblies. It is
important to remove this grease prior to installing the hub nut to prevent overtightening.
APPLICABLE VEHICLES:
- All '90 - '07 model year Toyota vehicles.
REQUIRED TOOLS & MATERIAL:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
WARRANTY INFORMATION:2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SC-9LG-PH4R Date: 120725
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 169
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 170
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 171
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 172
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 173
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 174
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 175
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 176
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 177
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 178
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 179
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 180
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 181
IV. Background
In late June, Lexus announced it will initiate a Safety Recall Campaign (Special Service Campaign) for potential floor mat interference with the
accelerator pedal. The condition involves the potential for an unsecured or incompatible driver's floor mat to interfere with the accelerator pedal and
cause it to get stuck in the wide open position.
Vehicles equipped with the optional genuine Toyota All Weather Floor Mats (AWFM) will be inspected to determine if the AWFM set is of an older
design. If it is, the older design AWFM for the driver and the front passenger will be replaced with newly designed ones.
The accelerator pedal will be modified to reduce the risk of an unsecured or incompatible floor mat from interfering with the accelerator pedal.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 182
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 183
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 184
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 185
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 186
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 187
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 188
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 189
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 190
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 191
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # CAN-TSB2216L Date: 060222
Canada - Engine Control - TDT Lexus diagnostic Tester
Bulletin
TSB2216
Issue Date
February 22, 2006
Title
LEXUS DIAGNOSTIC TESTER (TDT) - DIAGNOSTIC SUPPORT AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
Component
GENERAL INFORMATION
Models
All Models
INTRODUCTION:
The Lexus Diagnostic Tester was introduced to all Dealers in November of 1993. As technicians became more familiar with this equipment and as
new engines were introduced with on board diagnostic II systems, this equipment has been used more and more frequently.
The tester and it's adaptor kits are very high quality and have been extensively tested, so we have experienced few problems in service.
However, as any problem could cause critical repair delays, TCI has established a comprehensive repair procedure to maintain this equipment in
good operating condition.
PROBLEM DIAGNOSIS:
The most important part of Problem Diagnosis is to identify the problem area (hardware, software, cables or the vehicle itself).
- A self diagnosis function is built into the tester. So first complete the "self test detailed in the toolset operators manual. Also, check the cables for
any damage.
- If no fault is found during "self test", contact Pierson Belle at Custone Electromotive for repair. When sending a TDT for repair at Custone
Electromotive, all software and cables must be included in order for them to accurately determine the cause of the problem.
- (Proper diagnosis is required to avoid unnecessary repair or replacement of TDT components and also to reduce vehicle down time).
- TDT repairs are available through:
CUSTONE ELECTROMOTIVE INC.
1150 Champlain Court
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 192
Whitby ON L1N 6K9
NOTE: T.D.T. replacement parts are not available through the Parts Distribution Centre.
- Estimate fee is $159.92.
- A flat fee of $760.00 will be charged for all non-warrantable internal, diagnostic tester repairs (cables and accessories extra).
- Repair turnaround time, in most cases, is 48 hours using Purolator.
- All charges for repair and replacement parts for TDT's outside of warranty will be billed directly by Custone Electromotive to the dealer. Any
questions in regards to billing outside of warranty should be directed towards Service Department at Custone Electromotive.
REPLACEMENT PARTS:
- Over time, replacement parts may be required resulting from damage, loss or normal wear and tear.
- A current ex-stock price list of supply parts is attached.
REPLACEMENT PARTS PRICING FOR LEXUS DIAGNOSTIC TESTER:2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # CAN-TSB2114L Date:
050419
Canada - Cooling System - Radiator Cap Inspection
Bulletin
TSB2114
Issue Date
April 19, 2005
Title
RADIATOR CAP INSPECTION
Component
ENGINE MECHANICAL
Models
All Models
INTRODUCTION:
The procedure for inspecting the radiator cap has been revised. Please refer to the following procedures when inspecting the radiator cap on all
Lexus models.
APPLICABLE VEHICLES:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 193
- All Lexus model vehicles.
REQUIRED EQUIPMENT:
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
REQUIRED SSTs:
RADIATOR IDENTIFICATION PROCEDURE:
1. Use the illustration below to identify the vehicle's radiator cap type and kPa rating.
2. Proceed to the required inspection procedure for the radiator cap and kPa rating.
RADIATOR CAP INSPECTION PROCEDURE:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 194
Type: N-cap, 88 kPa
1. Remove coolant and any foreign material on rubber points "A," "B," and "C."
2. Check that points "A," "B," and "C" are not deformed, cracked, or swollen.
3. Check that points "C" and "D" are not stuck together.
4. Apply engine coolant to points "B" and "C" before using the radiator cap tester.
Radiator Cap Tester:
5. Before installing the radiator cap tester, use the applicable radiator cap adaptor provided in the following SST kits in conjunction with the
radiator cap tester:
- SST P/N 09230-00030-01, 09230-00020-01, 09230-00050-01
6. When using the radiator cap tester, tilt it more than 30 degrees.
7. Pump the radiator cap tester several times, and check the maximum pressure.
Pumping speed: 1 pump/second
HINT:
Stop pumping when the valve opens and read the gauge. The gauge must be within the standard values listed below when the pressure valve
opens. The cap is considered OK when the pressure holds steady or falls very slowly, but holds within the standard values listed below for
one minute.
Specification:
If the maximum pressure is less than the minimum standard value, replace the radiator cap sub-assembly.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 195
Type: N-cap, 108 kPa
1. Remove coolant and any foreign material on rubber points "A," "B," and "C."
2. Check that points "A," "B," and "C" are not deformed, cracked, or swollen.
3. Check that points "C" and "D" are not stuck together.
4. Apply engine coolant to points "B" and "C" before using the radiator cap tester.
5. Before installing the radiator cap tester, use the applicable radiator cap adaptor provided in the following SST kits in conjunction with the
radiator cap tester:
- SST P/N 09230-00030-01, 09230-00020-01, 09230-00050-01
6. When using the radiator cap tester, tilt it more than 30 degrees.
7. Pump the radiator cap tester several times, and check the maximum pressure.
Pumping speed: 1 pump/second
HINT:
Stop pumping when the valve opens and read the gauge. The gauge must be within the standard values listed below when the pressure valve
opens. The cap is considered OK when the pressure holds steady or falls very slowly, but holds within the standard values listed below for
one minute.
Specification:
If the maximum pressure is less than the minimum standard value, replace the radiator cap sub-assembly.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 196
Type: Compact Cap, 88 kPa
1. Remove coolant and any foreign material on rubber points "A," "B,"and "C."
2. Check that points "A" and "B" are not deformed, cracked, or swollen.
3. Check that points "B" and "C" are not stuck together.
4. Apply engine coolant to points "B" before using the radiator cap tester.
5. Before installing the radiator cap tester, use the applicable radiator cap adaptor provided in the following SST kits in conjunction with the
radiator cap tester:
- SST P/N 09230-00030-01, 09230-00020-01, 09230-00050-01
6. When using the radiator cap tester, tilt it more than 30 degrees.
7. Pump the radiator cap tester several times, and check the maximum pressure.
Pumping speed: 1 pump/second
HINT:
Stop pumping when the valve opens and read the gauge. The gauge must be within the standard values listed below when the pressure valve
opens. The cap is considered OK when the pressure holds steady or falls very slowly, but holds within the standard values listed below for
one minute.
Specification:
If the maximum pressure is less than the minimum standard value, replace the radiator cap sub-assembly.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 197
Type: Compact Cap, 108 kPa
1. Remove coolant and any foreign material on rubber points "A," "B,"and "C."
2. Check that points "A" and "B" are not deformed, cracked, or swollen.
3. Check that points "B" and "C" are not stuck together.
4. Apply engine coolant to points "B" before using the radiator cap tester.
5. Before installing the radiator cap tester, use the applicable radiator cap adaptor provided in the following SST kits in conjunction with the
radiator cap tester:
- SST P/N 09230-00030-01, 09230-00020-01, 09230-00050-01
6. When using the radiator cap tester, tilt it more than 30 degrees.
7. Pump the radiator cap tester several times, and check the maximum pressure.
Pumping speed: 1 pump/second
HINT:
Stop pumping when the valve opens and read the gauge. The gauge must be within the standard values listed below when the pressure valve
opens. The cap is considered OK when the pressure holds steady or falls very slowly, but holds within the standard values listed below for
one minute.
Specification:
If the maximum pressure is less than the minimum standard value, replace the radiator cap sub-assembly.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 198
Type: Plastic Cap, 108 kPa
1. Remove coolant and any foreign material on O-ring "A."
2. Check that O-ring "A" is not deformed, cracked, or swollen.
3. Apply engine coolant to O-ring "A" and rubber point "B" before using the radiator cap tester.
4. Before installing the radiator cap tester, use the applicable radiator cap adaptor provided in the following SST kits in conjunction with the
radiator cap tester:
- SST P/N 09230-00030-01, 09230-00020-01, 09230-00050-01
5. When using the radiator cap tester, tilt it more than 30 degrees.
6. Pump the radiator cap tester several times, and check the maximum pressure.
Pumping speed: 1 pump/second
HINT:
Stop pumping when the valve opens and read the gauge. The gauge must be within the standard values listed below when the pressure valve
opens. The cap is considered OK when the pressure holds steady or falls very slowly, but holds within the standard values listed below for
one minute.
Specification:
If the maximum pressure is less than the minimum standard value, replace the radiator cap sub-assembly.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # CAN-TSB2099L Date: 050314
Canada - Engine Control - Failure Initialize CAN Interface
Bulletin
TSB2099
Issue Date
March 14, 2005
Title
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 199
FAILURE TO INITIALIZE CAN INTERFACE MODULE
Component
GENERAL INFORMATION
Models
'04 And Onward, All CAN Equipped Models
INTRODUCTION:
If the Diagnostic Tester fails to initialize CAN-based communication with on-board vehicle controllers, a damaged cable or inoperative CAN
Interface Module may be at fault. This bulletin provides test procedures to check the integrity of the Diagnostic Tester cables and the CAN Interface
Module.
APPLICABLE VEHICLES:
- 2004 and onward model year CAN-equipped vehicles.
REQUIRED SSTs:
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE:
Failure to initialize CAN-based communications between the Diagnostic Tester and on-board vehicle controllers can be caused by the following
issues:
- The 14/26 Pin DLC Cable is damaged, causing an open communication circuit.
- The DLC Cable is damaged, causing an open communication circuit.
- The CAN Interface Module is damaged.
- The vehicle's CAN Communication System has a fault, requiring further vehicle diagnostics.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 200
NOTE:
The Diagnostic Tester may operate properly in other modes such as OBD/MOBD and CARB OBDII with damaged cable or CAN module.
To determine the cause of communication error, perform the following steps:
1. Using the Diagnostic Tester, perform the CAN MODULE VERSION self test. Select DIAGNOSIS/SETUP/SELF TEST and perform the
following screen flow:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 201
NOTE:
Before performing test, confirm the Diagnostic Tester, 14/26 Pin DLC Cable, and CAN Interface Module all securely connected.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 202
2. Perform the Data Link Self Test (figure 3):
3. Inspect the J1962 OBDII Cable (CAN DLC).
A. Disconnect the CAN Interface Module from the J1962 OBDII Cable (CAN DLC). A small Phillips screwdriver is required to separate the
CAN Interface Module from the J1962 OBDII Cable.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 203
B. Test the J1962 OBDII Cable (CAN DLC) for continuity.2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # CAN-TSB2097L Date: 050225
Canada - Tires Wheels - Tire Rotation Guide
Bulletin
TSB2097
Issue Date
February 25, 2005
Title
TIRE ROTATION GUIDE
Component
GENERAL INFORMATION
Models
All Models, All Years
INTRODUCTION:
The purpose of regularly rotating tires is to achieve more uniform wear for all tires on a vehicle.
Recent changes to the maintenance schedule require the checking of tread depth to determine the need for tire rotation, rather than rotation at a fixed
interval.
The purpose of the procedure outlined below is to assist you in determining whether a customer's tires need to be rotated.
NOTE:
If a customer's tires show uneven wear, check for and correct any misalignment, imbalance or other mechanical problem involved before
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 204
rotation.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE:
The first tire rotation is the most important. Below are examples for when you should and should not rotate the tires.
Rotation is needed
Rotation is NOT needed
Procedure:
1. Measure the center tread depth. (See diagram)
2. Compare the front tires center tread depth with the rear tires.
3. If one or both tires have equal or more than (20% or 1 mm) difference between the center of the front and rear tires, rotate the tires.
4. Measure the inner and outer tire shoulder tread depth. (See diagram)
5. Compare the front tires inner and outer tire shoulder tread depth with the rear tires.
6. If one or both tires have equal or more than (20% or 1 mm) difference between the shoulders of the front and rear tires, rotate the tires.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 205
Tire measurement points:
NOTE:
Issue of this Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available. IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN
AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable, will apply.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # CAN-TSB2072L Date: 050418
Canada - A/C - A/C Sensor Inspection
Bulletin
TSB2072
Issue Date
April 18, 2005
Title
SENSOR INSPECTION FOR AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
Component
HEATING & AIR CONDITIONING
Models
'90 - Current All Models
INTRODUCTION:
This service bulletin contains inspection procedures to more precisely confirm proper operation of the following temperature sensors of the air
conditioning system. Follow the procedures in this service bulletin when inspecting these sensors. These contents will be reflected in future repair
manuals.
- Room Temperature Sensor
- Ambient Temperature Sensor
- Air Duct Sensor
- Evaporator Temperature Sensor
- Solar Sensor
- Room Humidity Sensor
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 206
APPLICABLE VEHICLES:
- All 1990 - Current model year Lexus vehicles.
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
INSPECTION PROCEDURE:
1. Inspect Room Temperature Sensor.
A. Measure the sensor resistance.
HINT:
As the temperature increases, the resistance decreases.
2. Inspect Ambient Temperature Sensor.
A. Measure sensor resistance according to the selected graph (specification).
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 207
HINT:
As the temperature increases, the resistance decreases.
3. Inspect Air Duct Sensor.
A. Measure the sensor resistance according to the table and graph (specification).
NOTE:
- Even slightly touching the sensor may change the resistance value. Be sure to hold the connector of the sensor.
- When measuring, the sensor temperature must be the same as the ambient temperature.
HINT:
As the temperature increases, the resistance decreases.
4. Inspect Evaporator Temperature Sensor.
Select the appropriate graph (specification) using the following table.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 208
NOTE:
Please inspect the sensors for model years not indicated by this bulletin, according to the instructions in the applicable repair manual.
A. Measure the sensor resistance according to the selected graph (specification).
NOTE:
- Even slightly touching the sensor may change the resistance value.
- Be sure to hold the connector of the sensor.
- When measuring, the sensor temperature must be the same as the ambient temperature.
HINT:
As the temperature increases, the resistance decreases.
Graph 1:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 209
Graph 2:
Graph 3:
5. Inspect Solar Sensor.
Four types of solar sensors are used on Lexus vehicles depending on the vehicle specifications. The inspection procedure for each type of sensor
differs from the others. Select the appropriate inspection procedure from the table below according to vehicle specifications and perform the
inspection.
Procedure A:
a. Disconnect the solar sensor connector.
b. Measure the resistance between terminals 1 and 2 of the solar sensor under the following conditions:
- Cover the sensor with a cloth to avoid direct light.
- Expose the sensor to light from a distance of 300 mm (11.81 in.) or less with an inspection light.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 210
NOTE:
Terminal 1 of the sensor is always on the right, when the lock is facing up.
When using an analog tester, connect the positive (+) lead to terminal 2 and negative (-) lead to terminal 1 of the solar sensor.
HINT:
If the light is weak, the sensor may not react. Be sure to use an incandescent light for an inspection light.
Standard:
Procedure B:
a. Disconnect the solar sensor connector.
b. Measure the resistance between terminals 2 and 3 of the solar sensor under the following conditions:
- Cover the sensor with a cloth to avoid direct light.
- Expose the sensor to light from a distance of 300 mm (11.81 in.) or less with an inspection light.
NOTE:
When using an analog tester, connect the positive (+) lead to terminal 3 and negative (-) lead to terminal 2 of the solar sensor.
HINT:
If the light is weak, the sensor may not react. Be sure to use an incandescent light for an inspection light.
Standard:
Procedure C:
a. Turn the ignition switch ON.
b. Measure the voltage between terminals TSR (+) and CLTE (-) of the connector under the following conditions:
- Cover the sensor with a cloth to avoid direct light.
- Expose the sensor to light from a distance of 300 mm (11.81 in.) or less with an inspection light.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 211
HINT:
- If the light is weak, the sensor may not react. Be sure to use an incandescent light for an inspection light.
- Do not disconnect the solar sensor connector.
Standard:
c. Measure the voltage between terminals TSL (+) and CLTE (-) of the connector under the following conditions:
- Cover the sensor with a cloth to avoid direct light.
- Expose the sensor to light from a distance of 300 mm (11.81 in.) or less with an inspection light.
HINT:
- If the light is weak, the sensor may not react. Be sure to use an incandescent light for an inspection light.
- Do not disconnect the solar sensor connector.
Standard:
Procedure D:
a. Turn the ignition switch on.
b. Using the tester, measure the voltage between terminals TSD (+) and CLTE (-) of the connector under the following conditions:
- Cover the sensor with a cloth to avoid direct light.
- Expose the sensor to light from a distance of 300 mm (11.81 in.) or less with an inspection light.
HINT:
If the light is weak, the sensor may not react. Be sure to use an incandescent light for an inspection light.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 212
Standard:
6. Inspect Room Humidity Sensor.
Measure the humidity and output voltage of the humidity sensor when the sensor is installed on the vehicle and the temperature at the humidity
sensor position (room temperature sensor position) is 77°F (25°C). If the output voltage is within the specifications according to the graph and
table, the sensor is normal.
HINT:
For the inspection procedure of the room temperature sensor, refer to "Room Temperature Sensor Inspection Procedure" in this bulletin.
A. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
B. Measure the voltage between terminal VO (3) and GND (2) of the room humidity sensor.
C. Measure the humidity and voltage when the room temperature (humidity sensor position) is 77°F (25°C). According to the result, determine
whether the sensor is normal or not.
NOTE:
Issue of this Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available. IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN
AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable, will apply.Technical Service
Bulletin # CAN-TSB2064L Date: 050606
Canada - Engine Control - ECM Reprogramming Process
Bulletin
TSB2064
Issue Date
June 06, 2005
Title
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 213
ECU FLASH REPROGRAMMING PROCESS
Component
GENERAL INFORMATION
Models
Applicable Models
NOTICE:
This TSB supercedes TSB No. 0592 "How To Download TDT Software Versions and Calibration Files".
TSB No. 0592 should be discarded.
INTRODUCTION:
Electronic Control Unit (ECU) is a Lexus term used to describe integrated computerized devices responsible for managing the operation of a system
or sub-system. For the purposes of this bulletin, the term "ECU" is used as a generic label for the following SAE J1930 standard references:
- Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
- Engine Control Module (ECM)
- Transmission Control Module (TCM)
- or any other Lexus specific control unit
Flash reprogramming allows the ECU software to be updated for changes in vehicle calibrations without removing the ECU from the vehicle. Flash
calibration updates for specific vehicle models/ECUs will be released as field fix procedures described in individual service bulletins. This bulletin
details the ECU flash reprogramming process and the applications within ETAS and the Lexus Diagnostic Tester used for reprogramming.
Flash calibration updates can only be applied to the vehicle/ECU combination for which they are intended. ECUs have internal security that will not
allow them to be programmed with another ECU's information.
APPLICABLE VEHICLES:
- 2001 (and later) model year GS 430/300, IS 300, LS 430 & LX 470 vehicles.
- 2002 (and later) model year SC 430 vehicles.
- All 2003 (and later) model year Lexus vehicles.
PARTS INFORMATION:
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 214
REQUIRED SSTs:
PROCESS OVERVIEW:
ECU Flash Reprogramming is a 4-step process:
1. Locate the desired calibration file on ETAS.
Calibration files are listed by model and model year.
2. Download the calibration file from ETAS to the Diagnostic Tester.
The Calibration Update Wizard (CUW) is an application on ETAS which downloads calibration files from ETAS to the Diagnostic Tester
Program Card. This step is only required when the calibration file is not currently stored on the Diagnostic Tester Program Card.
3. Reprogram the vehicle ECU with the Diagnostic Tester.
Diagnostic Tester Software now incorporates a function to update a vehicle's ECU calibration through flash reprogramming.
4. Confirm successful flash update and affix calibration update sticker.
Modifications to ECU calibration files must be recorded and properly displayed on the vehicle using the calibration update sticker.
NOTE:
The calibration file contains the Calibration ID number(s) for a specific vehicle ECU (see Figure 1).
NOTE:
The total number of Calibration ID numbers corresponds to the number of reprogrammable processors in the ECU (see Figure 2).
OPERATION PROCEDURE:
The following steps in this bulletin describe how to properly flash reprogram an ECU.
Locate Calibration File:
1. Locate calibration file on ETAS.
A. Click on Tools >Diagnostic Tester.
- Under the Diagnostic Tester on ETAS, a list of the latest calibration files will be displayed.
- Choose the appropriate model and model year calibration file.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 215
B. Proceed to step 2 for instructions on how to download the calibration file from ETAS to the Diagnostic Tester Program Card.
Download File To Tester:
2. Download the calibration file to the Diagnostic Tester.
The Calibration Update Wizard (CUW) is an application on ETAS which downloads calibration files from ETAS onto the Diagnostic Tester
Program Card.
NOTE:
Before you begin, ensure that the Diagnostic Tester is equipped with software version 10.2a, or later. Only a 12 MB program card (P/N
01002593-005) may be used for this process.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 216
A. Before downloading a new calibration file from ETAS, check the current calibration files stored on the Diagnostic Tester Program Card by
following the screen flow (Figure 4).
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 217
B. You have the option to delete calibrations off the tester before downloading a new calibration. The CUW also provides this option if there is
not enough memory for the new calibration. To delete one or all of the calibrations, follow the screen flow (Figure 5).
C. If this is the first time you have downloaded a calibration file from ETAS to the Diagnostic Tester Program Card, you MUST first install the
latest version of the Calibration Update Wizard (CUW) onto your ETAS workstation PC, as shown.
This step is also required if you are using a version of CUW earlier than version 6.0. CUW 6.0 is the only version compatible with
Diagnostic Tester software version 10.2a and later. If necessary, see TSB0586 on ETAS to install or reinstall CUW.
D. The Calibration Update Wizard (CUW) launches automatically when a calibration file link is selected (or clicked).
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 218
Verify that the CUW version is 6.0 or higher. If not, refer to the Note below. The CUW will guide you through the steps to download the
calibration file to the Diagnostic Tester Program Card. Click NEXT on the first screen (Figure 7).
NOTE
If the CUW does not launch, or the version is older than 6.0, install Diagnostic Software (ETAS Diagnostic Applications Installer). Specific
installation instructions (Reprogramming with CUW 6.0) are located under Diagnostics (Arrow) ECU Flash Reprogramming (Figure 6).
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 219
E. Confirm the Diagnostic Tester has the appropriate software for the type of calibration file that was downloaded.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 220
F. Confirm the Diagnostic Tester software version and connections to the ETAS workstation are correct.
G. Place the Diagnostic Tester in the "GET CAL FROM PC" mode to receive the calibration file (Figure 10) Click NEXT on the ETAS
workstation. Once communications begin between the PC and the Diagnostic Tester, the Diagnostic Tester display will flash CONNECTED.
H. The CUW determines if there is enough memory to store the calibration file on the Diagnostic Tester Program Card. If there is insufficient
memory, the CUW will ask you to select the calibration file(s) to delete from the Diagnostic Tester Program Card to make room for the new
calibration file. If necessary, check the calibration file(s) to delete, as shown in Figure 11. Click DELETE.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 221
NOTE:
If there is adequate memory to store the calibration file, skip to Step J.
I. The CUW will now delete the calibration file(s) selected (see Figure 12).
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 222
J. The top half of the CUW screen displays the calibrations currently stored on the Diagnostic Tester Program Card. The bottom half of the
screen displays the new calibration to be loaded onto the Diagnostic Tester Program Card (see Figure 13). Click NEXT to continue the
process.
K. Confirm the calibration file to be sent to the Diagnostic Tester Program Card (Figure 14). Click SEND.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 223
L. The calibration file will now be downloaded to the Diagnostic Tester Program Card. This process takes approximately 2-6 minutes (see
Figure 15).
M. The CUW will prompt when the calibration file is completely downloaded. Click OK to close the CUW (Figure 16).
The Diagnostic Tester now has the calibration file stored and you may proceed to the next step to reprogram the vehicle ECU.
Reprogramming ECU With Tester:
3. Reprogram the vehicle ECU with the Diagnostic Tester.
NOTICE:
Errors during the flash reprogramming process can permanently damage the vehicle ECU. Minimize the risks by following the steps below.
- Battery voltage MUST NOT FALL BELOW 11.4 volts during reprogramming.
- Confirm battery voltage is higher than 11.4 volts, but be sure voltage DOES NOT RISE ABOVE 16.0 volts during reprogramming.
- Turn off all electrical accessories (e.g. Audio system, A/C, interior lights, DRL, etc.).
- Do not add to or significantly change the vehicle's electrical load while reprogramming.
- Confirm the hood is open and ensure under hood temperatures do not exceed 158°F.
- Confirm cable connections between the vehicle and Diagnostic Tester are secure. (Reference TSB0449, "ECU Flash Reprogramming
Error Message.")
- Do not disconnect or turn off the Diagnostic Tester or the vehicle ignition during reprogramming.
- Set the parking brake.
- Complete ALL flash calibration updates provided for each ECU.
If the battery's state of charge or capacity are in question, test with SST No. J-44350, "Midtronics Battery Tester."
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 224
To ensure stable battery voltage, a battery charger may be connected during reprogramming if:
- Voltage does not fall below 11.4 volts.
- Voltage does not rise above 16.0 volts.
- Setting is on SLOW charge and not BOOST.
A. Connect the Diagnostic Tester to the vehicle and select CURRENT ECU CAL from the ECU REPROGRAM MAIN MENU. Determine the
vehicle's current ECU calibration. (See Figure 17.)
NOTE:
The vehicle may contain up to 3 separate calibration ID numbers. In the example shown, the vehicle ECU contains only 2 calibration IDs.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 225
Continue to update the ECU calibration file following the screen flow (Figure 18). Details for selected screens are shown in Figure 19.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 226
NOTE:
- Each flash calibration update will take approximately 15 to 45 minutes.
- Screens E through J (Figure 18) will need to be repeated for each flash calibration update (calibration ID number).
- All updates must display "YES" to complete the entire calibration file update for the vehicle ECU.
- Failure to complete all updates may result in PERMANENT ECU DAMAGE!
Confirm Update:
4. Confirm successful flash calibration update and affix calibration update sticker.
Follow these steps to confirm the calibration was reprogrammed to the ECU.
A. The new calibration file should be displayed as the current ECU calibration file.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 227
B. Using a permanent marker or ball point pen, enter the required information on the Authorized Modifications Label (Figures 21).
C. Affix this label under the hood in the location determined by the specific vehicle TSB or Campaign.
NOTE:
Wait 60-90 seconds for ink to set before handling.2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # CAN-TSB2030LR2 Date: 040914
Canada - Engine Control - Oxygen Sensor Location Identification
Bulletin
TSB2030R
Issue Date
September 14, 2004
Title
ENGINE BANK 1 AND BANK 2 A/F AND O2 IDENTIFICATION
Component
ENGINE ELECTRICAL
Models
'90 - '10 Applicable Lexus Models
TSB REVISION NOTICE
- March 4, 2010: Applicability has been updated to include 2009 - 2010 model year vehicles.
Any previous printed versions of this TSB should be discarded. Be sure to review the entire content of this service bulletin before
proceeding.
INTRODUCTION:
This service bulletin provides information on the proper identification of engine bank 1 and engine bank 2 for correct A/F sensor and oxygen sensor
replacement.
This bulletin contains information that identifies engine bank 1 and engine bank 2 on the following engines:
2GR-FE, 2GR-FSE, 2GR-FXE, 3GR-FSE, 4GR-FSE, 2JZ-GE, 1MZ-FE, 3MZ-FE, 1UR-FE, 1UR-FSE, 2UR-FSE, 2UR-GSE, 3UR-FE, 1UZ-FE,
2UZ-FE, and 3UZ-FE.
- Bank 1 (B1) refers to the bank that includes cylinder No. 1.
- Bank 2 (B2) refers to the bank opposite bank 1.
- Sensor 1 (S1) refers to the sensor that is located before the catalytic converters.
- Sensor 2 (S2) refers to the sensor that is located after the catalytic converters.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 228
APPLICABILITY:
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 229
APPLICABLE VEHICLES:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 230
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 231
ENGINE BANK IDENTIFICATION:
A/F AND O2 SENSOR IDENTIFICATION:
NOTE:
Issue of this Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available. IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN
AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable, will apply.Technical Service
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 232
Bulletin # SB0059-12 Date: 120710
Engine Controls - Accelerator Pedal Sensor Service Precautions
L-SB-0059-12
July 10, 2012
Accelerator Pedal Sensor Assembly Service Precaution
Service Category
Engine/Hybrid System
Section
Engine Control
Market
USA
Applicability
Introduction
This bulletin provides a service precaution related to the accelerator pedal sensor assembly during inspection, removal, and installation.
Warranty Information
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 233
Service Precaution
? 2012 Lexus, a division of Toyota Motor Sales, USA
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # CAN-TSB0594L Date: 020221
Canada - Exhuast - Sulfur Odor/Smell From Exhaust
Bulletin
0594
Issue Date
2002-02-21
Market
Canada
Reference
EM-03-001
Model
All Models
Year Range
All Model Years
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 234
Component
EM, FU
Subject:
SULFUR ODOUR/SMELL FROM EXHAUST
Some owners of Lexus vehicles may experience a sulfur like or "rotten egg" odour from the exhaust system. High levels of sulphur in gasoline cause
sulphur compounds to be deposited and burned off in the catalytic convertor during certain driving conditions. Sulfur is a natural component of
crude oil from which gasoline is refined and the amount of sulfur can be decreased through the refining process. The amount of sulfur content in fuel
sold in Canada can vary from Province to Province and varies considerably between gasoline brands.
On June 23, 1999, the federal government passed regulations limiting the amount of sulphur in gasoline. Starting in 2005, low-sulphur gasoline (that
is gasoline with an average sulphur level of less than 30 ppm) is required throughout Canada. As an interim step, gasoline with an average sulphur
level of not more than 150 ppm is required starting in 2002.
The implementation of the low-sulpur fuel requirement is not until January 2005. If customers are concerned about this issue they should contact
Environment Canada, or their member of parliament.
APPLICABLE VEHICLES: All Models.
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
A sulfur odour emitted from the vehicle's tailpipe does not necessarily indicate that there is an issue with the engine's running condition, but is most
likely directly related to the fuel. If the vehicle is exhibiting an excessive sulfur odour, the following checks should be performed:
- If the MIL light is ON, check for DTCs and repair as necessary.
If no trouble is found after performing the above check, recommend the customer try a different source of fuel.
Replacement of oxygen sensors, air/fuel ratio sensors or catalytic converters will not reduce the odour and will therefore not be considered
warrantable.
NOTE:
Issue of this Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available. IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN
AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable, will apply.Technical Service
Bulletin # CAN-TSB0592L Date: 030204
Canada - Engine Control - Software And Calibration Files TDT
Bulletin
0592
Issue Date
2003-02-04
Market
Canada
Reference
GI-03-005
Model
ALL MODELS
Year Range
ALL MODEL YEARS
Component
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 235
GI
Subject:
HOW TO DOWNLOAD TDT SOFTWARE VERSIONS AND CALIBRATION FILES
Introduction
TDT (Lexus Diagnostic Tester) programming is an ongoing process which allows dealerships to maintain the latest technology within the LEXUS
family of products.
The need to update the software in a timely manner and insure the most current TDT versions are available to the dealerships has been addressed by
making Software Versions and Calibration files available on ETAS for convenient download to your dealership PC
Process Overview
TDT software reprogramming is a 2-step process:
1. Download the latest Software Version or Calibration file from ETAS into a Folder on your PC's C:\ drive.
2. Reprogram the TDT program card with the latest software version or calibration files.
HOW TO DOWNLOAD TDT SOFTWARE VERSIONS AND CALIBRATION FILES
(It is suggested with Program card files and Calibration Files that they be saved in a dedicated folder rather than in the "temp" folder. To
create a folder, access your "Windows Explorer" through "Start Menu" and "Programs". With the C:\ Drive displayed (Reynolds C:\ for
some), select "file". Then select "New". A new folder will appear on the C:\ drive. Give the folder a name you will remember, (i.e: TDT).
All update Program files and calibration files can now be saved in this folder.)
TO DOWNLOAD A SOFTWARE VERSION:
1. From the ETAS home page, select "Tools".
2. Select "Toyota Diagnostic Tester".
3. Select "Program Card Software".
4. Select the applicable version within "Program Card Files"
5. Click on the file within "Program File" on the Right side of the screen
6. To download and save the program select either "Save File", "Save" or "OK" (Windows Explorer users, be sure to select to save the file to
disk.)
7. Select a folder to download the file into. (As described above, select the dedicated folder you created earlier. (i.e: TDT files)).
8. Select "Save" The file will then be downloaded into the selected folder.
TO DOWNLOAD A CALIBRATION FILE:
1. Select "Tools" from the ETAS home page.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 236
2. Select "Toyota Diagnostic Tester".
3. Select "Type 1 Calibration Files (10.1a Software and Older) or The Type 2 Calibration Files (10.2a Software and newer))".
4. Select the applicable Calibration Data
5. Select the appropriate "Cal file" to download for your application on the right side of the screen
6. To download and save the program select either "Save File", "Save" or "OK" (Windows Explorer users, be sure to select to save the file to
disk.)
7. Select a folder to download the file into. (As described above, select the dedicated folder you created earlier. (i.e: TDT files)).
8. Select "Save" The file will then be downloaded into the selected folder.
LOADING CALIBRATION FILES ONTO THE TDT
BE SURE WHEN UPDATING THE PROGRAM CARD THAT THE TESTER IS PLUGGED TO IT'S AC POWER SUPPLY)
1. Access the "Calibration Update Wizard" through "Start" menu, "Programs", "Toyota Diagnostics"
2. Select "File Open" at the first window.
3. Next, select the appropriate folder that contains the required Calibration file you downloaded earlier. (i.e TDT Files)
4. Double click on the appropriate Calibration file.
5. Next follow the instructions on preparing the TDT for the download.
6. On the TDT, from the Application Select Menu, select "ECU REPROGRAM"
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 237
7. Select "Get Cal From PC"
8. The next screen will say that PC communication is "DISCONNECTED" This is normal until "Next" is selected on the PC.
9. On the PC, Select "Next"
10. The TDT will now attempt to communicate with the PC.
11. If the communication is not successful, follow the instructions and change the COM port setting and reboot the Tester.
12. Once communication has been established, select "Send".
UPDATING THE SOFTWARE VERSION ON THE TDT.
BE SURE WHEN UPDATING THE PROGRAM CARD THAT THE TESTER IS PLUGGED TO IT'S AC POWER SUPPLY)
1. Access the "Software Update Wizard" through "Start" menu, "Programs", "Toyota Diagnostics".
2. Select "Next" at the first window.
3. Locate the Software version in the appropriate folder using the roll down menu on the end of the "Look in" bar. (Be sure to select "All Files" in
the "Files of type" bar.Otherwise, your file may not be displayed)
4. Double click on the appropriate Software file.
5. Next follow the instructions on preparing the TDT for the download.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 238
6. On the TDT, making sure the Tester is OFF, put the TDT into Monitor mode by pressing "Yes", " * ", and " # " simultaneously on the TDT
key pad. The "Monitor Active" screen should appear.
7. On the PC, select "Next". The TDT will now attempt to communicate with the PC.
8. If the communication is not successful, follow the instructions and change the COM port setting and reboot the Tester.
9. Once communication has been established, check that the version to be downloaded is correct as displayed on the PC, then select "Next"
10. To commence the update procedure, select "Finish"
NOTE:
Issue of this Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available. IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN
AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable, will apply.Technical Service
Bulletin # CAN-TSB0590L Date: 020203
Canada - Accessories - Programming Homelink
Bulletin
0590
Issue Date
2002-02-03
Market
Canada
Reference
BE-03-002
Model
ALL APPLICABLE MODELS
Year Range
1999 ~
Component
BE
Subject:
PROGRAMMING THE HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
This Bulletin is to advise dealer personnel how to effectively program the HomeLink(R) Universal Transceiver. HomeLink(R) is a universal
transceiver that is designed to operate garage doors, gates, entrance doors, door locks and home lighting systems, as well as security systems.
APPLICABLE VEHICLES: All applicable 1999 to current model year vehicles.
CAUTIONS BEFORE PROGRAMING:
CAUTIONS BEFORE PROGRAMMING THE HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER:
- Do NOT use the HomeLink(R) Universal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks the safety stop and reverse feature as
required by federal safety standards. A garage door opener, which cannot detect an object, signaling the door to stop and reverse,
does not meet current federal safety standards.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 239
- When programming the HomeLink(R) Universal Transceiver, you may be operating a garage door or other device. Make sure that people
and objects are out of the way of the garage door or other device to prevent potential harm or damage.
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE:
Programming the HomeLink(R) Universal Transceiver
Follow the procedure below to program the HomeLink(R) Universal Transceiver. At the end of this, there are tips and troubleshooting information
that are provided as a useful information guide.
The HomeLink(R) Universal Transceiver, located in the vehicle's overhead console or driver's side visor, has 3 buttons and can store one program
for each button.
First Time Programming
1. Press and hold down the 2 outside buttons until the indicator light begins to flash (after approximately 20 seconds), then release both buttons.
(Please refer to "LED Light Definitions" in this Bulletin.)
- Do NOT hold the buttons down for longer than 30 seconds
- Do not repeat this step to program the remaining buttons. (Proceed to Step 2.)
- It is recommended for maximum range performance to put new batteries in the hand-held transmitter supplied with garage door opener
before training the HomeLink(R) Universal Transceiver.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches away from the surface of the HomeLink(R) Universal Transceiver.
NOTE:
Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink(R) in view while programming.
3. Simultaneously press and hold the hand-held transmitter button along with the selected HomeLink(R) button. Do not release the buttons until
Step 4 has been completed.
4. When the LED (indicator) light on the HomeLink(R) changes from a slow to a rapid flash release both buttons.
5. Test the operation of the HomeLink(R) by pressing the newly programmed button. Check to see if the device operates garage door correctly.
- If the device operates properly, the programming is complete.
NOTE:
Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for each remaining HomeLink(R) button to program another device.
IMPORTANT:
If the garage door does not operate, press and hold the trained HomeLink(R) button. If the indicator light flashes rapidly and then
turns solid after 2 seconds, it may be the "rolling code" type, therefore, proceed to Step 6.
NOTE:
A second person may make the following Steps (6 through 9) quicker and easier.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 240
6. Locate the "training" button on the ceiling-mounted garage door opener motor. The exact location and color of the button may vary by brand of
garage door opener.
7. Press and release the "training" button on the ceiling-mounted garage door opener motor.
8. Press and release the vehicle's programmed HomeLink(R) button twice. If the door opens, the programming process is complete. If the door does
not open, it may be necessary to press and release the button a third time.
9. The ceiling-mounted garage door opener motor should now recognize the HomeLink(R) and should activate the garage door.
Programming An Entrance Gate
1. Decide which of the 3 HomeLink(R) buttons you want to program. (See Step 1 in "First Time Programming.")
2. Place the hand-held gate transmitter 1 to 3 inches away from the surface of the HomeLink(R) Universal Transceiver.
NOTE:
Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink(R) in view while programming.
3. Press and hold the selected HomeLink(R) button.
4. Continuously press and release (cycle) the hand-held gate transmitter button every 2 seconds until Step 5 is complete.
5. When the LED (indicator) light on the HomeLink(R) changes from a slow to a rapid flash, release both buttons.
6. Test the operation of the HomeLink(R) by pressing the newly programmed button. Check to see if the gate operates correctly.
Reprogramming A Button
Individual HomeLink(R) buttons cannot be erased, however, to reprogram a single button, follow the steps listed below.
1. Select the correct programming procedure based on the device the customer wants programmed.
a) Programming the HomeLink(R) Universal Transceiver.
b) Programming an entrance gate.
2. Press and hold down the selected button until the indicator light on the HomeLink(R) begins to flash slowly. Do not release this button until the
programming is complete.
3. Proceed to Step 2 of the selected programming procedure for the remaining programming instructions.
Erasing Programming Memory
Erasing The Entire HomeLink(R) Memory
(All Three Programs)
To erase ALL previously programmed codes at one time, press and hold down the 2 outside buttons until the indicator light flashes. (See Step 1 in
"First Time Programming.")
The HomeLink(R) Universal Transceiver may be programmed to operate other devices such as entry doors, door locks, security systems, as well as
home lighting systems.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 241
NOTE:
Accessories may be necessary to operate some of the other devices listed above.
On behalf of the customer, additional information and/or programming instructions for other devices can be obtained from HomeLink(R)
at 1-800-355-3515 or on their web site at http://www.homelink.com
LED Light Definitions
Programming Tips & General Information
- The compatible programming frequency range of the HomeLink(R) is between 286-321 MHz and 336-399 MHz.
- To ensure maximum range of the HomeLink(R), install a new battery in the hand-held transmitter prior to programming.
- The effective transmission range of the HomeLink(R) is usually equal to or greater than the hand-held transmitter.
- The battery side of the hand-held transmitter must be pointed away from the HomeLink(R) during the programming process.
- Keep the LED (Indicator Light) on the HomeLink(R) in view while programming.
- Hold the hand-held transmitter 1-3 inches away from the HomeLink(R) while programming.
- When programming rolling code, the training button can usually be found on the back of the garage door motor near the antenna wire.
NOTE:
Lexus offers an optional Integrated HomeLink Tester as an available Special Service Tool: SST# TOY280087.
HomeLink Tester Functions
The Integrated HomeLink(R) Tester (available SST# TOY280087) is a tool that can be used to test the operating functions and performance of the
HomeLink(R) Universal Transceiver. Using the operating instructions provided with the Tester, there are three tests (Functionality, Range and
Training) that can be performed.
1. Functionality Test:
- Confirms power and ground source to the vehicle HomeLink(R)
- Confirms that the HomeLink(R) programs can be cleared and that the HomeLink(R) can be placed in the default mode
- Checks each signal of the three HomeLink(R) channels
2. Range Test:
- Verifies the range of the HomeLink(R) to be within 50 to 100 feet from the vehicle for all three channels
3. Training Test:
- Confirms the HomeLink(R) can be programmed to match the hand-held transmitter
- Verifies that the HomeLink(R) can transmit the programmed signal
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 242
NOTE:
Issue of this Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available. IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN
AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable, will apply.Technical Service
Bulletin # NHTSA12V305000 Date: 120629
Recall 12V305000: Potential Accelerator Pedal Sticking
Vehicle Make/Model: Model Year(s):
Lexus/RX350 2010
Lexus/RX450H 2010
MANUFACTURER: Toyota Motor North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: June 29, 2012
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 12V305000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A
COMPONENT: Vehicle Speed Control: Accelerator Pedal
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 154,036
SUMMARY:
Toyota is recalling certain model year 2010 Lexus RX350 and RX450H vehicles, manufactured from November 28, 2008, through September 1,
2010. The accelerator pedal can get stuck in the wide open position due to its being trapped by an unsecured or incompatible driver's floor mat.
CONSEQUENCE:
A stuck open accelerator pedal may result in very high vehicle speeds and make it difficult to stop the vehicle, which could cause a crash, serious
injury or death.
REMEDY:
Lexus will notify owners of affected vehicles and dealers will modify or replace the accelerator pedal and replace any lexus driver's floor mat not
specified for the vehicle. Lexus will begin notifying owners in early August 2012. Owners may contact Lexus at 1-800-255-3987.
NOTES:
Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov.2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # CAN-TSB0520L Date: 020101
Canada - Vehicle - Replacement VIN Plates And Compliance Lables
Bulletin
0520
Issue Date
2002-01-01
Market
Canada
Reference
MI-01-002
Model
ALL MODELS
Year Range
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 243
1990 ~
Component
MI
Subject:
REPLACEMENT VIN PLATES AND COMPLIANCE LABELS
Effective January 1, 2002, replacement VIN plates (riveted to the front left side of the dashboard) and Compliance Labels (affixed to driver's door or
doorpost "B" pillar) will be available from TCI. An administration fee of $50.00 per VIN plate and $20.00 per Compliance Label will be debited to
the Dealer's Parts Account.
Requests for replacement VIN plates and/or Compliance Labels must meet one of the following criterion:
- The original VIN plate or Compliance label is incorrect. (The incorrect VIN plate or compliance label must accompany the request.)
- The original VIN plate or Compliance label has been damaged or is attached to a part that will be replaced as a result of a vehicle
accident. (The plate or label, to be replaced, must accompany the request.)
- The original VIN plate or Compliance label has been stolen or removed by the police. (Be sure to contact the Police first). When
requesting a new plate or label to replace a stolen one, a copy of the police or insurance company report must be included with the request.
NOTE:
Aluminum Compliance Plates Are No Longer Available as Replacements:
Prior to 1989-model year the compliance plate was aluminum. For 1989-model year and later production, this plate has been replaced with a vinyl
label. If an aluminum plate requires replacement, a vinyl label containing information from this plate will be supplied as a replacement.
In order for a request to be processed the Service Manager must sign and submit the "Request For Replacement VIN Plate/Compliance Label" form
(Attachment B).
By signing the request form the Service Manager agrees to provide TCI with evidence that the plate and/or label has been installed on the
appropriate vehicle.
Once the "Request For Replacement VIN Plate/Compliance Label" form (Attachment B) has been received TCI will process the application, create
the replacement VIN Plate/Compliance Label, and returned ship via registered courier to the dealership, attention to the Service Manager. TCI will
then debit the applicable charges to the Dealer Parts Account.
NOTE:
Unsigned or incomplete forms will be returned to the dealer and the request for replacement VIN Plate/Compliance Label will not be
processed.
After installation of the replacement VIN Plate/Compliance Label the Service Manager must sign and submit the completed "Proof of Replacement
VIN Plate/Compliance Label Installation" form (Attachment C), attach photographs documenting the installation and return to TCI.
NOTE:
- If TCI does not receive evidence of installation after 30 days from the date the replacement VIN Plate or Compliance Label had been
issued a $50.00 penalty charge will be debited to the Dealer's Parts Account.
- If you have any questions or require further information please contact your Consultant, Parts & Service Operations representative.
Attached, for your reference:
- Sample "Request For Replacement VIN Plate/Compliance Label" form. (Attachment A)
- Blank "Request For Replacement VIN Plate/Compliance Label" form. (Attachment B)
- Blank " Proof of Replacement VIN Plate/Compliance Label Installation" form. (Attachment C)
PROCEDURE:
Dealer:
1. Make a copy of the appropriate blank "Request For Replacement VIN Plate/Compliance Label" form;
2. Fill-in all correct information as requested on the form(s);
3. Photocopy the completed "Request For Replacement VIN Plate/Compliance Label" form for your dealer customer file;
4. Mail one copy of the completed and signed request form(s) along with all necessary enclosures to the address indicated on the form(s);
5. Receive/ verify correct replacement VIN Plate/Compliance Label;
6. Affix replacement VIN Plate/Compliance Label to appropriate vehicle;
7. Make a copy of the "Proof of Replacement VIN Plate/ Compliance Label Installation" blank form(s);
8. Fill-in all correct information as requested on the form(s);
9. Photocopy the completed "Proof of Replacement VIN Plate/ Compliance Label Installation" form for your dealer customer file; and,
10. Mail one copy of the "Proof of Replacement VIN Plate/ Compliance Label Installation" form to TCI along with all necessary enclosures
attention to:
Specialist, Regulatory Affairs
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 244
Corporate Affairs
Toyota Canada Inc.
One Toyota Place
Scarborough, Ontario
M1H 1H9
TCI:
Receive and log request for replacement;
Verify information from form and cross reference with vehicle database;
Produce replacement VIN Plate/Compliance Label;
Return replacement VIN/Compliance Label to requesting dealer *; and,
File all requests and documentation.
* VIN Plate/Compliance Labels will be returned attention to the Service Manager via registered courier with proof of delivery signature required.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 245
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 246
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 247
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 248
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 249
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 250
NOTE:
Issue of this Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available. IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN
AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable, will apply.Technical Service
Bulletin # CRIB181 Date: 111201
Body - Body Welding Specifications/Substitutions
FOR THE COLLISION REPAIR PROFESSIONAL
TITLE: WELDING SPECIFICATIONS & SUBSTITUTIONS
SECTION: BODY COMPONENT REPLACEMENT
BULLETIN # 181
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 251
MODELS: ALL TOYOTA, LEXUS, and SCION
DATE: DECEMBER 2011
Welding specifications for body components are published in model-specific Collision Damage Repair Manuals for all Toyota Lexus and Scion
vehicles. Welded component installation may require a combination of welding methods including:
^ STRSW (Squeeze-Type Resistant Spot Welds)
^ GMAW/MIG (Gas Metal Arc/Metal Inert Gas - Welding)
^ Arc Brazing (Brazing)
The STRSW method best replicates factory attachment methods and when performed correctly offers the following advantages over GMAW/MIG
plug welding:
^ Equipment is readily available in most markets
^ Comparable to factory welding methods and appearance
^ Does not produce ultra violet radiation
^ Reduces heat effect zones and corrosive hot spots
^ Reduces the emission of metal grinding particles when finishing
^ Reduces the emission of stray sparks
^ Reduces airborne contamination from burnt coatings
STRSW may be substituted for GMAW/MIG plug welds, however, STRSW substitutions should match factory weld size, strength and appearance.
Appearance alone does not validate the strength of a weld. Weld strength must be validated by tuning the welder and performing destructive testing.
Tuning the welder and destructive tests must be performed on metal of the same thickness and composition as that of the component being replaced.
Always review Toyota Repair Manual Specifications and Collision Repair Information Bulletins before proceeding with any welded body
component replacement. Toyota technical reference information can be accessed through (www.techinfo.toyota.com).
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 252
The following illustrations are examples of body component welding specifications that call-out the locations of GMAW/MIG welds that may be
substituted with STRSW. For model-specific instructions specifications and reference charts review the applicable Collision Damage Repair Manual.
NOTE:
STRSW substitutions should match factory spot welds in size strength and appearance. If replacement welds are larger or smaller resize
electrode contact tip to match. Do not STRSW over factory weld locations.
Toyota Collision Repair & Refinish Training provides detailed information discussion and training on welding topics such as these in courses:
^ PB300 Welding Techniques For Collision Repair Pre-Work (web-based e-learning)
^ B300 Welding Techniques For Collision Repair
^ 301 Non-Structural Body Repair Techniques
^ 460 Structural Body Repair Techniques
Training information can be accessed through (www.crrtraining.com).2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0154-11 Date: 111221
Engine - Oil Seepage From Oil Cooler Pipes
L-SB-0154-11
December 21, 2011
Oil Cooler Pipe Seep
Service Category
Engine/Hybrid System
Section
Lubrication
Market
USA
Applicability
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 253
Introduction
Some 2007 - 2011 model year RX 350 and 2010 - 2011 model year RX 450h vehicles may exhibit an oil seep from the engine oil cooler pipes.
Please refer to the following repair procedure to address this condition.
Production Change Information
This TSIB applies to vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VINs shown.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
Repair Procedure
1. Confirm the seep is from either of the oil cooler pipes. If neither oil cooler pipe is seeping, this TSIB does NOT apply.
2. Remove and replace the oil cooler pipe assembly following the appropriate Repair Manual procedure.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 254
Refer to the Technical Information System (TIS), applicable model and model year Repair Manual: Engine/Hybrid System - Engine Mechanical
- '2GR-FE Engine Mechanical: Engine Unit:
3. Confirm the engine oil level is correct.
4. Start the engine and confirm there's no seeping from the oil cooler pipes.2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0148-11 Date: 111214
Navigation System - HDD Map Update Processes
L-SB-0148-11
December 14, 2011
HDD Navigation Map Update Process
Service Category
Audio/Visual/Telematics
Section
Navigation/Multi Info Display
Market
USA
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 255
Applicability
Introduction
Lexus models equipped with Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Navigation require a Special Service Tool and follow a unique process for updating map
points of interest and system software. Instead of individual DVDs installed into the vehicle all Map Data is uploaded directly to the HDD system.
Map Data will be released annually through the direct shipment of two Map Data DVDs to each dealership service manager. The annual Map Data
release must then be installed onto the Navigation Update Tool. Individual map updates are then loaded into vehicles with special map security keys.
These keys are available through the normal parts ordering system. Keys are loaded onto the Navigation Update Tool through a PC or TIS
Techstream unit using software found on the Technical Information System (TIS).
Follow the procedures listed in this bulletin to:
^ Identify the current version of Map Data on the vehicle and on the Navigation Update Tool.
^ Load Map Data onto the Navigation Update Tool.
^ Load map security key(s) onto the Navigation Update Tool.
^ Connect the Navigation Update Tool to the vehicle and update the Map/System Data to the latest version.
NOTE
^ In order to perform the procedures outlined in this TSIB, you MUST have completed the setup procedure in TSIB No. L-SB-0180-09, "HDD
Navigation Program Setup".
^ Before performing this procedure, disconnect all other USB peripheral and external storage devices (i.e., USB thumb drives, hard drives,
cameras, mice, etc.).
^ For additional details, refer to the "Navigation Update Tool Operating Manual" on TIS (under Diagnostic / Tools and Equipment /
Navigation Update Tools tabs, "Reference Documents").
Warranty Information
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 256
Parts Information
Required Tools & Equipment
Version Verification
Checking for Map Data Version on Navigation Update Tool
WARNING
DO NOT attempt to install Navigation Map Data prior to performing the "Navigation System Firmware Improvement" bulletin.
^ L-SB-0067-09- Generation 5
^ L-SB-0147-11- Generation 6
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 257
1. Open the Navigation Programs Installer.
2. Click Version Check on the Navigation Update Tool Main Menu.
3. Connect the Navigation Update Tool.
A. Make sure the USB cable is secured in both the PC and the Navigation Update Tool USB ports.
B. Confirm that the Navigation Update Tool is powered correctly.
C. Turn power ON.
D. Press Continue.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 258
4. Compare the CDDB version with the CDDB version shown on TIS.
Checking Map Data Version on Vehicle HDD Navigation System (Generation 5)
1. Turn vehicle ignition ON (engine OFF).
2. From the multi-information display, press I Agree.
3. Press the MENU button.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 259
4. From the multi-information display, press HDD Data.
5. Compare the Map Data version on the Navigation System to that on the Navigation Update Tool.
Checking Map Data Version on Vehicle HDD Navigation System (Generation 6)
1. Turn vehicle ignition ON (engine OFF).
2. Press the INFO/PHONE button.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 260
3. From the multi-information display press Map Data
4. Compare the Map Data version on the Navigation System to that on the Navigation Update Tool.
Tool Load
NOTE
There are three separate processes used to update the Map Data on the vehicle:
^ Loading the Map Data onto the Navigation Update Tool
^ Loading the Map Data security key onto the Navigation Update Tool
^ Loading the Map Data into the vehicle HDD Navigation System
1. Generation 5
2. Generation 6
If the Map version on the Navigation Update Tool is the same as shown on TIS, then go to the "Security Key Load" section in this TSIB.
If the Map version on the Navigation Update Tool is NOT the same as shown on TIS, then follow the instructions below.
Loading Map Data onto Navigation Update Tool
NOTE
Before performing this procedure, disconnect all other USB peripheral and external storage devices (i.e., USB thumb drives, hard drives,
cameras, mice, etc.).
1. Open the Navigation Programs Installer
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 261
2. Select Load Map Data on the Navigation Update Tool Main Menu.
3. Connect the Navigation Update Tool.
A. Make sure the USB cable is secured in both the PC and the Navigation Update Tool USB ports.
B. Confirm that the Navigation Update Tool is powered correctly.
C. Turn power ON.
D. Press Continue.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 262
4. Insert Map Disk 1 into the CD/DVD-ROM drive and press Continue.
5. Allow Map Data to copy onto the PC hard drive (requires about 30 minutes).
If necessary:
^ Insert the additional Map Disk as instructed into the CD/DVD-ROM drive.
^ Allow the additional Map Data to copy onto the PC hard drive (requires about 30 minutes).
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 263
6. Verify the correct version of Map data to load onto the Navigation Update Tool.
7. Click Continue to load Map Data onto the Navigation Update Tool.
Map Data will then copy to the Navigation Update Tool (requires about 15 minutes).
8. Verify the Map Data is loaded onto the Navigation Update Tool and can now be used to update the vehicle.
Security Key Load
NOTE
^ In order to load the Map Data onto the vehicle's Navigation System, you MUST load a security key EACH time.
^ The Navigation Update Tool will hold up to ten security keys. One key is required per vehicle update.
^ Storing keys on the Navigation Update Tool is NOT recommended.
^ Map Data MUST be loaded onto the Navigation Update Tool before a Key File can be loaded.
^ Before performing this procedure, disconnect all other USB peripheral and external storage devices (i.e., USB thumb drives, hard drives,
cameras, mice, etc.).
1. Open the Navigation Programs Installer.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 264
2. Select Load key File on the Navigation Update Tool Main Menu.
3. Connect the Navigation Update Tool.
A. Make sure the USB cable is secured in both the PC and the Navigation Update Tool USB ports.
B. Confirm that the Navigation Update Tool is powered correctly.
C. Turn power ON.
D. Press Continue.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 265
4. Connect USB Key File and press Continue.
5. Click Load to continue.
6. Allow the Key File to copy onto the Navigation Update Tool (requires about 5 seconds).
7. Verify the Key File is loaded onto the Navigation Update Tool and can now be used to update the vehicle.
Vehicle Loading
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 266
NOTE
^ The Map Data security key MUST be loaded onto the Navigation Update Tool before Map Data can be loaded to the vehicle.
^ Prior to connecting to the vehicle you MUST disconnect the Navigation Update Tool from the PC.
^ Connect the battery charger to the vehicle prior to beginning the process to ensure constant battery voltage.
Loading Map Data onto Vehicle HDD Navigation System (Generation 5)
NOTE
Prior to connecting to the vehicle you MUST disconnect the Navigation Update Tool from the PC.
1. Connect the Navigation Update Tool to the vehicle.
A. Make sure the 1EEE1394 cable is secured in both the Navigation Update Tool and the vehicle connector.
B. Confirm the Navigation Update Tool is powered correctly.
2. Turn vehicle ignition ON (engine OFF).
3. From the multi-information display press I Agree.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 267
4. Press the "MENU" button.
5. From the multi-information display, press HDD Data.
6. Press Map Data Update.
7. Press I Agree.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 268
8. Allow Map Data to copy (requires about 25 minutes).
9. Press OK.
10. Disconnect the Navigation Update Tool from the vehicle.
Loading Map Data onto Vehicle HDD Navigation System (Generation 6)
NOTE
Prior to connecting to the vehicle you MUST disconnect the Navigation Update Tool from the PC.
1. Connect the Navigation Update Tool to the vehicle.
A. Make sure the 1EEE1394 cable is secured in both the Navigation Update Tool and the vehicle connector.
B. Confirm the Navigation Update Tool is powered correctly.
2. Turn vehicle ignition ON (engine OFF).
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 269
3. Press the INFO/PHONE button.
4. From the multi-information display press Map Data.
5. Press Map Data Update.
6. Press I Agree.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 270
7. Allow Map Data to copy (requires about 25 minutes).
8. Press OK.
9. Disconnect the Navigation Update Tool from the vehicle.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0147-11 Date: 111109
Navigation/Multi Info Display - Various Concerns
L-SB-0147-11
December 9, 2011
Navigation System Firmware Improvement
Service Category
Audio/Visual/Telematics
Section
Navigation/Multi Info Display
Market
USA
Applicability
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 271
Introduction
Do NOT perform a map update until this TSIB has been performed
Certain 2010 - 2012 model year Lexus models may exhibit one or more of the following conditions:
^ Steering wheel volume controls are intermittently inoperative
^ Navigation System region code intermittently will reset to region U59
^ XM NavTraffic will not function properly after renewing XM traffic subscription
^ Slow response from Bluetooth address book voice commands
^ Black screen condition after shifting from reverse to park
^ Air conditioning screen may not appear when changing blower speed
^ iPod scrolling speed is slow
^ Display constantly shows "Calculating" on right side of screen while driving on freeway Slow response at times from navigation system even at
startup
^ GPS coordinates shown instead of destination address.
^ Display locks up and appears unresponsive after periods of time.
^ Touch screen (if equipped) functions are slow to respond.
Navigation firmware has been updated to allow updating map to version 10.1 or later. Updated navigation system software has also been developed
to remedy these conditions. Use the following procedure to address these conditions.
Production Change Information
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 272
This TSIB applies to all 2010 SC 430 vehicles with navigation systems and to vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VINs
shown.
Warranty Information
Required Tools & Equipment
Repair Procedure
Loading Map Firmware onto Navigation Update Tool
Navigation Update Tool MUST have latest "Navigation Program Installer" before performing this TSIB. For installation procedure, refer to TSIB
L-SB-0180-09, "HDD Navigation Program Setup".
1. Turn on TIS Techstream.
2. Log into TIS.
3. Download the appropriate Vehicle Navigation Software Update from TIS.
A. Click on the TIS tab.
B. Click on the Diagnostics tab.
C. Click on the Tools & Equipment tab.
D. Click on the Navigation Update Tool tab under Tools.
E. Click on the appropriate "Vehicle Navigation Software Update" under Available Software Updates.
If the TIS division is NOT set to Lexus (under the My Account area), the Navigation Update Tool tab will NOT display Navigation Update
is a Lexus ONLY TIS option at this time
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 273
4. Click Open to begin the download.
5. Once file is downloaded prepare the vehicle for use with the Navigation Update Tool. Cover the GPS antenna in a manner where GPS satellite
tracking is NOT present during the navigation software update process.
NOTE
Park vehicle in a structure that blocks the GPS signal~ or cover the GPS antenna with a metal panel
6. Connect the Navigation Update Tool to the PC using the USB cable.
A. Make sure the USB cable is secured in both the PC and Navigation Update Tool USB ports.
B. Confirm the Navigation Update Tool is powered correctly.
C. Turn the power ON.
D. Click Continue.
7. Verify that both the Transfer Mode Display Light (green) and Power Supply Display Light (blue) are lit then click Continue.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 274
8. The software will perform a connection check with the Navigation Update Tool. In the event an error is shown please recheck the USB
connection.
9. Navigation Firmware is ready to be loaded onto the Navigation Update Tool click Continue.
10. Navigation Firmware will now load onto the Navigation Update Tool.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 275
11. Once the Navigation Firmware is successfully loaded onto the Navigation Update Tool click Continue to finish the installer
12. Disconnect the navigation tool from the PC.
Loading Map Firmware into Vehicle Navigation System
NOTE
Vehicle ignition should be OFF before starting this procedure.
1. Connect the Navigation Update Tool to the vehicle (Tool MUST be disconnected from the PC)
2. Connect the GR8 battery diagnostic station to the vehicle.
3. Turn the Ignition ON (engine OFF) and wait for the Caution screen to appear.
4. Select Show on Map switch.
5. Hold down the Menu button on the Remote Touch interface and turn the light switch from OFF to tail light position 3 or more times until the
navigation system enters the diagnostic mode.
For touch screen vehicles (ES 350, IS 250C/350C, GS 350/450h/460, GX 460, LS 460/460L, LS 600hL, LX 570, SC 430):
Press the INFO switch and turn the light switch from OFF to tail light position 3 or more times until the navigation system enters the diagnostic
mode.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 276
6. Select the Program Update button from the Service Menu.
7. Select the OK button.
8. When the ECU Selection screen appears confirm the Current version is less than the New version. If yes then click the Select button. If no then
click End and go to step 11.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 277
9. When EMV-M screen is shown select OK.
10. After about 1 minute if the update was successful the display will indicate "Updating complete at the top of the screen. Select OK to continue.
11. Confirm the current version matches one of those shown below Select End to complete the procedure.
12. Cycle the ignition OFF to finish the updating procedure
13. Cycle the ignition ON and confirm normal Navigation System operation.
14. Remove items that block the GPS antenna, or move to an area where GPS satellite reception is present.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 278
15. Refer to TIS, Diagnostics, Tools & Equipment tab for the latest navigation Map Update TSIB.2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # CRIB157
Date: 070801
Body - Collision Repair Information
TITLE: COLLISION PARTS POSITION STATEMENT
SECTION: EXTERIOR
BULLETIN # 157
MODELS: ALL TOYOTA LEXUS and SCION
DATE: AUGUST 2007
WARRANTIES, USED SALVAGE PARTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (SRS)
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 279
REPLACEMENT CRASH PARTS DISCLOSURE AND AUTHORIZATION FORM2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # CRIB146 Date:
060901
Body - Paintless Dent Repair Guidelines
TITLE: PAINTLESS DENT REPAIR
SECTION: EXTERIOR
BULLETIN # 146
MODELS: TOYOTA, SCION AND LEXUS
DATE: SEPTEMBER 2006
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 280
Toyota has developed the following guidelines for the use of "Paintless Dent Repair" (PDR) procedures on all Toyota, Scion and Lexus vehicles.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 281
PDR is used to reduce the cost of repairing minor dents and to avoid color match and refinish issues that may arise. Be sure to choose your PDR
service provider carefully and always review their professional qualifications to ensure they are up to date on the latest PDR techniques and
procedures.2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0128-11 Date: 111006
A/C - Dust/Powder Blows From Dash Vents
L-SB-0128-11
October 6, 2011
Dust from HVAC Vents
Service Category
Vehicle Interior
Section
Heating/Air Conditioning
Market
USA
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 282
Applicability
Introduction
Some vehicles may exhibit a condition where dust or powder is visible from the HVAC vents. A newly designed evaporator and HVAC system
cleaning procedure has been developed to address this condition. The procedure listed below details evaporator removal HVAC system cleaning
blower motor cleaning and installation.
Parts Information
Production Change Information
This TSIB applies to:
^ 2007 - 2010 ES 350 vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VIN shown.
^ ALL 2010 - 2011 North American produced RX 350 vehicles.
^ 2010 Japan produced RX 350 vehicles built BEFORE the Production Change Effective VINs shown.
^ 2010 RX 450h vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VINs shown.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 283
Warranty Information
Required Tools & Equipment
Repair Procedure
1. Confirm the condition.
Check for white dust or powder on the top of the instrument panel and interior surfaces.
If white dust or debris is present check the cabin air filter for damage and for other external sources of debris. Proceed to step 2 for evaporator
replacement if no external debris sources are found.
2. Remove the evaporator.
Refer to the Technical Information System (TIS) applicable model and model year Repair Manual:
3. Remove the HVAC ducts and registers from the dash pad.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 284
4. Remove the center console ducts from the center console.
5. Verify all HVAC ducts and registers have been removed.
6. Blow out ALL the HVAC ducts with shop air.
7. Wipe out ALL the HVAC ducts with a damp shop rag.
8. Visually inspect the HVAC ducts and verify all of the dust has been removed. If additional dust is discovered repeat steps 6 and 7 until the dust
has been completely removed.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 285
9. Clean the HVAC registers by blowing the registers out with shop air.
10. Clean the side window defroster vents by blowing them out with shop air as shown.
11. Disassemble the HVAC case and remove the evaporator. If the HVAC case was not previously disassembled and the evaporator removed refer
to the disassembly procedure in step 2.
12. Remove the heater core and blow out with shop air.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 286
13. Blow out the evaporator tray with shop air. If there is still dust on the tray use a small brush or damp shop rag to clean the tray.
14. Clean the thermistor with shop air.
15. Use compressed air to blow out the evaporator case.
16. Wipe the evaporator case with a damp shop rag.
17. Clean the evaporator cover with a soft brush or damp shop rag.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 287
18. Wipe out the blower motor housing with a damp shop rag.
19. Use shop air and blow in-between the fan and the blower motor housing.
20. Install the NEW evaporator.
Refer to TIS applicable model and model year Repair Manual:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 288
21. Remove the dust cover on the back of the blower motor.
22. Use shop air and blow dust out of the blower motor commutator brushes and windings.
23. Reassemble the blower motor assembly.
24. After repair confirm proper operation of the HVAC controls and cooling and heater functions.2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0125-11
Date: 110928
Suspension - Shock Absorber Replacement Criterion
L-SB-0125-11
September 28, 2011
Shock Absorber Replacement Criteria
Service Category
Suspension
Section
Front Suspension
Market
USA
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 289
Applicability
Introduction
The purpose of this TSIB is to provide a quick reference to assist in making easy judgements regarding shock absorber and strut replacements.
Warranty Information
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 290
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 291
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 292
Inspection
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0091-11 Date: 110901
Cooling System - Water Pump Leak Inspection/Diagnostics
L-SB-0091-11
September 1, 2011
Water Pump Inspection and Diagnosis Tips
Service Category
Engine/Hybrid System
Section
Cooling
Market
USA
Applicability
Introduction
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 293
This service bulletin contains water pump leak inspection and diagnostic tips.
Warranty Information
Diagnostic Procedure
Water Pump Mechanical Seal
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 294
The water pump shaft is sealed by a mechanical type seal.
Temporary Leaks
If debris becomes trapped between the mating ring and seal ring a small gap is formed. This allows coolant to bypass the mechanical seal flow into
the fluid catch pocket and drain out of the weep hole. This condition is temporary and will no longer be present once the debris is crushed or works
its way out of the seal. Water pump replacement is not necessary.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 295
If debris was trapped between the seal ring and mating ring an abrasion mark may have been left on the mating ring surface. This abrasion mark does
not affect sealing performance due to the large sealing surface of the mating ring. Once the debris is no longer present the mechanical seal
performance will return to normal operation. Water pump replacement is not necessary.
Inspection method:
1. Visually inspect the water pump and coolant level in the coolant reservoir. Replace the water pump if any of the following conditions exist:
A. The coolant level is below the "low" level and the water pump appears to be leaking.
B. Water pump pulley/bearing has excessive free play or does not turn smoothly.
C. Heavy coolant deposits are present on both the water pump and surrounding components (i.e. pulleys, engine block, timing cover, under
hood).
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 296
If the above conditions do not apply or amount of deposits are in question, the leak may have been temporary and additional inspection is
necessary.
2. A paper towel should be used to determine if a leak is current or was temporary due to debris that has now cleared.
3. Apply a dry paper towel to the coolant deposits around the weep hole. If the paper towel remains dry the leak was temporary and the water pump
does not need to be replaced. If the paper towel becomes wet the leak is current and the water pump should be replaced.Technical Service
Bulletin # SB0086-11 Date: 110829
A/C - Unpleasant Odors From Dash Vents For First 10 Secs
L-SB-0086-11
August 29, 2011
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 297
HVAC Odor
Service Category
Vehicle Interior
Section
Heating/Air Conditioning
Market
USA
Applicability
Introduction
Under certain temperature conditions some customers may experience an unpleasant odor coming from the face level HVAC vents during the initial
10 seconds of HVAC system operation. An HVAC Amplifier is now available with updated logic that will direct air away from the face level vents
under certain temperature conditions during the first 10 seconds of HVAC operation.
This TSIB does not apply to the following conditions:
^ The unpleasant odor continues after the initial 10 seconds of HVAC system operation
^ The unpleasant odor does not begin immediately after the HVAC system is turned ON
^ The unpleasant odor is present with the HVAC system OFF
Production Change Information
This TSIB applies to the following vehicles:
^ All 2010 vehicles
^ All 2011 vehicles produced BEFORE the VIN break
Parts Information
Warranty Information
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 298
Repair Procedure
1. Duplicate the condition by performing the following:
A. Park the vehicle outside.
B. Set the HVAC system to Low Fan Speed and Face Mode.
C. Turn the HVAC system OFF.
D. Turn the vehicle OFF.
E. Let the vehicle sit for at least 2 hours.
F. Turn vehicle ON.
G. Turn ON the HVAC system.
If the unpleasant odor does not start immediately after the HVAC system is turned ON or continues for more than 30 seconds this TSIB does not
apply.
2. Remove the A/C Amplifier. Refer to the Technical Information System (TIS) applicable model and model year Repair Manual:
^ 2010 (to 08/2009) / 2010 (from 08/2009) / 2011 RX 350:
Vehicle Interior - Heating/Air Conditioning - "Air Conditioning Amplifier: Removal"
3. Install the updated A/C amplifier. Refer to TIS applicable model and model year Repair Manual:
^ 2010 (to 08/2009) / 2010 (from 08/2009) / 2011 RX 350:
Vehicle Interior - Heating/Air Conditioning - "Air Conditioning Amplifier: Installation"
4. Verify Proper HVAC System Operation
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0066-11 Date: 110805
Electrical - Interior Electrical Component Precautions
L-SB-0066-11
August 5, 2011
Interior Electrical Component Precautions
Service Category
General
Section
Maintenance
Market
USA
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 299
Applicability
Introduction
When servicing interior electrical switches and components please note the precautions in this bulletin to avoid damaging electrical components and
switches. Many lubricants cleaners and automotive chemicals contain silicone or other compounds that may contaminate electrical contacts and
therefore increase electrical resistance and decrease switch performance.
Warranty Information
Precautions
The following precautions must be followed to avoid damage to interior electrical components.
^ DO NOT spray chemicals lubricants preservatives or cleaners directly onto into or in the vicinity of electrical components (i.e. brake light
combination cruise door lock or window switches).
^ DO NOT attempt to clean a switch that has had liquid spilled on it (i.e. coffee soda juice etc.) with cleaners or lubricants. The affected switch
should be replaced.
^ DO NOT lubricate a switch that does not operate smoothly or sticks. The lubricant may carbonize on the contacts and thus increase resistance.
The affected switch should be replaced.
^ DO NOT use sprays containing silicone on or near the brake light switch. This could contaminate the contacts in the switch and lead to a
malfunction in the following systems:
^ Brake lights
^ Cruise control
^ Shift interlock
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 300
^ Care must be taken to NOT allow moisture to get into the switches when using upholstery steam cleaning equipment.Technical Service
Bulletin # SB0041-11 Date: 110713
A/T - Replacement Precautions
L-SB-0041-11
July 13, 2011
Automatic Transmission Replacement Precautions
Service Category
Drivetrain
Section
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle
Market
USA
Applicability
Introduction
The purpose of this TSIB is to provide precautions to follow when installing an automatic transmission/transaxle assembly to avoid MIL "ON;"
shifting issues, and/or transmission damage. Use the information in this bulletin when installing an automatic transmission/transaxle assembly.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 301
Warranty Information
Precautions
Confirm the items shown.2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0038-11 Date: 110630
Steering - Groan When Turning Steering Wheel
L-SB-0038-11
June 30, 2011
Groan When Turning Steering Wheel
Service Category
Steering
Section
Steering Column
Market
USA
Applicability
Introduction
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 302
Some vehicles may exhibit a groan or squeak type noise when turning the steering wheel left or right while maneuvering at low speeds. If the noise is
coming from the steering rack input shaft area use the following procedure to lubricate the rubber boot for the steering gear input shaft.
Production Change Information
This TSIB applies to vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VINs shown.
Warranty Information
Parts Information
Repair Procedure
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 303
1. While turning the steering wheel lift up on one side of the rubber boot with a long screwdriver to confirm if the noise is coming from the steering
gear rubber boot for the steering gear input shaft.
2. Attach cylinder of grease to grease injection needle.
3. Apply bead of grease (5 grams) between steering gear housing and rubber boot for steering gear input shaft.
4. Turn steering wheel lock to lock 10 times to help work grease around and under steering gear input shaft rubber boot.
5. Confirm the noise has been eliminated.2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0033-11 Date: 110620
Engine - MIL ON/VVT-i DTC's Set - Oil Control Valve
L-SB-0033-11
June 20, 2011
MIL "ON" VVT-i DTCs - Oil Control Valve (OCV)
Service Category
Engine/Hybrid System
Section
Engine Control
Market
USA
Applicability
Introduction
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 304
Some 2007 - 2011 model year ES 350 and RX 350 vehicles may exhibit a MIL "ON" condition with one or more VVT-i related Diagnostic Trouble
Codes (DTCs) stored in the Engine Control Module or ECM (SAE term: Powertrain Control Module/PCM). Please use the following repair
procedure to address this condition.
Warranty Information
Parts Information
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 305
Required Tools & Equipment
Repair Procedure
1. Using TIS Techstream confirm one or more of the following DTCs are stored:
2. If any of the above DTCs are stored remove the affected OCV and visually inspect the spool valve for debris or sticking in its bore.
Refer to the chart for applicable OCV by DTC:
Refer to the Technical Information System (TIS) applicable model and model year Repair Manual:
3. If debris is present or the valve is sucking proceed to step 4.
If no debris is present or the spool valve does not appear to be sucking this TSIB does NOT apply. Continue diagnosis per the Repair Manual.
4. Remove the valve cover from the affected bank and temporarily remove both OCVs.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 306
NOTE
Inspect the OCV filter for any debris or damage upon removal.
Refer to TIS applicable model and model year Repair Manual:
5. Clean the OCV and oil pipe union oil passages using compressed air.
6. Confirm no debris is present around the OCV mounting hole and install a new OCV in the affected location. Reinstall the original OCV in the
non-affected location.
Refer to TIS applicable model and model year Repair Manual:
7. Clear any DTCs start the engine and test drive to verify the repair.2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0026-11 Date: 110504
Steering - Steering Column Rattle Noise
L-SB-0026-11
May 4, 2011
Steering Column Rattle Noise
Service Category
Steering
Section
Steering Column
Market
USA
Applicability
Introduction
Some 2010 - 2011 model year RX 350 vehicles may exhibit a rattle noise from the EPS (Electric Power Steering) Column when turning the steering
wheel and/or when driving on rough surfaces.
A new EPS steering column assembly is available to address this condition.
Production Change Information
This TSIB applies to:
^ All 2010 - 2011 TMK built RX 350 vehicles.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 307
^ 2010 - 2011 TMMC built RX 350 vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VINs shown.
Warranty Information
Parts Information
Required Tools & Equipment
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 308
Repair Procedure2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0024-11 Date: 110428
Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P2420 Set
L-SB-0024-11
April 28, 2011
MIL "ON" DTC P2420
Service Category
Vehicle Interior
Section
Meter/Gauge/Display
Market
USA
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 309
Applicability
Introduction
Some 2009 - 2010 model year Lexus vehicles may exhibit a MIL "ON" condition with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P2420 (Evaporative
Emission System Switching Valve Control Circuit High) present. The charcoal canister has been updated to address this condition.
Production Change Information
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 310
This TSIB applies to vehicles produced WITHIN the applicable VIN ranges shown.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 311
Warranty Information
Required Tools & Equipment
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 312
Parts Information
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 313
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 314
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 315
Repair Procedure
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0022-11 Date: 110419
Interior - Tonneau Cover Rattle Noise
L-SB-0022-11
April 19, 2011
Tonneau Cover Rattle Noise
Service Category
Vehicle Interior
Section
Interior Panels/Trim
Market
USA
Applicability
Introduction
Some 2010 - 2011 model year North American Produced (NAP) RX 350 vehicles may exhibit a condition where there is a tonneau cover rattle noise
from the rear hatch area over rough roads. A revised tonneau cover has been developed to address this condition.
Production Change Information
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 316
This TSIB applies to vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VINs shown.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
Applicable Warranty
^ This repair is covered under the Lexus Comprehensive Warranty. This warranty is in effect for 48 months or 50,000 miles, whichever occurs
first, from the vehicle's in-service date.
^ Warranty application is limited to occurrence of the specified condition described in this bulletin.
Repair Procedure
1. While driving down a rough road or raised pavement markers confirm the rattle noise from the rear hatch area. Retest with the tonneau cover
removed.
^ If noise is no longer present this TSIB may apply.
^ If noise is still present follow the Repair Manual for additional diagnostics.
2. Replace the tonneau cover assembly.
A. Press the release buttons to remove the tonneau cover.
B. Install the NEW tonneau cover assembly ensuring that the tonneau cover latches are fully engaged.
3. Confirm the repair.2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0014-11 Date: 110317
A/C - Side To Side Heat Temperature Variation
L-SB-0014-11
March 17, 2011
Heater Core Restriction
Service Category
Vehicle Interior
Section
Heating/Air Conditioning
Market
USA
Applicability
Introduction
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 317
Some 2008 - 2010 model year RX 350 2008 model year RX 400h and 2010 model year RX 450h vehicles may exhibit a variation greater than 20 F
(11 C) in HVAC vent temperatures between the driver and passenger side when heat is utilized at the same temperature setpoint. Use the following
repair procedure to address this condition.
Warranty Information
APPLICABLE WARRANTY
^ This repair is covered under the Lexus Comprehensive Warranty. This warranty is in effect for 48 months or 50,000 miles, whichever occurs
first, from the vehicle's in-service date.
^ Warranty application is limited to occurrence of the specified condition described in this bulletin.
Required Tools & Equipment
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 318
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 319
Parts Information
Repair Procedure
1. Using a thermometer confirm the condition matches the Introduction.
2. Inspect for corrosion sediment under the radiator cap and in the bottom of the radiator reserve tank.
^ If corrosion sediment is found - Continue to step 3.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 320
^ If no corrosion is found - Refer to the Technical Information System (TIS) applicable model and model year Repair Manual: Vehicle
Interior- Heating/Air Conditioning - 'Air Conditioning System: Air Conditioning System: Problem Symptoms Table".
3. Drain all coolant from the radiator and reserve tank and close the radiator drain. Thoroughly rinse the reserve tank and pick-up tube with water
and reinstall.
4. Remove the thermostat from its housing and reassemble the housing.
IMPORTANT
This will allow the cleaning solution to circulate without first requiring the engine to reach operating temperature.
Refer to the Technical Information System (TIS) applicable model and model year Repair Manual:
Engine/Hybrid System - Cooling - "2GR-FE Cooling: Thermostat: Removal"
^ 2008 / 2009 / 2010 (to 08/2009) / 2010 (from 08/2009) RX 350
^ 2008 RX 400h
^ 2010 (to 08/2009) / 2010 (from 08/2009) RX 450h
5. Install a cooling system flush adapter between the heater core inlet and outlet hoses bypassing the heater core.
6. Install a radiator neck fill adapter (not the funnel) and install a hose of equal diameter into neck adapter. Ensure length is sufficient for your
selected drain location.
NOTE
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 321
Selected drain must be direct to coolant waste or a pan/receptacle that can be transferred to coolant waste.
7. Install a fresh water hose onto the cooling system flush adapter.
8. Turn on the water and then start the engine and allow to idle. Continue to flush with a minimum of 25 gallon (95 liters) of water to completely
flush the system.
9. Turn off the engine and the fresh water supply.
10. Install the cap over the fresh water inlet on the adapter.
11. Drain water from the radiator and then close the radiator drain.
12. Create a 10% citric acid solution by mixing 900 grams of citric acid powder with water in a clean 1 gallon container until well dissolved.
13. Fill the cooling system through the radiator neck with the citric acid solution. Add water to fill the cooling system.
14. Start the engine and allow to idle for 30 minutes.
15. Drain the citric acid solution from the radiator and close the drain.
16. Perform steps 6 - 15 again.
17. Perform steps 6 - 9 again.
18. Remove the cooling system flush adapter then replace the heater core radiator water inlet housing water inlet water outlet bypass pipe ATF
cooler (if applicable) seals and gaskets for your vehicle as listed in the Parts Information section and reinstall the thermostat in the housing.
Then proceed to step 19 at the end of this bulletin.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 322
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 323
For parts replacement refer to TIS applicable model and model year Repair Manual:
19. Fill the system with the required coolant amount.
20. Confirm proper vehicle operation.2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0007-11 Date: 110217
A/T - Torque Converter Bolt Installation Precautions
L-SB-0007-11
February 17, 2011
Torque Converter Bolt Installation
Service Category
Drivetrain
Section
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle
Market
USA
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 324
Applicability
Introduction
The purpose of this TSIB is to provide information regarding the installation of the correct torque converter bolts during automatic
transmission/transaxle assembly replacement. Incorrect torque converter bolts or missing washers can cause damage to the torque converter
assembly. Use the information in this bulletin when installing an automatic transmission/transaxle assembly.
Not all applications will use washers on the torque converter bolts.
Warranty Information
Installation Procedure
^ When removing torque converter bolts and washers take special care that the same bolts and washers are used when installing the torque
converter.
^ Using an incorrect size bolt or washer may cause damage to the torque converter assembly.
^ Torque the bolts to the specification found in the applicable Repair Manual.
NOTE
In most applications there will be 1 black torque converter bolt, be sure to install this bolt first to aid in aligning the torque converter to the
flywheel assembly.2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0002-11 Date: 110111
Interior - Front Seat Track Noise/Abnormal Operation
L-SB-0002-11
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 325
January 11, 2011
Front Seat Track Abnormal Operation and/or Rattle
Service Category
Vehicle Interior
Section
Seat
Market
USA
Applicability
Introduction
Some 2010 model year North American Produced (NAP) RX 350 vehicles may exhibit a condition where the front seat track(s):
^ Feel loose when entering and/or exiting the vehicle.
^ Rattle when the seat is unoccupied.
An inspection and adjustment procedure has been developed to address this condition.
Production Change Information
This TSIB applies to vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VINs shown.
Warranty Information
APPLICABLE WARRANTY
^ This repair is covered under the Lexus Comprehensive Warranty. This warranty is in effect for 48 months or 50,000 miles, whichever occurs
first, from the vehicle's in-service date.
^ Warranty application is limited to occurrence of the specified condition described in this bulletin.
Parts Information
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 326
Required Tools & Equipment
Repair Procedure
1. While sitting in the seat confirm the condition by leaning against the seat back. If the seat feels slightly loose this TSIB may apply. If not follow
the Repair Manual for additional diagnostics.
2. Remove the front and rear seat track covers.
3. Follow Repair Manual instructions to remove the affected seat assembly from the vehicle. Refer to the Technical Information System (TIS)
2010 RX 350 Repair Manual:
Vehicle Interior - Seat - "Seat Front Seat Assembly: Removal (to 08/2009) / (from 08/2009)"
4. Locate the two 12 mm front rail end cap nuts.
5. Using a 0.15 mm (0.006 in.) feeler gauge measure the gap between the end cap nut and helical gear.
^ If there is a gap of 0.15 mm (0.006 in.) or greater proceed to step 6.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 327
^ If the gap is less than 0.15 mm (0.006 in.) follow the Repair Manual to continue diagnosis.
Refer to TIS, 2010 RX 350 Repair Manual:
^ Vehicle Interior - Seat - "Seat Front Seat Assembly: Inspection"
6. Install the seat assembly into the vehicle leaving the seat mounting bolts finger tight.
Refer to TIS, 2010 RX 350 Repair Manual:
Vehicle Interior - Seat - "Seat Front Seat Assembly Installation (to 08/2009) / (from 08/2009)"
7. Using the fore and aft adjuster slide the seat to the foremost position.
NOTICE
If the nuts are loosened in any position other than foremost, the drive screw can be rotated with the nut and misalignment between the
outer/inner tracks may occur.
8. With a 12 mm socket on a 6 inch extension loosen the two end cap nuts. Do NOT remove the end cap nuts at this step.
9. Using the fore and aft adjuster slide the seat to the rearmost position and remove the two end cap nuts.
10. With a wire brush clean the stud threads.
11. Install the NEW end cap nuts (PIN 41315-48010) and torque the end cap nut. There should be 0 mm gap between the end cap nut and the top of
the helical gear.
Torque: 3.0 N*m (30.6 kgf*cm, 27 in*lbf)
NOTICE
^ Do NOT over-tighten the end cap nut as it may damage the helical gear.
^ If the seat track position is NOT set at the rearmost position when the nuts are installed, the drive screw can rotate.
12. Torque the seat bolts and install the bolt covers following the Repair Manual.
Refer to TIS 2010 RX 350 Repair Manual:
^ Vehicle Interior - Seat - "Seat Front Seat Assembly Installation (to 08/2009) / (from 08/2009)"
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 328
13. Confirm the repair using the procedure in step 1. If excessive movement is present follow the Repair Manual for additional diagnostics.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0001-11 Date: 110106
A/T - World Standard Automatic Transmission Fluid
L-SB-0001-11
January 6, 2011
World Standard Automatic Transmission Fluid
Service Category
Drivetrain
Section
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle
Market
USA
Applicability
TSIB SUPERSESSION NOTICE
The information contained in this TSIB supersedes TSIB No. TC008-07.
^ Applicability has been updated to include 2009 - 2011 model year Lexus vehicles.
TSIB No. TC008-07 is Obsolete and any printed versions should be discarded. Be sure to review the entire content of this service bulletin before
proceeding.
Introduction
World Standard (WS) Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) was introduced to reduce maintenance costs and increase the mileage between
scheduled maintenance checks. Here are some important tips when working with ATF-WS in Lexus vehicles requiring its use.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 329
Warranty Information
Required Tools & Equipment
Important Information2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # CRIB180 Date: 101220
Vehicle - Usage Of Non-OE Parts
BULLETIN # 180
MODELS:
ALL TOYOTA LEXUS and SCION VEHICLES
TITLE:
USE OF NON-OEM PARTS ON TOYOTA VEHICLES
SECTION: EXTERIOR
DATE: DECEMBER 2010
Toyota Lexus and Scion vehicles are engineered and manufactured as an integrated assembly of carefully designed and manufactured parts working
as a system to provide predictable performance safety and durability.
To help preserve the performance of Toyota/Lexus/Scion vehicles Toyota Scion and Lexus publishes detailed repair procedures and produces and
sells Genuine Toyota/Lexus Parts which are manufactured to the same specifications and tolerances as the parts installed on new Toyota Lexus and
Scion vehicles. Repairing a vehicle using Genuine Toyota/Lexus/Scion parts and procedures can help return Toyota vehicles to pre-loss condition
following a collision.
The use of Alternative Parts
Due to the sensitive nature of the safety and performance systems and lack of testing to determine their effect on vehicle crashworthiness Toyota
Lexus and Scion do not recommend the use of alternative parts for the repair of Toyota vehicles. This includes:
^ Aftermarket Parts: Parts manufactured and branded by a company other than Toyota Scion or Lexus
^ Rebuilt Parts: Exterior sheet metal parts (including bumpers and wheels) removed from a damaged Toyota Lexus or Scion vehicle and
refurbished for resale
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 330
^ Salvage/Recycled Parts: Parts removed from a previously damaged vehicle cleaned up and then installed on a different vehicle.
Overall Body Structure
Genuine Toyota Lexus and Scion Parts are constructed using metals with specific properties, thicknesses and stamping structures built to perform in
a consistent and predictable way during a collision event. The use of non-OEM structural components may compromise the overall crashworthiness
and occupant safety of Toyota Lexus or Scion vehicles in a subsequent collision.
Supplementary Restraint System (SRS) Components
Toyota, Lexus and Scion vehicles are equipped with several SRS components including airbags and seatbelt pretensioners, which are designed to
help protect vehicle occupants from injury. These parts rely upon precisely manufactured sensors to detect a collision event and trigger the SRS
components to deploy within milliseconds of an impact. The installation of parts branded by companies other than Toyota, Scion or Lexus that may
not be tested to match Toyota, Lexus or Scion performance specifications may alter the structure of a vehicle and could result in improper operation
of the SRS sensors and components.
Exterior Sheet Metal Parts
The exterior sheet metal components are often described as "Cosmetic Parts". However, these parts are designed and tested as part of the overall
vehicle and may help send impact energy to the SRS sensors. In addition, some of these parts may help Toyota, Lexus or Scion vehicles comply with
several Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS) including hood intrusion in the passenger cabin, preservation of proper door operation
following a collision and proper airbag function. Alternative parts may not be crash tested to verify compliance with these standards.
Recycled Parts
Toyota, Lexus and Scion do not recommend the re-use of structural components that have been removed from a previously damaged vehicle.
Although parts may appear equivalent, it may be difficult to identify previous damage, if a part has received collateral damage as a result of a prior
collision or if the part has been subject to extreme weathering, corrosion or other detrimental environmental exposure. Furthermore, removing
welded parts from a donor vehicle, may compromise the structural integrity of the parts being used.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0073-09 Date: 090623
Fuel System - MIL ON/DTC P0505 Stored In ECM
L-SB-0073-09
June 23, 2009
MIL "ON" DTC P0505
Service Category
Engine/Hybrid System
Section
Engine Control
Market
USA
Applicability
Introduction
Some vehicles with 2GR-FE engines may exhibit a MIL "ON" condition with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0505 stored in the Engine Control
Module or ECM (SAE term: Powertrain Control Module/PCM). Use the following repair procedure to address customer concerns.
Production Change Information
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 331
This TSIB applies to vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VINs shown below.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
APPLICABLE WARRANTY
^ This repair is covered under the Lexus Federal Emission Warranty. This warranty is in effect for 48 months or 50,000 miles, whichever occurs
first, from the vehicle's in-service date.
^ For California specification vehicles sold, registered, and operated in California, Connecticut (starting with '08 MY), Maine, Massachusetts, New
Jersey (starting with '09 MY), Oregon (starting with '09 MY), Pennsylvania (starting with '08 MY), Rhode Island (starting with '08 MY),
Vermont, and Washington (starting with '09 MY), this repair is covered under the California Emission Warranty. This warranty is in effect for 84
months or 70,000 miles, whichever occurs first, from the vehicle's in-service date.
^ Warranty application is limited to correction of a problem based upon a customer's specific complaint.
Required Tools & Equipment
Additional TIS Techstream units may be ordered by calling Approved Dealer Equipment (ADE).
Repair Procedure
1. Using TIS Techstream check for any stored DTCs. Verify that DTC P0505 is present.
NOTE
If other DTCs are present along with P0505, this TSIB does NOT apply. Follow Repair Manual procedures to diagnose those DTCs.
2. Inspect the PCV hose connections and air induction system for leaks.
3. If no concerns are found replace the throttle body assembly.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 332
Refer to the Technical Information System (TIS) applicable model and model year Repair Manual:
^ 2007 / 2008 / 2009 ES 350:
Engine/Hybrid System - Engine Control - "2GR-FE Engine Control System:
Throttle Body: Removal"
^ 2007 / 2008 / 2009 ES 350:
Engine/Hybrid System - Engine Control - "2GR-FE Engine Control System:
Throttle Body: Installation"
^ 2007 / 2008 / 2009 RX 350:
Engine/Hybrid System - Engine Control - "2GR-FE Engine Control System:
Throttle Body: Removal"
^ 2007 / 2008 / 2009 RX 350:
Engine/Hybrid System - Engine Control - "2GR-FE Engine Control System:
Throttle Body: Installation"
4. Start the engine allow it to reach normal operating temperature and test drive to verify the repair.Technical Service Bulletin #
SB0066-09 Date: 090601
Exhaust System - Drone In Park While Stationary
L-SB-0066-09
June 1, 2009
Exhaust Drone Noise at Operating Temperature While Stationary in Drive
Service Category
Engine/Hybrid System
Section
Intake/Exhaust
Market
USA
Applicability
Introduction
Some customers may experience a drone noise or slight vibration with the engine at operating temperature and the vehicle stationary in Drive range.
Use the following repair procedure to address customer concerns.
Production Change Information
This TSB applies to vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VINs shown.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 333
Warranty Information
APPLICABLE WARRANTY
^ This repair is covered under the Lexus Comprehensive Warranty. This warranty is in effect for 48 months or 50,000 miles, whichever occurs first,
from the vehicle's in-service date.
^ Warranty application is limited to correction of a problem based upon a customer's specific complaint.
Parts Information
Repair Procedure
1. Start the engine and confirm the drone noise/vibration is present while stationary in Drive range after the vehicle has reached operating
temperature.
If the drone noise/vibration is NOT present after reaching operating temperature, this bulletin does NOT apply.
2. Inspect the position of the No.5 exhaust pipe support bracket and exhaust pipe hanger.
If the exhaust pipe hanger is positioned below the No.5 exhaust pipe support bracket (Figure 1) this bulletin does NOT apply.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 334
3. If the exhaust pipe hanger has rotated upward beside the No.5 exhaust pipe support bracket (Figure 2) replace the No.5 exhaust pipe support
bracket.
4. Start the engine and verify the repair.2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0060-09 Date: 090514
Wipers/Washers - Wiper Blade Maintenance/Cleaning
L-SB-0060-09
May 14, 2009
Wiper Blade Maintenance and Cleaning
Service Category
Vehicle Exterior
Section
Wiper/Washer
Market
USA
Applicability
Introduction
The following procedures are recommended to maintain wiper blade performance.
These procedures apply to the windshield and back glass (if the vehicle is equipped with a back glass wiper assembly).
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 335
Warranty Information
Maintenance, Cleaning & Use
Recommendations for Wiper Maintenance, Cleaning, and Use:
1. Scheduled Maintenance
^ Check rubber inserts every 4 - 6 months or 7,500 miles for wear cracking and contamination.
^ Clean glass and rubber inserts if blades are not clearing glass adequately. If this does not correct the problem replace the rubber inserts.
2. Cleaning Procedure
^ Rubber inserts: Bugs dirt sap and road grime on rubber inserts will cause streaking. Clean road and environmental debris from the rubber
inserts by using a cloth or paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mixture of mild detergent and water.
^ DO NOT USE fuel kerosene or petroleum based products to clean rubber inserts.
^ Windshield: Bugs sap road grime and car wax treatments decrease rubber insert performance.
^ Rinse the glass with water and apply non-abrasive cleaner such as Bon-Ami or equivalent with a sponge.
Make sure to use plenty of water with all powder based cleaners to avoid scratching the glass surface.
3. Contributors to Poor Performance/Decreased Rubber Blade Life (requiring rubber replacement)
^ Dust or dirt on the glass surface causes the rubber edge to wear quickly.
^ Sand and salt used for road conditioning during Winter months causes the edge to wear quickly so geographical locations with significant
snowfall require more frequent wiper replacement.
^ Heat and length of time in service can cause the rubber to become hard and brittle causing the rubber to not turn over resulting in streaking
and/or unwiped areas on the glass.
^ The use of an ice scraper near the blades can easily damage the rubber insert.
^ Pulling blades oft a frozen windshield can cause the rubber insert to tear.
^ Using wipers instead of an ice scraper to remove frost and ice from the glass can dull nick or tear the rubber.
^ Slamming the wiper on the glass to remove ice & snow can cause the blade to bend and the rubber to come out of the blade increasing the
potential to scratch the glass.
^ When ice forms in wiper blade pin joints it may cause streaking and unwiped areas. To remove ice from pin joints compress the blade and
rubber with your hand to loosen the frozen joints.2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0074-09 Date: 090626
Brakes - Rattle/Buzz From Driver's Side Of Dash
L-SB-0074-09
June 26, 2009
Brake Booster Vacuum Check Valve Rattle/Buzz Noise
Service Category
Brake
Section
Brake System
Market
USA
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 336
Applicability
Introduction
Some RX 330/350 vehicles may exhibit a rattle or buzz type noise coming from the driver's side instrument panel area. The noise can be duplicated
when lightly accelerating and then decelerating, or when depressing the brake pedal with the shift lever in Park and then releasing the brake pedal.
An improved vacuum check valve is now available to reduce this noise.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
APPLICABLE WARRANTY
^ This repair is covered under the Lexus Comprehensive Warranty. This warranty is in effect for 48 months or 50,000 miles, whichever occurs
first, from the vehicle's in-service date.
^ Warranty application is limited to correction of a problem based upon a customer's specific complaint.
Repair Procedure
1. Confirm the noise is coming from the brake booster vacuum check valve.
NOTE
Replace vacuum check valve with the same type as originally equipped (straight or 90°).
2. Remove the vacuum tube clip from the brake booster check valve.
3. Remove and replace the brake booster vacuum check valve.
Make sure NEW valve is fully seated into brake booster grommet and returned to original condition.
4. Reconnect vacuum hose to the brake booster check valve and secure with clip.
5. Confirm that there are no vacuum leaks.
6. Confirm the noise has been eliminated.2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # CRIB172 Date: 090301
Body - Bumper Component Repair
TITLE: BUMPER COMPONENT REPAIR
SECTION: EXTERIOR
BULLETIN # 172
MODELS: ALL TOYOTA LEXUS and SCION
DATE: MARCH 2009
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 337
While it may seem cost effective to repair damaged bumper components specifically impact energy absorbers and reinforcements there is no way to
certify that a repaired part will function as originally intended under all future operating conditions and subsequent collisions. Original Equipment
bumper components comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards established under the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
Title 49 Part 581. Therefore it is recommended to replace damaged bumper impact energy absorbers and reinforcements with genuine new original
equipment replacement parts only.
For more information on collision damage repair topics please refer to Collision Repair Information Bulletin # 161 Collision Damage Repair
Precautions and plan to attend Toyota Collision Repair & Refinish Training. Visit www.crrtraining.com for training information.Technical
Service Bulletin # SB0172-08 Date: 081222
Instruments - Compass Calibration Procedure
L-SB-0172-08
December 22, 2008
Initial Calibration of Compass During PDS
Service Category
General
Section
Pre-Delivery Service
Market
USA
Applicability
Introduction
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 338
Some 2010 model RX350 vehicles are equipped with a compass in the rear view mirror. In order for the compass to correctly indicate the direction
that the vehicle is heading it must be calibrated prior to vehicle delivery. Use the following procedure to perform initial calibration during
Pre-Delivery Service (PDS).
Warranty Information
Calibration Procedure
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the "IG-ON" position and hold the "AUTO" switch for 6 seconds until the zone number appears on the display.
HINT
Pushing the "AUTO" switch for 3 seconds turns ON or OFF the compass display.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 339
2. Push the "AUTO" switch to select the number of the zone where the vehicle is located. See the map in figure 3 for zone reference.
3. Start the engine and push the "AUTO" switch for about 9 seconds until "C" appears on the display.
4. Drive the vehicle slowly at 5 mph (8 km/h), or less, in a circle until the direction is displayed. If there is NOT enough space to drive in a circle,
drive around the block until the direction is displayed.
Once the direction is displayed, the calibration is complete.
NOTE
^ Do NOT perform calibration of the compass in a place where the Earth's magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields
(underground parking, under a steel tower, between buildings, roof parking, near a railroad crossing, near a large vehicle, etc.)
^ During calibration, do NOT operate electric systems (moon roof, power windows, etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration.Technical
Service Bulletin # CRIB173 Date: 090401
Paint - Refinishing Information
TITLE: TOPCOAT SAND & POLISH
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 340
SECTION: REFINISH
BULLETIN # 173
MODELS: ALL TOYOTA LEXUS AND SCION
DATE: APRIL 2009
Customers have high expectations for automotive paint finish appearance and expect repairs to match factory color gloss and texture. Flawed refinish
appearance is a cause of concern and will likely have a negative affect on customer satisfaction and retention.
Toyota recognizes the reality of paint finish application in the shop environment. In addition to color matching and blending countermeasures to
remove paint process intrusion (dirt nibs) are necessary to achieve an undetectable finish match. This is also common in manufacturing plants when
process intrusion is encountered. Countermeasures are defined as; ultra-fine sanding to level nibs followed by polishing to a level of gloss and
texture consistent with the original finish. Technicians undertaking these tasks should review applicable technical data sheets for product process and
handling instructions as well as applicable safety information.
Topcoat sand and polish is one of many paint finish repair techniques covered in Toyota T101 and Lexus L101 Paint Finish Repair training. Please
visit for scheduling and registration information.2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0084-08R1 Date: 091014
A/T Serial Number Identification/Locations
L-SB-0084-08
Rev1
August 26, 2008
Automatic Transmission Serial Number Location
Service Category
Drivetrain
Section
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle
Market
USA
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 341
Applicability
TSIB REVISION NOTICE
^ October 14, 2009 Rev1:
^ Applicability has been updated to include 2010 model year vehicles.
Any previous printed versions of this service bulletin should be discarded.
TSIB SUPERSESSION NOTICE
The information contained in this TSIB supersedes TSIB No. TC009-06.
^ Applicability has been updated to include 2008 - 2009 model year vehicles.
TSIB No. TC009-06 is Obsolete and any printed versions should be discarded. Be sure to review the entire content of this service bulletin before
proceeding.
Introduction
The purpose of this TSIB is to assist in the identification and location of serial numbers on 2006 - 2010 model year automatic transmissions.
NOTE
^ When writing a Field Technical and/or Product Report, the serial number MUST be provided.
^ Warranty policy requires shipment of ALL replaced transmissions to AWTEC, even if the transmission is replaced with a new service unit.
^ Warranty policy requires the Core Return Credit Request (CRCR) form be filled out correctly and returned with the core.
^ Per Lexus Warranty Policy & Procedures
^ Whenever a remanufactured or OEM automatic transmission is replaced, the serial number of the failed component must be entered in the
"Transmission Serial Number" field, which can be found on the "Additional Information" tab of the warranty claim.
^ If any non-hybrid OE or remanufactured automatic transaxles/transmissions and/or torque converters inavertently appear on the Scrap
Report, or if the Part Recovery Request Screen "Scrap Field" indicates "Y" DO NOT SCRAP THESE PARTS. All OE and
remanufactured automatic transaxles/transmissions and torque converters are still required to be shipped to AWTEC for remanufacture.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 342
Warranty Information
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 343
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 344
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 345
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 346
Repair Procedure2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0153-08R1 Date: 091013
A/T - Reman A/T Serial Number Location/Identification
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 347
L-SB-0153-08
Rev1
October 29, 2008
Remanufactured Automatic Transmission Serial Number Location
Service Category
Drivetrain
Section
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle
Market
USA
Applicability
TSIB REVISION NOTICE
^ October 13, 2009 Rev1:
Applicability has been updated to include 2010 model year vehicles.
Any previous printed versions of this service bulletin should be discarded.
The information contained in this TSIB supersedes TSIB No. TC010-06.
^ Applicability has been updated to include 2008 - 2009 model year vehicles.
TSIB No. TC010-06 is Obsolete and any printed versions should be discarded. Be sure to review the entire content of this service bulletin before
proceeding.
Introduction
The purpose of this TSIB is to assist in the identification and location of serial numbers on 2006 - 2010 model year remanufactured automatic
transmissions.
NOTE
^ When writing a Field Technical and/or Product Report, the serial number MUST be provided.
^ Warranty policy requires shipment of ALL replaced transmissions to AWTEC, even if the transmission is replaced with a new service unit.
^ Warranty policy requires the Core Return Credit Request (CRCR) form be filled out correctly and returned with the core.
^ Per Lexus Warranty Policy & Procedures
^ Whenever a remanufactured or OEM automatic transmission is replaced, the serial number of the failed component must be entered in the
"Transmission Serial Number" field, which can be found on the "Additional Information" tab of the warranty claim.
^ If any non-hybrid OE or remanufactured automatic transaxles/transmissions and/or torque converters inavertently appear on the Scrap Report,
or if the Part Recovery Request Screen "Scrap Field" indicates "Y", DO NOT SCRAP THESE PARTS. All OE and remanufactured automatic
transaxles/transmissions and torque converters are still required to be shipped to AWTEC for remanufacture.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 348
Warranty Information
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 349
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 350
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 351
Engine/Transmission Reference2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0117-09 Date: 090918
Restraints - Seat Belt Extender Availability
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 352
L-SB-01 17-09
September 18, 2009
Seat Belt Extender
Service
Category Vehicle Interior
Section
Seat Belt
Market
USA
Applicability
Introduction
Lexus customers who find it necessary to increase the length of their seat belts may obtain Seat Belt Extenders at no cost through their local Lexus
dealer.
^ The extender is available in 6-inch, 9-inch, 12-inch, 15-inch, and 18-inch lengths.
^ The extender is available only in black.
^ Owners are informed of the Seat Belt Extender availability through the Lexus Owner's Manual included in each vehicle.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 353
The customer (individual requiring the extender) must visit a Lexus dealership to have the required measurements made and to complete the Seat
Belt Extender Worksheet. The worksheet will allow the proper fitting and selection of a Seat Belt Extender for the customer. The dealership
personnel should then determine the applicable part number and place an order through Dealer Daily.
The dealership service department should complete the Seat Belt Extender Customer Information Label attached to the part and review the "Owner
Instructions" with the customer. The dealership should give a copy of the completed worksheet and Owner Instructions to the customer and keep the
originals in the customer's file. To assure utmost owner satisfaction, it is recommended that dealerships designate one person to coordinate all
activities related to the Seat Belt Extender issue. It is recommended that dealerships do NOT stock Seat Belt Extenders due to the need for proper
fitting to individual customers.
This bulletin contains the following information:
^ Procedure and Sample Label ^ Owner Instructions
^ Application Charts ^ Seat Belt Extender Worksheet
^ Part Number Information
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 354
Warranty Information
Ordering Procedure
1. Dealer verifies the need for a Seat Belt Extender and obtains a current copy of this TSIB and copies the worksheet.
2. Dealer measures the customer and completes the worksheet. Dealer determines the correct part number and places an order for the part through
Dealer Daily.
3. Dealer receives Seat Belt Extender and calls the customer to check the fit of the part.
4. If the Seat Belt Extender fit is good, dealership personnel completes the Customer Information Label attached to the part, explains usage of the
part, and gives the customer a copy of the completed worksheet.
5. Dealer places copy of the completed worksheet in the customer's records.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 355
Front Seat Belt Extender Applications
Rear Seat Belt Extender Applications
The extender must NOT be used for the center rear seat belt except for the LX 570 which uses a K-8 extender.
Part Number Information
Owners Instructions
Failure to follow the recommendations indicated below could result in reduced effectiveness of the seat belt restraint system in case of vehicle
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 356
collision causing personal injury.
If your seat belt cannot be fastened securely because it is not long enough a personalized Seat Belt Extender is available from your Lexus dealer free
of charge.
Please visit your local Lexus dealer so that the dealer can order the proper required length extender.
Bring the heaviest coat you expect to wear for proper measurement and selection of length.
Additional ordering information is available at your Lexus dealer.
When the Seat Belt Extender is provided for rear seat positions (with automatic locking retractor) make sure the retractor is locked when in use.
To connect the extender to the seat belt, insert the tab into the seat belt buckle so that the buckle-release buttons of the extender and the seat belt are
both facing outward as shown in Figure 3.
You will hear a click when the tab locks into the buckle. When not in use, remove the extender and store in the vehicle for future use.
CAUTION
On vehicles equipped with SRS - Occupant Classification System (OCS)*, the extender tab should be buckled into the buckle AFTER the
occupant sits down in the seat.
Leaving extender installed in the buckle before sitting down will cause the OCS to be in the "airbag off" or disarmed state.
*OCS will enable or disable the passenger front and side airbags based on passenger weight and seat belt latch position classifying the passenger as a
child or adult.
CAUTION
When using the Seat Belt Extender, observe the following. Failure to follow these instructions could result in reduced effectiveness of the seat
belt restraint system in case of vehicle accident, increasing the possibility of personal injury.
^ NEVER use the Seat Belt Extender if you can COMFORTABLY fasten the seat belt without it.
^ The Seat Belt Extender must never be used with any child safety seats.
^ Remember that the extender provided for you may not be safe when used on a different vehicle, or for another person or at a different seating
position than the one originally intended for.2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0171-08 Date: 081222
Tire Monitor System - Activation & Initialization
L-SB-0171-08
December 22, 2008
Tire Pressure Warning System Activation & Initialization
Service Category
General
Section
Pre-Delivery Service
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 357
Market
USA
Applicability
Introduction
The 2010 model year RX 350 is equipped with a direct-type Tire Pressure Warning System (TPWS). Each tire (except the spare tire) has a tire
pressure warning valve/sensor that measures tire pressure data. The data is transmitted to the Tire Pressure Warning System antenna/receiver and
then to the Tire Pressure Warning System ECU.
During Pre-Delivery Service (PDS) the tire pressure warning valves/sensors must be activated for Japan-built vehicles by following the activation
procedure in this TSIB. NAP-built vehicles do not require activation but both Japan-built (VINs start with "J") and NAP-built (VINs start with "2")
vehicles require the TPWS to be initialized by following the initialization procedure in this TSIB.
Required Tools & Equipment
^ Additional TIS techstream units may be ordered by calling Approved Dealer Equipment (ADE).
^ The Lexus Diagnostic Tester and CAN Interface Module may also be used to perform the service procedures listed in this bulletin.
Warranty Information
Reference
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 358
^ After cycling the ignition to the "IG-ON" position, the Low Tire Pressure Warning Light will blink until all the tire pressure warning
valves/sensors are activated.
^ The Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) listed below may be stored in the TPWS ECU until the tire pressure warning valves/sensors are activated.
^ The DTCs will automatically clear when the tire pressure warning valves/sensors are activated.
Activation Procedure
ONLY perform the following activation procedure on Japan-built vehicles.
1. Connect TIS techstream.
2. Cycle the ignition switch to the "IG-ON" position and check that the Low Tire Pressure Warning Light blinks.
3. Press or remove the valve core to reduce the tire inflation pressure rapidly by 6 psi (0.4 kgf/sq.cm, 40 kPa), or more, within 30 seconds.
If the tire inflation pressure is NOT reduced by 6 psi (0.4 kgf/sq.cm, 40 kPa), or more, within 30 seconds, the tire pressure warning
valves/sensors will NOT be activated.
NOTE
This operation is required for the system to be activated and MUST be performed for each tire (except the spare tire) one at a time.
4. Check that the Low Tire Pressure Warning Light goes OFF after all the tire pressure warning valves/sensors are activated.
5. Using TIS techstream, check for TPWS DTCs.
^ If NO DTCs are stored, go to step 1 of the Initialization Procedure.
^ If DTCs C2111 - C2114 are stored, repeat step 3. If any other DTCs are stored, refer to the Repair Manual.
NOTE
Perform the following initialization procedure for BOTH NAP-built and Japan-built vehicles.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 359
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the "IG-ON" mode and connect TIS techstream.
2. Adjust all tires (except the spare tire) to the standard tire inflation pressure, as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label located inside
the driver's door jamb and confirm that the Low Tire Pressure Warning Light is OFF.
NOTE
To adjust tire pressure correctly when outside temperature is significantly colder or warmer than shop temperature, please reference the Tire
Inflation Pressure Compensation and Adjustment Service Bulletin (L-SB-0154-08).
NAP-built:
Remove the ID number labels that are attached to each wheel and place the labels in the glove box.
3. Push and hold the Tire Pressure Warning "SET" Switch for 3 seconds until the Low Tire Pressure Warning Light blinks 3 times and then turns
OFF to set the tire pressure initialization.
4. Cycle the ignition switch to the "OFF" position and then to the "IG-ON" position.
It is necessary for the ignition to be in the "IG-ON" mode at LEAST 5 minutes for initialization to complete correctly.
5. Check the tire pressure values of all the tires using TIS techstream.
NOTE
^ It can take 2 - 3 minutes for the tire pressure values to be displayed on the TIS techstream Data List.
^ If the tire pressure values CANNOT be displayed on the TIS techstream screen, the initialization is NOT completed. Repeat steps 2 - 4.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SSC9LE Date: 090817
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 360
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 361
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 362
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 363
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 364
Information
TECHNICAL INSTRUCTIONS
FOR
LIMITED SERVICE CAMPAIGN 9LE
AIR CONDITIONING WIRE HARNESS SUB-ASSEMBLY
2010 RX 350
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 365
II. Identification of Affected Vehicles
A. AFFECTED VIN RANGE
^ Check the TIS Vehicle Inquiry system to conform the VIN is involved in this LSC. This will verify the vehicle is affected and has not already
been completed prior to dealer shipment or by another dealer.
^ TMS warranty will not reimburse dealers for repairs conducted on vehicles that are not affected or were completed by another dealer.
III. Preparation
A. PARTS
B. TOOLS & EQUIPMENT
^ Standard hand tools
^ Techstream scantool
IV. Background and Components
In certain 2010 model year RX 350 vehicles equipped with Vehicle Stability Control (VSC) the engine cooling fans may remain on continuously
and/or the rear brake lights may illuminate after the ignition is turned off with the air conditioner in the on position. If this condition occurs it may
drain the battery. To correct this condition an Air Conditioner Wiring Sub-Harness (shown below in red) will be installed.
V. Work Procedure
1. PRELIMINARY INSPECTION
a) Check for DTCs. If DTCs are present confirm the code(s) view and record the freeze frame data and perform repairs as necessary.
2. CONFIRM THAT THE IGNITION IS OFF
3. REMOVE THE LEFT SIDE ENGINE ROOM COVER
a) Remove the 4 clips and the left side engine room cover.
4. REMOVE THE NO.1 RELAY BLOCK COVER
a) Release the lock and disengage the 2 claws to remove the No. 1 relay block cover.
NOTE:
Take measures to prevent water, etc. from entering the relay block when removing the cover.
5. INSTALL THE AIR CONDITIONING WIRE HARNESS SUB-ASSEMBLY
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 366
a) Disconnect the 22 pin connector as illustrated.
b) Connect the air conditioning wire harness sub-assembly into the location where the 22 pin connector was removed.
c) Reconnect the 22 pin connector to the air conditioning wire harness sub-assembly as illustrated.
NOTE:
After the installation, do not bend the sub-wire harness excessively.
6. REINSTALL THE NO.1 RELAY BLOCK COVER
a) Engage the 2 claws and the lock to reinstall the No.1 relay block cover.
7. REINSTALL THE LEFT SIDE ENGINE ROOM COVER
a) Insert the left side engine room cover into the guide.
b) Reinstall the 4 clips.
8. FINAL INSPECTION
a) Start the vehicle and increase the engine speed to approximately 2,000 RPM and verify the engine operates smoothly.
b) Confirm that no warning lamps in the combination meter are illuminated.
c) Check for DTCs. If DTCs are present confirm the code(s) view and record the freeze frame data and perform repairs as necessary.
d) Confirm normal air conditioner compressor operation.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0177-09 Date: 091125
A/C - Warm Air From Vents With A/C ON/DTC B1479
L-SB-0177-09
November 25, 2009
Warm Air from HVAC Vents with A/C ON - DTC B1479
Service Category
Vehicle Interior
Section
Heating/Air Conditioning
Market
USA
Applicability
Introduction
Some RX 350 vehicles may exhibit a condition where the HVAC system intermittently blows warm air from the vents with the A/C on.
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) B1479 (Flow Sensor Circuit) may be stored in the A/C system as either a Current or History DTC. A
malfunctioning A/C compressor flow sensor may cause this condition.
Follow the procedure in this TSIB to determine if this service bulletin is applicable and to repair the vehicle.
Production Change Information
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 367
This TSIB applies to vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VINs shown.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
APPLICABLE WARRANTY
^ This repair is covered under the Lexus Comprehensive Warranty. This warranty is in effect for 48 months or 50,000 miles, whichever occurs first,
from the vehicle's in-service date.
^ Warranty application is limited to occurrence of the specified condition described in this bulletin.
Required Tools & Equipment
Repair Procedure
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 368
1. Using TIS Techstream check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in the A/C system.
^ If DTC B1479 is stored as a Current or History DTC go to step 2.
^ If DTC B1479 is NOT stored as Current or History this TSIB does NOT apply. Refer to the problem symptoms table of the Repair Manual.
Refer to the Technical Information System (TIS) 2010 model year RX 350 Repair Manual: Vehicle Interior - Heating/Air Conditioning - "Air
Conditioning System/Problem Symptoms Table (to 8/2009)* / (from 8/2009)**
* Japan production vehicles (JTJ)
** NAP vehicles (2T)
2. Using Techstream inspect the flow sensor.
NOTE
The A/C system will store DTC B1479 when a voltage value between 0.7 and 4.2 V is displayed continuously for more than 8.0 minutes.
^ If the flow sensor value does NOT change when switching the A/C system/blower ON and OFF and is stuck between 0.7 and 4.0 V go to step
4.
^ If the flow sensor voltage is normal go to step 3 (wire harness check).
3. Check the harness and connector (A/C compressor flow sensor - A/C amplifier).
A. Disconnect the A/C amplifier connector.
B. Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table.
^ If any of the harness resistance tests fail this TSIB does NOT apply. Repair or replace the harness and go to step 5.
^ If all tests are within specifications proceed to step 4.
4. Remove and replace the A/C compressor.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 369
Refer to TIS 2010 model year RX 350 Repair Manual:
^ Vehicle Interior - Heating/Air Conditioning - "Heating/Air Conditioning: Compressor: Removal (to 8/2009)* / (from 8/2009)**
^ Vehicle Interior - Heating/Air Conditioning - "Heating/Air Conditioning: Compressor: Installation (8/2009)* / (from 8/2009)**
* Japan production vehicles (JTJ)
** NAP vehicles (2T)
5. Clear all DTCs and confirm the A/C system has returned to proper operation.2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0167-09 Date: 091116
Drivetrain - 4WD Towing Precautions
L-SB-0167-09
November 16, 2009
4WD Towing Precautions
Service Category
Drivetrain
Section
Transfer/4wd/Awd
Market
USA
Applicability
Introduction
The only acceptable towing method for vehicles equipped with an Active Torque Control 4WD system is to have all four wheels off the ground. Flat
towing or towing where only the front or rear wheels are supported may damage the all-wheel drive system. Follow the procedures below for proper
towing methods.
Warranty Information
Towing Precautions
NOTICE
To prevent damaging the vehicle when towing:
^ Never tow a vehicle equipped with an Active Torque Control 4WD system with the front or rear wheels on the ground.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 370
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 371
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 372
^ See the Owner's Manual for your specific vehicle to find complete towing instructions.2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0085-08R1
Date: 091020
Engine - Serial Number Locations/Identification
L-SB-0085-08
Rev1
August 28, 2008
Engine Serial Number Location
Service Category
Engine/Hybrid System
Section
Engine Mechanical
Market
USA
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 373
Applicability
TSB REVISION NOTICE
^ October 20, 2009 Rev1:
^ Applicability has been updated to include 2010 model year vehicles. Any previous printed versions of this service bulletin should be
discarded.
Introduction
The purpose of this TSIB is to assist in the identification and location of engine serial numbers on 2000 - 2010 model year Lexus vehicles.
NOTE
When writing a Field Technical and/or Product Report the serial number of the engine MUST be provided.
Warranty Information
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 374
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 375
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 376
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 377
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 378
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 379
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 380
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 381
Identification Procedure2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0109-09R1 Date: 091223
Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0138/P0158 Diagnostic Tips
L-SB-0109-09
Rev1
September 2, 2009
MIL "ON" DTC P0138 and/or P0158 Diagnostic Tips
Service Category
Engine/Hybrid System
Section
Engine Control
Market
USA
Applicability
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 382
TSIB REVISION NOTICE
^ December 23, 2009 Rev1:
^ The Introduction Note has been updated.
Any previous printed versions of this service bulletin should be discarded.
Introduction
Some vehicles may exhibit a MIL "ON" Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0138 and/or P0158 (Oxygen Sensor Circuit High Voltage Bank 1 or 2).
In some instances a P2195 or P2197 (A/F Sensor Signal Stuck Lean) DTC may also be present. This condition may be caused by incorrect Air Fuel
Ratio Sensor response. Additionally, a P0606 (ECM/PCM Processor) DTC may be present due to incorrect Oxygen Sensor operation. The following
repair procedures should be used to properly diagnose and repair this condition.
NOTE
^ Refer to TSIB No. L-SB-0188-09, "Engine Bank 1 and Bank 2 A/F and 02 Identification" before proceeding to confirm diagnostic procedure
is performed on the correct engine bank.
^ Before proceeding, check for any other applicable TSIB(s). Do not apply this diagnostic procedure if there is an existing TSIB for A/F or 02
sensor DTC(s).
Warranty Information
Diagnostic Procedure
For information on checking circuit open, short, or resistance test procedures please refer to the Technical Information System (TIS), applicable
model and model year Repair Manual:
HINT
^ 2007 / 2010 ES 350:
General - Introduction - "How to Troubleshoot ECU Controlled Systems: Electronic Circuit Inspection Procedure"
^ 2008 / 2009 ES 350:
General - Identification - "How to Troubleshoot ECU Controlled Systems: Electronic Circuit Inspection Procedure"
^ 2007 / 2008 / 2009 / 2010 RX 350:
General - Introduction - "How to Troubleshoot ECU Controlled Systems: Electronic Circuit Inspection Procedure"
1. Check all DTCs.
Are DTC(s) other than P0138 or P0158 present?
Yes:
^ P2195 and/or P2197 DTC also present: Go to step 3.
^ P0606 DTC also present: Go to step 4.
No:
^ Go to step 2.
2. Check the A/F and 02 sensor values for the appropriate bank DTC Freeze Frame Data (FFD). Is the AFS Voltage B#S1 = 3.35~3.70V AND the
02S B#S2 = 0.70~0.90V?
Yes:
^ Replace the appropriate bank Air Fuel Ratio Sensor ONLY (NOT 02 Sensor) to correct the P0138 or P0158 DTC condition.
No:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 383
^ Inspect the 02 B#S2 circuit for open short or high resistance. If no trouble is found refer to TIS applicable model and model year Repair
Manual for P0138/P0158 diagnosis:
2007 / 2008 / 2009 / 2010 ES350:
Engine/Hybrid System - Engine Control - SFI System - "2GR-FE Engine Control System: SFI System: Diagnosis System"
^ 2007 / 2008 / 2009 / 2010 (to 08/2009) RX350:
Engine/Hybrid System - Engine Control - SFI System - "2GR-FE Engine Control System: SFI System: Diagnosis System"
3. Inspect Air Fuel Ratio Sensor for the appropriate bank.
Does the Air Fuel Ratio Sensor have an open or short on the A1A+ or A1A- wires?
Yes:
^ Repair the harness and revaluate the Air Fuel Ratio Sensor operation. Confirm the previous DTC(s) do not reset.
No:
^ Replace the applicable bank Air Fuel Ratio Sensor ONLY to correct the P2195/P0138 or P2197/P0158 DTC condition. Test drive the
vehicle to confirm none of the previous DTC(s) reset.
4. Inspect Oxygen Sensor 2 Freeze Frame Data (FFD) values.
Is the 02S B#S2 voltage more than 1.10v and/or the 02S Impedance B#S2 more than 300 ohms when engine is at normal operating temperature?
Yes:
^ Inspect 02 B#S2 circuit for open short or high resistance. If no harness issues are found replace the appropriate bank 02 Sensor ONLY to
correct the P0606 DTC.
No:
^ Follow the Repair Manual diagnostic procedure for P0138/P0158 DTC:
^ 2007 / 2008 / 2009 / 2010 ES 350:
Engine/Hybrid System - Engine Control - SFI System - "2GR-FE Engine Control System: SFI System: Diagnosis System"
2007 / 2008 / 2009 / 2010 (from 08/2009) RX350:
Engine/Hybrid System - Engine Control - SFI System - "2GR-FE Engine Control System: SFI System: Diagnosis System"
If the MIL "ON" condition continues to occur after this procedure, refer to the Repair Manual for further diagnostic procedures and specifications.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0188-09 Date: 091223
Engine Controls - A/F And O2 Sensor Identification
L-SB-0188-09
December 23, 2009
Engine Bank 1 and Bank 2 A/F and 02 Identification
Service Category
Engine/Hybrid System
Section
Engine Control
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 384
Applicability
TSIB SUPERSESSION NOTICE
The information contained in this TSIB supersedes TSIB No. EG015-07.
^ Applicability has been updated to include 2009 - 2010 model year vehicles.
TSIB No. EG015-07 is Obsolete and any printed versions should be discarded. Be sure to review the entire content of this service bulletin before
proceeding.
Introduction
This service bulletin provides information on the proper identification of engine bank 1 and engine bank 2 for correct A/F sensor and oxygen sensor
replacement.
This bulletin contains information that identifies engine bank 1 and engine bank 2 on the following engines:
2GR-FE, 2GR-FSE, 2GR-FXE 3GR-FSE, 4GR-FSE 2JZ-GE, 1MZ-FE, 3MZ-FE, 1UR-FE, 1UR-FSE, 2UR-FSE, 2UR-GSE, 3UR-FE, 1UZ-FE,
2UZ-FE, and 3UZ-FE
^ Bank 1 (B1) refers to the bank that includes cylinder No. 1.
^ Bank 2 (B2) refers to the bank opposite bank 1.
^ Sensor 1 (S1) refers to the sensor that is located before the catalytic converters.
^ Sensor 2 (S2) refers to the sensor that is located after the catalytic converters.
Warranty Information
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 385
Applicable Vehicles
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 386
Engine Bank Identification
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 387
A/F and 02 Sensor Identification2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0012-10 Date: 100127
Body - Water Leak From A-Pillar/MIL ON/A-F Sensor DTC's
L-SB-0012-10
January 27, 2010
Water Intrusion from A-Pillar Seam Sealer
Service Category
Vehicle Exterior
Section
Body Structure
Market
USA
Applicability
Introduction
Some North American produced 2010 model year RX 350 vehicles may exhibit water intrusion from the A-Pillar area that may be accompanied by a
MIL "ON" and one or more Air Fuel Sensor related Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Please use the following repair procedure to address this
condition.
Production Change Information
This TSIB applies to vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VINs shown.
Warranty Information
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 388
APPLICABLE WARRANTY
^ This repair is covered under the Lexus Comprehensive Warranty. This warranty is in effect for 48 months or 50,000 miles, whichever occurs
first, from the vehicle's in-service date.
^ Warranty application is limited to occurrence of the specified condition described in this bulletin.
Parts Information
Required Tools & Equipment
Repair Procedure
1. Confirm the water leak.
Run water over the exterior of the vehicle (near top of windshield) and check interior for water intrusion.
2. Confirm the water leak location.
A. Remove the A-pillar garnish.
2010 RX 350 vehicles with a production date of 07/2009 and earlier [steps 1 - 3]:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 389
(1) Pull the upper part of the garnish toward the inside of the cabin and disengage the 2 clips.
(2) Cut off clip A.
(3) Disengage the 2 guides and remove the front pillar garnish.
2010 RX 350 vehicles with a production date of 08/2009 and later [steps 4 - 6]:
(4) Pull the upper part of the garnish toward the inside of the cabin and disengage the garnish from the base of the 2 clips.
(5) Turn the end of the front pillar garnish clip A 90° with needle-nosed pliers and remove it from the front pillar garnish.
HINT
Tape the tips of the needle-nosed pliers before use.
(6) Disengage the 2 guides and remove the front pillar garnish.
^ Front pillar garnish clips are reusable if they are NOT removed from the vehicle and have NO damage.
^ Replace the front pillar garnish clips with new ones if they are removed from the vehicle.
B. Run water over the roof drip molding area and inspect the interior A-pillar area for water intrusion.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 390
3. If water is present in the interior use a plastic pry tool to disengage the front clip and remove the roof drip side finish molding on the affected
side.
If water is NOT present in the interior continue diagnostics using the repair manual.
4. Clean the affected area using 3M(TM) General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner and apply body seam sealer (3M(TM) Flexiclear or equivalent) to the
concern area.
5. Confirm the repair by running water over the effected area.
6. Reinstall the roof drip side molding making sure to engage the front clip.
7. Reinstall the A-Pillar garnish.
2010 RX 350 vehicles with a production date of 07/2009 and earlier [step A]:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 391
A. Using the NEW front pillar garnish engage the 2 guides and 2 clips and then install the front pillar garnish LH.
2010 RX 350 vehicles with a production date of 08/2009 and later [steps B - E]:
B. Confirm that the front pillar garnish clip is NOT damaged.
NOTICE
^ If there is any damage, replace the garnish clip with a new one.
^ When a garnish clip is being replaced, make sure to install it in the direction shown in the illustration.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 392
C. Engage the 2 guides.
D. Turn the end of the front pillar garnish clip 90 with needle-nosed pliers and install it to the front pillar garnish.
E. Engage the 2 clips to install the front pillar garnish.
8. Inspect the AF2 connector for corrosion and clean/repair as needed.
9. Clear all DTCs and test drive to verify the repairs.
10. If the MIL "ON" condition continues to occur after this procedure, refer to the Repair Manual for further diagnostic procedures and
specifications.2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0018-09R2 Date: 091203
Vehicle - Long Term Storage Guideline
L-SB-0018-09
Rev2
February 23, 2009
Long Term Vehicle Storage Guidelines
Service Category
General
Section
Maintenance
Market
USA
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 393
Applicability
TSIB REVISION NOTICE
December 3, 2009 Rev2:
^ Applicability has been updated to include 2010 HS 250h, GX 460, RX 450h, IS 250C, and IS 350C model years.
Any previous printed versions of this service bulletin should be discarded.
TSIB REVISION NOTICE
March 10, 2009 Rev1:
^ The Parking and Paint Protection, and Battery Procedure has been updated.
^ The Reference and Training Materials section has been updated.
Any previous printed versions of this service bulletin should be discarded.
Introduction
Long-term or off-site storage requires special care to keep vehicles factory fresh and ready for delivery. The following guidelines should be
performed to minimize vehicle component/part degradation due to extended vehicle storage conditions. Long-term storage can affect a vehicle's
systems and components. Any problems that are found should be corrected immediately.
Required Tools & Equipment
Warranty Information
Procedure
Parking and Paint Protection
^ Storage areas should be paved well lit and secure. If your off-site storage lot is not paved spread gravel down to minimize mud and dust. Be sure
vehicles are driven carefully when moving them to or from a long-term lot. This will help minimize damage to the paint finish from road grit or
gravel.
^ Park vehicles from right to left at least three feet apart. Leave enough space front and rear to easily walk between rows.
^ HVAC vent controls should be set to "Recirc" to minimize dust and odor intrusion.
^ Make sure the plastic door edge protectors are in place and fold in the side view mirror (if applicable).
^ Anti-rust covers or anti-rust film should remain on vehicle during storage.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 394
1. Anti-Rust Covers (behind wheel) should be removed at PDS.
2. Anti-Rust Film (applied to wheel) should be removed just prior to customer delivery.
^ Wash vehicles frequently.
Battery
^ Turn off all electrical accessories, make sure windows and sunroof are closed and check that the transmission is in "park" (first or reverse for
manual transmission vehicles). Do not apply the parking brake.
^ Test batteries monthly (more often in high heat or cold areas), using the Digital Battery System Analyzer (P/N 00002-V8150-KIT). Refer to
TSIB PG001-06, "Battery Maintenance for In Stock Vehicles and Pre-Delivery" for complete battery maintenance procedures.
^ To reduce battery drain during long-term storage, remove the battery ground (-) cable of each vehicle and reinstall just before delivery to the
customer. Locate the current PDS TSIB on TIS for complete details.
^ For hybrid vehicle storage, the state of charge (SOC) of it's HV battery and auxiliary battery will gradually decrease. To prevent the auxiliary
battery from becoming discharged during storage, proper maintenance is required. Refer to "Maintenance for HV & Auxiliary Batteries" TSIB's
for procedure and additional information.
Tire Inflation Pressure
If the vehicle is parked for long periods without being moved, a flat spot may develop on each tire surface in contact with the ground, even if the
tires are inflated to specification. Tire inflation pressure should be checked once a month.
Tire inflation pressure for storage only: 45 psi.
Parts Rust
If the vehicles in your storage area are exposed to a sea breeze and/or a significant precipitation, corrosion with rust in some parts may occur.
If rust is found, remove it, and treat it by applying rust inhibitor to prevent recurrence.
Engine Starting and Vehicle Movement
If the vehicle is stored over an extended period of time, starting and running the engine periodically will ensure smooth running operation.
1. Start and operate the engine at an engine speed under 1,500 RPM for 15 minutes or longer. This also eliminates moisture in the exhaust system.
NOTE
Be sure to allow sufficient clearance at the rear of the vehicle to prevent other vehicles stored behind from getting damaged by exhaust gas.
2. Move the vehicle at least 30 feet to lubricate the transmission and differential and prevent tire flat-spot damage.
3. Raise engine speed above 3,000 RPM 10 times to eliminate moisture from the exhaust.
A/C Compressor Lubrication
To minimize the possibility of damage to the A/C compressor while storing a vehicle, perform the following recommended maintenance procedures
at least once a month to lubricate the compressor.
1. Turn off A/C and blower switches prior to starting engine.
2. Start and warm up the engine until engine idle drops below 1,000 rpm.
3. Turn on the A/C system (including the rear A/C) using the following settings:
A. A/C Switch: On
B. Blower Speed: High
C. Engine Speed: Below 1,000 RPM
4. Keep A/C on with engine idling for at least one minute (in dual A/C vehicles leave on for two minutes).
5. Turn off A/C system and stop engine.
Disk Brake Rotor Surface Rust Removal
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 395
The brake rotors are made of cast iron so they may show gradual build-up of surface rust during long term storage. At least once every two months
drive the vehicle and use the brakes normally stopping from about 30 mph at least 20 times. This regular usage will help prevent severe rust build up
and the possibility of unwanted brake vibration concerns due to rust.
Below are items that should be checked periodically and their frequency.
Summary Chart for Long-Term Storage
A combination of proper Vehicle Receipt Pre-Delivery Service and Vehicle Storage is the only way to maintain factory fresh vehicles. Lexus's goal
is to deliver 100% problem-free cars and trucks. With your commitment to quality and customer satisfaction, we can reach that goal. Review this
TSIB often and be sure new employees are aware of the policies and procedures out-lined herein, as individual training in proper inspection,
pre-delivery service, and storage and handling techniques are essential to ensure high delivery quality.
Here is a list of additional resources, which will help you with vehicle receipt, inspection and storage procedures.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 396
Reference and Training Materials
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0179-09 Date: 091202
Ignition System - MIL ON/Multiple Ign. Coil DTC's Set
L-SB-0179-09
December 2, 2009
MIL "ON" DTC P0351, P0352, P0353, P0354, P0355 or P0356
Service Category
Engine/Hybrid System
Section
Engine Control
Market
USA
Applicability
Introduction
Some 2008 - 2009 model year ES 350 and 2008 - 2010 model year RX 350 vehicles may exhibit a MIL "ON" condition with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC) P0351, P0352, P0353, P0354, P0355, or P0356 (Ignition Coil Primary/Secondary Circuit) stored in the Engine Control Module / ECM
(SAE term: Powertrain Control Module/PCM). Use the following repair procedure to address this condition.
Production Change Information
This TSIB applies to vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VINs shown.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 397
Parts Information
Warranty Information
APPLICABLE WARRANTY
^ This repair is covered under the Lexus Comprehensive Warranty. This warranty is in effect for 48 months or 50,000 miles, whichever occurs first,
from the vehicle's in-service date.
^ Warranty application is limited to occurrence of the specified condition described in this bulletin.
Required Tools & Equipment
Repair Procedure
1. Using TIS Techstream confirm one of the following DTCs is present:
^ P0351 - Ignition Coil "A" Primary / Secondary Circuit
^ P0352 - Ignition Coil "B" Primary / Secondary Circuit
^ P0353 - Ignition Coil "C" Primary / Secondary Circuit
^ P0354 - Ignition Coil "D" Primary / Secondary Circuit
^ P0355 - Ignition Coil "E" Primary / Secondary Circuit
^ P0356 - Ignition Coil "F" Primary / Secondary Circuit
2. Inspect the wire harness connectors and power source per Repair Manual procedure.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 398
Refer to the Technical Information System (TIS) applicable model and model year Repair Manual:
3. If NO concerns are noted with the wire harness connectors or power source replace the affected ignition coil.
Refer to TIS applicable model and model year Repair Manual:
4. Test drive the vehicle to confirm the condition has been corrected.2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0039-09R1 Date: 091214
Navigation System - Updates For Various Issues
L-SB-0039-09
Rev1
April 15, 2009
Navigation System Firmware Improvement
Service Category
Audio/Visual/Telematics
Section
Navigation/Multi Info Display
Market
USA
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 399
Applicability
TSIB REVISION NOTICE
^ December14, 2009 Rev1:
^ Applicability has been updated to include additional 2010 models.
^ The Introduction has been updated.
^ The Navigation Program Update Disc is no longer used. TIS is now used to download the software.
Any previous printed versions of this service bulletin should be discarded.
Introduction
NOTE
Do NOT perform a map update until this TSIB has been performed.
Some customers with certain 2010 Lexus models may express concerns about one or more of the following conditions:
^ Steering wheel volume controls are intermittently inoperative.
^ Navigation System region code intermittently will reset to region U59.
^ XM NavTraffic will not function properly after renewing XM traffic subscription.
^ Slow response from Bluetooth address book voice commands.
^ Black screen condition after shifting from reverse to park.
^ Air conditioning screen may not appear when changing blower speed.
^ iPod scrolling speed is slow.
^ Display constantly shows "Calculating" on right side of screen while driving on freeway.
^ Slow response at times from navigation system.
^ GPS coordinates shown instead of destination address.
Navigation firmware has been updated to allow updating map to version 9.1 or later. Updated navigation system software has also been developed to
remedy these conditions. Use the following procedure to address customers' concerns.
Production Change Information
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 400
This TSIB applies to all 2010 GS 460 vehicles with navigation systems and to vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VINs
shown.
Warranty Information
APPLICABLE WARRANTY
^ This repair is covered under the Lexus Comprehensive Warranty. This warranty is in effect for 48 months or 50,000 miles, whichever occurs first,
from the vehicle's in-service date.
^ Warranty application is limited to occurrence of the specified condition described in this bulletin.
NOTE
This should be a labor claim only since navigation software is downloaded from TIS.
Required Tools & Equipment
Repair Procedure
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 401
Loading Map Firmware onto Navigation Update Tool
NOTE
Navigation Update Tool MUST have latest ∟avigation Program Installer" before performing this TSIB. For installation procedure, refer to
TSIB L-SB-0180-09, "HDD Navigation Program Setup".
1. Turn on TIS Techstream.
2. Log into TIS.
3. Download the appropriate "Vehicle Navigation Software Update" from TIS.
A. Click on the TIS tab.
B. Click on the Diagnostics tab.
C. Click on the Tools & Equipment tab.
D. Click on the Navigation Update Tool tab under Tools.
E. Click on the appropriate "Vehicle Navigation Software Update" under Available Software Updates.
NOTE
If the TIS division is NOT set to Lexus (under the My Account area), the Navigation Update Tool tab will NOT display. Navigation Update is a
Lexus ONLY TIS option at this time.
4. Click Open to begin the download.
NOTE
The file is large and may take up to 10 minutes to download.
5. Connect the Navigation Update Tool to the PC using the USB cable.
A. Make sure the USB cable is secured in both the PC and Navigation Update Tool USB ports.
B. Confirm the Navigation Update Tool is powered correctly.
C. Turn the power ON.
D. Click Continue.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 402
6. Verify that both the Transfer Mode Display Light (green) and Power Supply Display Light (blue) are lit then click Continue.
7. The software will perform a connection check with the Navigation Update Tool. In the event an error is shown please recheck the USB
connection.
8. Navigation Firmware is ready to be loaded onto the Navigation Update Tool click Continue.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 403
9. Navigation Firmware will now load onto the Navigation Update Tool.
10. Once the Navigation Firmware is successfully loaded onto the Navigation Update Tool click Continue to finish the installer.
11. Disconnect the navigation tool from the PC.
Loading Map Firmware into Vehicle Navigation System
NOTE
Vehicle ignition should be OFF before starting this procedure.
1. Connect the Navigation Update Tool to the vehicle (Tool MUST be disconnected from the PC)
2. Connect the GR8 battery diagnostic station to the vehicle.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 404
3. Turn the Ignition ON (engine OFF) and wait for the "Caution" screen to appear.
4. Select Show on Map switch.
5. Hold down the Menu button on the Remote Touch interface and turn the light switch from OFF to tail light position 3 or more times until the
navigation system enters the diagnostic mode.
For touch screen vehicles (ES 350, IS 250C/350C, GS 350/450h/460, LX 570, SC 430):
Press the INFO switch and turn the light switch from OFF to tail light position 3 or more times until the navigation system enters the diagnostic
mode.
6. Select the Program Update button from the Service Menu.
7. Select the OK button.
NOTE
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 405
Load time for the program update is between 5 and 15 minutes.
8. When the ECU Selection screen appears, confirm the Current version is less than the New version. If yes, then click the Select button. If no, then
click End and go to step 11.
9. When EMV-M screen is shown select OK
10. After about 1 minute, if the update was successful the display will indicate "Updating complete" at the top of the screen. Select OK to continue.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 406
11. Confirm the Current version matches one of those shown. Select End to complete the procedure.
12. Cycle the ignition OFF to finish the updating procedure.
13. Cycle the ignition ON and confirm normal Navigation System operation.
14. Refer to TIS, Diagnostics, Tools & Equipment tab for the latest navigation Map Update TSIB.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0185-09 Date: 091216
Cell Phone - Poor Bluetooth(R) Landline Sound Quality
L-SB-0185-09
December 16, 2009
Bluetooth System Landline Side Sound Quality Improvement
Service Category
Audio/Visual/Telematics
Section
Cellular Communication
Market
USA
Applicability
Introduction
Some customers may experience a condition when using the Bluetooth hands-free system to make a phone call where the person on the landline side
of the phone call hears static noise or distortion. An updated radio assembly has been developed to address this condition.
Production Change Information
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 407
This TSIB applies to all 2010 SC 430 vehicles and to 2010 vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VINs shown.
NOTE
Only vehicles equipped with navigation Systems have improved radios available.
Warranty Information
APPLICABLE WARRANTY
^ This repair is covered under the Lexus Comprehensive Warranty. This warranty is in effect for 48 months or 50,000 miles, whichever occurs first,
from the vehicle's in-service date.
^ Warranty application is limited to occurrence of the specified condition described in this bulletin.
The radio MUST be ordered through the Pioneer Exchange Program to qualify for warranty coverage.
Required Tools & Equipment
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 408
Parts Information
Repair Procedure
1. Confirm the condition using the customer's mobile phone.
2. Replace the radio assembly.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 409
Refer to the Technical Information System (TIS), applicable model and model year Repair Manual:
3. Pair the customer's mobile phone to the Bluetooth system.
4. Confirm normal Bluetooth system operation including improved sound quality on the landline side.Technical Service Bulletin #
SB0001-10 Date: 100106
Interior/Lighting - Sun Visor Vanity Lamp Flickers
L-SB-001-10
January 6, 2010
Vanity Mirror Light Flicker
Service Category
Vehicle Interior
Section
Lighting (int)
Market
USA
Applicability
Introduction
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 410
Some 2010 model year RX 350 TMMC produced vehicles may exhibit flickering of the sunvisor vanity mirror light. A revised visor assembly has
been developed to address this condition.
Production Change Information
This TSIB applies to vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VINs shown below.
Parts Information
Required Tools & Equipment
Warranty Information
APPLICABLE WARRANTY
^ This repair is covered under the Lexus Comprehensive Warranty. This warranty is in effect for 48 months or 50,000 miles, whichever occurs first~
from the vehicle's in-service date.
Warranty application is limited to occurrence of the specified condition described in this bulletin.
Repair Procedure
1. Fold the visor down.
2. Open the visor mirror door.
3. Confirm the vehicle's visor mirror vanity light exhibits flicker condition.
NOTE
The visor may have to be moved forward and backwards for flicker condition to appear.
4. Replace the visor assembly exhibiting flicker condition.
For removal procedures refer to Technical Information System (TIS) 2010 model year RX 350, Repair Manual:
Vehicle Interior - Interior Panels/Trim - "Roof Headlining; Removal"
5. Confirm successful repair.2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0152-09 Date: 091028
Body - Front Bumper Cover Gaps
L-SB-0152-09
October 28, 2009
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 411
Front Bumper Cover Poor Fit
Service Category
Vehicle Exterior
Section
Exterior Panels/Trim
Market
USA
Applicability
Introduction
Some 2010 model year RX 350 and RX 450h models may exhibit a condition where a gap develops at the left and/or right corners of the front
bumper cover. This condition may occur more frequently in high ambient temperatures. An improved bumper retainer has been developed to correct
this condition. Please follow the procedure in this bulletin to install the improved bumper retainers.
Production Change Information
This TSIB applies to all RX 350 450h vehicles built at TMK and RX 350 vehicles built at TMMC produced BEFORE the Production Change
Effective VINs shown.
Parts Information
Required Tools & Equipment
NOTE
Additional SSTs may be ordered by calling 1-800-933-8335.
Warranty Information
APPLICABLE WARRANTY
^ This repair is covered under the Lexus Comprehensive Warranty. This warranty is in effect for 48 months or 50,000 miles, whichever occurs first,
from the vehicle's in-service date.
^ Warranty application is limited to occurrence of the specified condition described in this bulletin.
TSIB Overview
This TSIB provides an inspection and bumper retainer replacement procedure to correct excessive gaps at the corners of the front bumper.
Repair Procedure
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 412
1. Confirm that the front bumper cover is loose at either the left and/or right side corner(s) below the headlight assembly as shown in Figure 1.
A. If the front bumper cover is loose replace both retainer assemblies and proceed to step 2 of the removal procedure.
B. If the front bumper cover is NOT loose STOP This TSIB does NOT apply.
2. Remove the engine room side cover.
A. Remove the 4 clips.
B. Disengage the guide and remove the engine room side cover.
3. Remove the engine room side cover LH.
A. Remove the 4 clips.
B. Disengage the guide and remove the engine room side cover LH.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 413
4. Remove the 6 clips and cool air intake duct seal.
5. Remove the 2 hood center cushions.
6. Remove the front bumper assembly.
HINT
Use the same procedure for the RH side and LH side.
A. Apply protective tape around the front bumper assembly.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 414
B. Using a screwdriver turn the pins 90 degrees and remove the 2 pin hold clips.
C. Slightly pull the fender liner away and remove the screw and front bumper seal clip.
HINT
Remove the fender liner clip just above the seam for additional access.
NOTICE
Remove the bumper seal clip completely before pulling on the bumper cover to prevent damage.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 415
D. Remove 3 screw style clips on top and 1 lower clip behind the emblem from the front bumper assembly.
E. Remove the 2 center bolts from the bottom of the front bumper assembly.
F. Remove the 2 clips and 2 screws from the bottom of the front bumper assembly.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 416
G. Disengage the 4 claws on each side.
To prevent damage to the front bumper cover; carefully disengage the 4 claws.
H. Using a molding remover disengage the claw under the headlamp.
I. Disconnect the fog light connector.
J. Disconnect the No.1 ultrasonic sensor connector (with Intuitive Parking Assist System).
K. Disconnect the headlight cleaner hose (with Headlight Cleaner System).
Prepare a drain pan in case washer fluid leaks.
L. Remove the front bumper assembly as shown in Figure 14.
NOTE
To ensure the effectiveness of the repail; inspect the bumper cover mounting tabs for any damage or deformation.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 417
7. Remove both the left and right side front bumper retainers and discard.
A. Remove the bolt and screw.
B. Disengage the 2 claws and remove the front bumper side retainer for both left and right side.
8. Cut the ridge from the forward clip on the NEW REPLACEMENT retainer as shown in Figures 16 and 17. Cut the shaded area with a knife so it
is even with the clip.
9. Install the NEW left and right side front bumper retainers.
A. Engage the 2 claws.
B. Install the bolt and screw.
10. Install the front bumper cover in the reverse order of removal.
For front bumper cover installation instructions refer to the Technical Information System (TIS) applicable model and model year Repair
Manual:
^ 2010 RX 350:
Vehicle Exterior - Exterior Panels/Trim - "Exterior Panels/Trim: Front Bumper: Installation"
^ 2010 RX 450h:
Vehicle Exterior - Exterior Panels/Trim - "Exterior Panels/Trim: Front Bumper:Installation"2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0015-10
Date: 100204
Engine Controls - Techstream(R) ECU Re-Flash Procedure
L-SB-0015-10
February 4, 2010
Techstream ECU Flash Reprogramming Procedure
Service Category
Engine/Hybrid System
Section
Engine Control
Market
USA
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 418
Applicability
TSIB SUPERSESSION NOTICE
The information contained in this TSIB supersedes TSIB No. SS002-07.
^ Applicability has been updated to include 2009 - 2011 model year Lexus vehicles.
^ A new section, Techstream Preparation, has been added.
^ Techstream Lite has been added as an option in Required Tools & Materials.
^ Process Overview and Operation Procedure sections have been updated.
TSIB No. SS002-07 is Obsolete and any printed versions should be discarded. Be sure to review the entire content of this service bulletin before
proceeding.
Introduction
Flash reprogramming allows the ECU software to be updated without replacing the ECU. Flash calibration updates for specific vehicle models/ECUs
are released as field-fix procedures described in individual service bulletins. This bulletin details the Techstream ECU flash reprogramming process
and outlines use of the Technical Information System (TIS) and the Calibration Update Wizard (CUW). Flash calibration updates can only be
applied to the vehicle/ECU combination for which they are intended. ECUs have internal security that will not allow them to be programmed with
another ECU's information.
ECU
Electronic Control Unit (ECU) is a Lexus term used to describe integrated computerized devices responsible for managing the operation of a system
or subsystem. For the purposes of this bulletin, the term "ECU" is used as a generic label for the following SAE J1930 standard references:
^ Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
^ Engine Control Module (ECM)
^ Transmission Control Module (TCM) Or any other Lexus specific control unit
Warranty Information
Parts Information
Authorized Modification Labels may be ordered in packages of 25 from the Materials Distribution Center (MDC) through Dealer Daily - Dealer
Support Materials Orders.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 419
Required Tools & Equipment
NOTE
Additional SSTs may be ordered by calling 1-800-933-8335.
Process Overview
Techstream ECU flash reprogramming is a 4-step process:
1. Verify the vehicle's applicability for recalibration and locate desired calibration file by performing the Techstream Health Check function.
Techstream will automatically search TIS for the appropriate service bulletin using the current Calibration ID from the vehicle. Calibration file
links can be found embedded in the corresponding service bulletin.
2. Connect the GR8 Battery Diagnostic Station using "Power Supply Mode" only.
The GR8 Battery Diagnostic Station includes a Power Supply Mode to help maintain battery voltage at 13.5 volts during ECU reprogramming.
NOTICE
ECU damage may occur if the correct battery charger mode setting is NOT used.
3. Locate appropriate calibration ID and reprogram the vehicle ECU with Techstream.
Techstream uses the Calibration Update Wizard (CUW) application to open calibration files and facilitate the ECU flash reprogramming
process.
4. Attach the Authorized Vehicle Modification Label.
Modifications to ECU calibrations MUST be recorded and properly displayed on the vehicle using the Authorized Modification Label.
Techstream Preparation
Selecting the TIS Techstream VIM or the Mongoose MFC VIM.
Techstream software requires a VIM selection before you can use the Mongoose MFC VIM.
If using TIS Techstream no changes are needed.
Perform the following:
1. Select Setup from the Techstream Main Menu screen.
2. Select VIM Select from the Setup drop down menu.
3. Select the correct Interface Setup from the drop down list.
If using Techstream Lite select Mongoose MFC.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 420
NOTE
Mongoose MFC Software and Driver MUST be installed before Mongoose MFC selection will be available.
See TIS - Diagnostics - Scantool page for additional information.
If using TIS Techstream select TIS Techstream VIM (this is the default).
4. Click OK.
Operation Procedure
1. Verify the vehicle's applicability for recalibration and locate desired calibration file.
A. Connect Techstream and establish a vehicle connection.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 421
B. Click the Health Check button on the System Select tab.
C. Choose desired ECU group(s) in the Health Check dialog box.
D. Click Next.
E. Click Continue to view Health Check results.
F. Available calibration updates are indicated by a link in the Cal. Update? column. Click the Yes link to access the appropriate service bulletin
on TIS.
NOTE
^ Note any DTCs stored in Systems that will be flash reprogrammed.
^ Clicking the yes link will automatically launch TIS and perform a calibration search.
G. Log in to TIS. (If already logged in skip this step.)
H. To review the TSIB and access the calibration file click the service bulletin link in the Document Title column of the Calibration Search
Result portlet.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 422
NOTE
Only Lexus Certified Technicians and above may access calibration files.
2. Connect the GR8 Battery Diagnostic Station.
A. Connect the GR8 Battery Diagnostic Station to the vehicle and turn it ON.
B. Select Power Supply Mode by following the screen flow below.
NOTICE
^ ECU damage may occur if the correct battery charger and mode setting are NOT used.
^ Power Supply Mode is used to maintain battery voltage at 13.5 volts while flash reprogramming the vehicle.
^ For details on how to use the GR8 Battery Diagnostic Station, refer to the GR8 Instruction Manual located on TIS, Diagnostics -
Tools & Equipment - Battery Diagnostics.
3. Click the appropriate calibration ID and reprogram the vehicle's ECU with Techstream.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 423
A. After reviewing the procedures outlined in the selected TSIB, click the appropriate calibration ID link by matching the vehicle's current
calibration ID to the Previous Calibration ID in the Calibration Identification Chart.
NOTE
^ Calibration files are embedded as live links in the service bulletin.
Some vehicles require special preparation - please review the selected TSIB carefully.
B. Click Open to load calibration file information.
NOTE
Techstream pulls calibration files as needed to ensure the latest calibration file is used. Do NOT save calibrations locally on the hard
drive or other media.
NOTICE
Errors during the flash reprogramming process can permanently damage the vehicle ECU.
Minimize the risk by following the steps below.
^ Battery voltage MUST NOT FALL BELOW 11.4 volts during reprogramming. Confirm battery voltage is higher than 11.4 volts, but be sure
voltage DOES NOT RISE ABOVE 16.0 volts during reprogramming.
^ Turn OFF all vehicle accessories (e.g. audio system, A/C, interior lights, DRL, etc.). Do NOT add to or significantly change the vehicle's
electrical load while reprogramming.
^ Confirm the hood is open and ensure under hood temperature does NOT exceed 158°F (70°C).
^ Confirm cable connections between the vehicle and Techstream are secure.
^ Do NOT disconnect or turn off Techstream or vehicle ignition during reprogramming.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 424
^ Set parking brake.
^ Complete ALL flash calibration updates provided for each ECU.
^ If the battery's state of charge or capacity are in question, test with SST. No. 00002-V8150KIT "Digital Battery Analyzer," and follow TSIB
No. PG001-06, "Battery Maintenance for In-Stock Vehicles & Pre-Delivery", or the appropriate "Maintenance for HV & Auxiliary
Batteries" service bulletin.
^ The GR8 Battery Diagnostic Station MUST be used in Power Supply Mode to maintain battery voltage at 13.5 volts while flash
reprogramming the vehicle. For details on how to use the GR8 Battery Diagnostic Station, refer to the GR8 Instruction Manual located on
TIS, Diagnostics - Tools & Equipment - Battery Diagnostics.
C. Click Next to start the calibration update process.
D. When using TIS Techstream select Techstream VIM as the desired programming device. Then click Next.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 425
When using Techstream Lite, select Generic J2534 Interface. Then click Next.
E. Confirm the following:
^ PC is connected to VIM.
^ VIM is connected to DLC3 connector.
^ Ignition is ON and engine is OFF or "READY" OFF (hybrid vehicles). Then click Next.
F. Verify correct current calibration and new calibration information. Then click Next.
NOTE
^ The total number of calibration IDs in the calibration file corresponds to the number of reprogrammable processors in the ECU.
^ Each calibration file may contain up to three separate calibrations.
^ Figure 17 shows an example of the update procedure for a two-processor ECU.
G. Turn ignition OFF. Then click Next.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 426
H. Confirm the following:
^ Ignition is ON and engine is OFF or "READY" OFF (hybrid vehicles).
^ Hood is open.
^ All accessories are OFF.
^ Battery voltage is above 11.4 volts.
NOTICE
Verify the vehicle is connected to a battery charger before continuing - If battery voltage falls below 11.4 volts, ECU damage may
occur.
Then click Start.
NOTE
If the key is NOT done properly, reprogramming will stop at 10% and Cal 1 will fail to load.
I. Do NOT disturb the vehicle during flash reprogramming.
NOTE
^ ECU flash reprogramming may take anywhere from 3 - 30 minutes per calibration file.
^ Reprogramming time will vary depending on model and ECU communication protocol. Vehicles using CAN communication protocol
will reprogram much faster (2 - 7 minutes).
NOTE
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 427
^ If vehicle requires only ONE calibration update, then proceed to step N in this bulletin.
^ If vehicle requires a SECOND calibration update, then continue as follows:
^ For serial communication vehicles, go to step J. For CAN communication vehicles, go to step L.
J. When Cal 1 has completed the update process turn ignition OFF for a minimum of 10 seconds. Then click Next.
K. Turn ignition to the ON position. Then click Start.
NOTE
If key cycle is NOT done properly, reprogramming will stop at 10% and Cal 2 will fail to load.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 428
L. Do NOT disturb the vehicle during flash reprogramming.
M. Turn ignition OFF for a minimum of 10 seconds. Then click Next.
N. Turn ignition to the ON position. Then click Next.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 429
0. Confirm all calibrations were updated as specified in the service bulletin. Then click Finish.
NOTE
On some models, DTCs may set as a result of reprogramming. If DTCs are present, clear codes and run the Health Check again.
Troubleshoot any remaining Current, Pending, or History codes. Permanent codes will not be cleared using Techstream. Permanent codes
do not illuminate the MIL and do not require troubleshooting. They will clear during normal driving once the Universal Trip Drive
Pattern is performed.
4. Attach the Authorized Modifications Label.
A. Using a permanent marker or ball point pen complete the Authorized Modifications Label and attach to the vehicle. The Authorized
Modifications Label is available through the MDC P/N 00451-00001-LBL.
B. Attach the label under the hood in the location determined by the specific TSIB or Campaign.
NOTE
Wait 60 - 90 seconds for ink to set before handling.2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0023-10 Date: 100319
Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's P0138 And P0607 Set
L-SB-0023-10
March 19, 2010
MIL "ON" DTC P0138 and P0607
Service Category
Engine/Hybrid System
Section
Engine Control
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 430
Market
USA
Applicability
Introduction
Some North American produced 2010 model year RX 350 vehicles may exhibit a MIL "ON" condition with the following Diagnostic Trouble Codes
(DTCs) stored in the Engine Control Module/ECM (SAE term: Powertrain Control Module/PCM).
^ P0138 - Oxygen Sensor Circuit High Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
^ P0607 - Control Module Performance
Use the following repair procedure to address this condition.
Production Change Information
This TSIB applies to vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VINs shown.
Warranty Information
Required Tools & Equipment
NOTE
Additional TIS Techstream or Techstream Lite units may be ordered by calling Approved Dealer Equipment (ADE).
Repair Procedure
1. Using TIS Techstream confirm DTCs P0138 and P0607 are present.
2. Inspect connector AF2 for any signs of corrosion or moisture intrusion.
^ If any concerns are noted with connector AF2 refer to TSIB L-SB-0012-10, "Water Intrusion from A-Pillar Seam Sealer for the appropriate
repair procedure.
^ If NO concerns are noted with connector AF2 refer to TSIB L-SB-0109-09, "MIL 'ON' DTC P0138 and/or P0158 Diagnostic Tips" for
further diagnostic information.
3. After the repair is completed clear all DTCs and test drive the vehicle to confirm the condition has been corrected.Technical Service
Bulletin # SB0025-10 Date: 100401
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 431
Body - Roof Rack Cross Bar Installation Position
L-SB-0025-10
April 1, 2010
Roof Rack Crossbar Installation Position
Service Category
Vehicle Exterior
Section
Exterior Panels/Trim
Market
USA
Applicability
Introduction
To prevent the creation of excessive wind noise condition due to improper positioning the position of the roof rack crossbars during PPO/DIO
installation has been standardized. Please follow the instructions in this bulletin to ensure proper positioning of the roof rack crossbars.
Parts Information
Warranty Information
Installation Procedure
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 432
Install the front crossbar in the most forward position just touching the front stopper and install the rear crossbar in the most rearward position just
touching the rear stopper. Updated installation instructions are posted on the Technical Information System (TIS).
Refer to TIS 2010 model year RX 350/ RX 450h Accessory - Accessories Installation - "2010 RX350/450h Crossbar PT278-48105 Rev. D"
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0031-09R1 Date: 100318
Remote Starting System - Cold Weather Operation
L-SB-0031-09
Rev1
March 24, 2009
Remote Engine Starter (RES) Cold Temperature Operation Diagnostic Tips
Service Category
Engine/Hybrid System
Section
Starting
Market
USA
Applicability
TSB REVISION NOTICE
March 18, 2010 Rev1:
^ Applicability has been updated to include 2010 model year GX 460, HS 250h, LX 570, and RX 450h vehicles.
Any previous printed versions of this service bulletin should be discarded.
Introduction
Some vehicles operated in extremely cold temperatures may exhibit a condition where the Remote Engine Starter (RES) does not function.
Before RES diagnosis confirm with the customer the ambient temperature when the malfunction was experienced.
The RES system was designed to operate at temperatures above -22 F (-30 C). Non-operation of the RES system below this threshold should be
considered a normal condition.
Warranty Information
Diagnostic Procedure
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 433
If the customer has experienced a RES malfunction above -22 F (-30 C) proceed with diagnosis referencing the applicable troubleshooting guide in
the Technical Information System (TIS) Accessory tab Accessory Diagnostic Guide:2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0173-08R2 Date:
090708
Interior - Floor Mat Installation/Precautions
L-SB-0173-08
Rev2
December 23, 2008
Floor Mat Installation During PDS
Service Category
General
Section
Pre-Delivery Service
Market
USA
Applicability
TSIB REVISION NOTICE
July 8, 2009 Rev2:
^ Applicability has been updated to include 2010 HS 250H.
March 23, 2009 Rev1:
^ Applicability has been updated to include 2010 RX 450H.
Any previous printed versions of this service bulletin should be discarded.
Introduction
2010 model year Lexus vehicles are equipped with driver's side floor mat retaining clips to help ensure the floor mat stays in the correct position. In
addition, some models may utilize retaining clips for passenger side floor mats as well. Attach the driver's side and passenger's side (if applicable)
floor mat to the vehicle carpet using the floor mat retaining clips during Pre-Delivery Service (PDS).
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 434
CAUTION
Warranty Information
Installation Procedure
Attach the driver and passenger side (if applicable) floor mats to the vehicle carpet using the clips. Secure the mat by inserting the retaining clips
through the grommet holes.2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0014-10R1 Date: 100209
Body - Front Door Window Wind Noise
L-SB-0014-10
Rev1
February 4, 2010
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 435
Wind Noise from Front Side Glass
Service Category
Vehicle Exterior
Section
Window/Glass
Market
USA
Applicability
TSB REVISION NOTICE
February 9, 2010 Rev1:
Production Change Information has been updated.
Any previous printed versions of this service bulletin should be discarded.
Introduction
Some 2010 RX 350 vehicles may exhibit a wind turbulence noise condition noticeable from the front side window area. This condition is most
notable at highway speeds. New acoustic glass is available to improve this condition.
This TSIB addresses unusual interior noise that may be present in some vehicles, by carefully following the instructions in this TSIB, noise levels
may be improved. Customers should be made aware that some level of wind turbulence noise, especially in cross wind conditions, is present in all
vehicles. A vehicle, such as the RX 350, which is one of the quietest vehicles in its segment today, may tend to draw attention to normal wind
turbulence or rushing sounds because of the relative absence of other ambient noises.
Production Change Information
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 436
Parts Information
Warranty Information
APPLICABLE WARRANTY
^ This repair is covered under the Lexus Comprehensive Warranty. This warranty is in effect for 48 months or 50,000 miles, whichever occurs
first, from the vehicle's in-service date.
^ Warranty application is limited to occurrence of the specified condition described in this bulletin.
Required Tools & Equipment
Repair Procedure
Use the same procedure for the left and right sides of the vehicle as needed.
1. Confirm front side windows are the source of wind turbulence noise.
A. If noise is verified proceed to step 2 - Remove the side window glass.
B. If noise is NOT confirmed from the side window STOP The source of the noise may be coming from a different location. This TSIB does
NOT apply. Diagnose the source of the wind turbulence noise and repair as needed.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 437
2. Remove the side window glass.
For side window glass removal instructions refer to the Technical Information System (TIS) applicable model and model year Repair Manual:
^ 2010 model year RX 350 (To 08/2009):
Vehicle Exterior - Door/Hatch - "Front Door: Disassembly"
^ 2010 model year RX 350 (From 08/2009):
Vehicle Exterior - Door/Hatch - "Front Door: Disassembly"
3. Replace the front side window glass.
For side window glass installation instructions refer to the Technical Information System (TIS) applicable model and model year Repair Manual:
^ 2010 model year RX 350 (To 08/2009)
Vehicle Exterior - Door/Hatch - "Front Door: Reassembly"
^ 2010 model year RX 350 (From 08/2009)
Vehicle Exterior - Door/Hatch - "Front Door: Reassembly"
4. Install window labels in correct position.
A. Use household glass cleaner to clean the inside of the front door windows.
B. Use a piece of clear tape to lift the label from the protective backing.
C. Attach the label as shown in Figure 1.
D. Repeat steps A-C with the other window
NOTICE
Do not touch the adhesive surface of the label(s).
NOTE
Compare original glass to new glass to make sure labels match.
5. Glass Breakage Sensor Calibration if applicable.
A. For vehicles equipped with a Glass Breakage Sensor the sensor position and/or system sensitivity will need to be calibrated for the new glass.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 438
B. Determine if the Glass Breakage Sensor was installed at the Factory or as a Post Production Option (PPO)/Dealer Installed Option (DIO).
C. If Factory Installed follow the PPO/DIO Glass Breakage Sensor Accessory Installation Procedure in TIS to adjust GBS system sensitivity for
acoustic glass.
D. If PPO/DIO follow the PPO/DIO Glass Breakage Sensor Accessory Installation Procedure in TIS to adjust GBS system sensitivity and
relocate the GBS microphone for acoustic glass.
NOTE
System Sensitivity should be set to 9.
6. Confirm that noise has been reduced.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0028-09R2 Date: 100415
Engine - Ticking Noises/MIL ON/Multiple VVTi DTC's Set
L-SB-0028-09
Rev2
March 19, 2009
Engine Ticking Noise and/or MIL "ON" P0014, P0015, P0024, P0025, P0017, or P0018
Service Category
Engine/Hybrid System
Section
Engine Mechanical
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 439
Market
USA
Applicability
TSB REVISION NOTICE
April 15, 2010 Rev2:
^ Warranty Information has been updated (Combo C).
^ Parts Information has been updated (Oil Filter Element Kit).
June 15, 2009 Rev1:
^ An important statement has been added to the Introduction - PLEASE READ.
^ Applicability, Warranty Information, and Repair Procedure sections have been updated to include 2010 model year RX 350.
^ Production Change Information with VIN breaks has been added.
^ Parts Information has been updated.
Any previous printed versions of this service bulletin should be discarded.
Introduction
It is mandatory that the VVT-i gear actuator bolts, actuator center section alignment, and actuator body be inspected BEFORE performing this TSIB.
If no concerns are noted with these parts, this TSIB does NOT apply.
Some 2007 - 2009 model year ES 350 and 2007 - 2010 model year RX 350 vehicles may exhibit a ticking/clicking type noise from the cylinder head
cover area that may be accompanied by a MIL "ON" and one or more VVT-i related Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Please use the following
repair procedure to address customer concerns.
Production Change Information
This TSIB applies to vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VINs shown.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 440
Warranty Information
APPLICABLE WARRANTY
^ This repair is covered under the Lexus Powertrain Warranty. This warranty is in effect for 72 months or 70,000 miles, whichever occurs first,
from the vehicle's in-service date.
^ Warranty application is limited to occurrence of the specified condition described in this bulletin.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 441
Parts Information
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 442
Required Tools & Equipment
Inspection Procedure
1. Start the engine and listen for any ticking/clicking type noises coming from the VVT-i gear area of the engine.
NOTE
This condition may or may not be accompanied by one or more of the following DTCs stored in the Engine Control Module (ECM) (SAE
term: Powertrain Control Module/PCM):
^ P0014: Camshaft Position "B" - Timing Advanced or System Performance (Bank 1)
^ P0015: Camshaft Position "B" Timing Over Retarded (Bank 1)
^ P0017: Crankshaft Position Camshaft Position Correlation (Bank / Sensor B)
^ P0018: Crankshaft Position Camshaft Position Correlation (Bank 2 Sensor A)
^ P0024: Camshaft Position "B" - Timing Over-Advanced or System Performance (Bank 2)
^ P0025: Camshaft Position "B" - Timing Over-Retarded (Bank 2)
2. Remove the cylinder head cover and inspect the exhaust VVT-i gear assembly on the affected cylinder bank.
NOTE
If NO concerns are found with the WT-i gear actuator bolts, the actuator center section alignment, or actuator body, this TSIB does NOT apply.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 443
Refer to Repair Manual procedures for further diagnosis.
Repair Procedure
1. If any concerns are noted with the Exhaust VVT-i gear bolts or actuator follow the four steps below:
A. Replace the camshaft housing sub-assembly exhaust camshaft and exhaust VVT-i gear assembly on the affected bank.
B. Inspect the intake VVT-i gear assembly and bolts on the affected bank. Replace the Intake VVT-i gear assembly if necessary.
C. Inspect the opposite bank exhaust VVT-i gear actuator and bolts. If any concerns are noted replace the opposite bank camshaft housing
sub-assembly exhaust camshaft and exhaust VVT-i gear assembly.
D. Inspect the opposite bank intake VVT-i gear actuator assembly and bolts. Replace the intake VVT-i gear assembly if necessary.
For complete disassembly procedures refer to the Technical Information System (TIS) applicable model and model year Repair Manual:
^ 2007 / 2008 / 2009 ES 350 Engine/Hybrid System - Engine Mechanical - "2GR-FE Engine Mechanical: Engine Unit: Disassembly"
^ 2007 / 2008 / 2009 / 2010 RX 350 Engine/Hybrid System - Engine Mechanical - "2GR-FE Engine Mechanical: Engine Unit: Disassembly"
For complete reassembly procedures refer to TIS applicable model and model year Repair Manual:
^ 2007 / 2008 / 2009 ES 350 Engine/Hybrid System - Engine Mechanical - "2GR-FE Engine Mechanical: Engine Unit: Reassembly"
^ 2007 / 2008 / 2009 / 2010 RX 350 Engine/Hybrid System - Engine Mechanical - "2GR-FE Engine Mechanical: Engine Unit: Reassembly"
2. Start the engine and test drive to verify the repair.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0039-10 Date: 100616
Body - Poor Rear Bumper Cover Fit
L-SB-0039-10
June 16, 2010
Rear Bumper Cover Poor Fit
Service Category
Vehicle Exterior
Section
Exterior Panels/Trim
Market
USA
Applicability
Introduction
Some 2010 model year RX 350 and RX 450h models may exhibit a condition where a gap develops at the left and/or right corners of the rear
bumper cover. This condition may occur more frequently in high ambient temperatures. An improved bumper cover and support have been
developed to correct this condition. Follow the procedure in this bulletin to install the improved bumper cover and supports.
Production Change Information
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 444
This TSIB applies to vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VINs shown.
Parts Information
Required Tools & Equipment
Warranty Information
^ This repair is covered under the Lexus Comprehensive Warranty. This warranty is in effect for 48 months or 50,000 miles, whichever occurs
first, from the vehicle's in-service date.
^ Warranty application is limited to occurrence of the specified condition described in this bulletin.
Sublet should only be used for claiming preparation and painting of rear bumper cover.
TSIB Overview
This TSIB provides an inspection and rear bumper cover replacement procedure to correct excessive gaps at the corners of the rear bumper.
Repair Procedure
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 445
1. Confirm that the rear bumper cover is loose at either the left and/or right side corner(s) below the taillight assembly as shown in Figure 1.
A. If the rear bumper cover is loose proceed to step 2 of the procedure.
B. If the rear bumper cover is NOT loose STOP This TSIB does NOT apply.
2. Remove No.2 luggage compartment side cover protector.
A. Remove the 2 screws and grommet.
B. Remove the 4 screws 2 Bolts and 3 Clips.
C. Disengage the 2 claws and remove the No.2 luggage compartment side cover protector.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 446
3. Remove the No. 1 luggage compartment side cover protector.
A. Remove the 2 bolts and 2 screws.
B. Remove the 2 clips and No. 1 luggage compartment side cover protector.
4. Remove rear bumper assembly.
A. Put protective tape around the rear bumper assembly.
B. Using a clip remover remove the 2 clips.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 447
C. Remove the 2 screws and 2 rear bumper upper stoppers.
D. Remove the screw.
Use the same procedure for the RH side and LH side.
E. Disengage the 7 claws.
Use the same procedure for the RH side and LH side.
F. Disconnect the No.3 luggage room wire harness connector.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 448
G. Disengage the 4 claws and 4 guides and remove the rear bumper assembly as shown in the illustration.
5. Remove both the left and right side rear bumper supports and discard.
A. Remove the 2 screws.
B. Disengage the 2 claws and remove the rear bumper side supports and discard.
6. Send the vehicle to the body shop for painting and finishing of the new bumper cover. Refer to the Technical Information System (TIS) and the
following manuals:
^ Lexus Fundamental Body Repair Procedures manual
^ Complete set of Lexus Collision Repair manuals
7. Transfer components from original bumper cover to new bumper cover please refer to TIS for procedure.
^ 2010 RX 350 vehicles with a production date of 07/2009 and earlier
Vehicle Exterior - Exterior Panels/Trim - "Rear Bumper: Disassembly / Reassembly"
^ 2010 RX 350 vehicles with a production date of 08/2009 and later
Vehicle Exterior - Exterior Panels/Trim - "Rear Bumper: Disassembly / Reassembly
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 449
8. Install the New left and right side rear bumper supports.
A. Engage the 2 claws.
B. Install the rear bumper side support LH with the 2 screws.
Torque: 7.5 N*m (77 kgf*cm, 66 in*lbf)
HINT
Use the same procedure for the RH side and LH side.
9. Install rear bumper assembly.
A. Connect the No.3 luggage room wire harness connector.
B. Engage the 4 claws and 4 guides and install the rear bumper assembly as shown in the illustration.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 450
C. Engage the 7 claws.
HINT
Use the same procedure for the RH side and LH side.
D. Install the screw.
Torque: 2.5 N*m (26 kgf*cm, 22 in*lbf)
Use the same procedure for the RH side and LH side.
E. Engage the 2 rear bumper upper stoppers and install the 2 screws.
Torque: 7.5 N*m (77 kgf*cm, 66 in*lbf)
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 451
F. Install the 2 clips.
10. Confirm fit and finish of rear bumper cover.2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0032-10 Date: 100520
Engine Controls - MIL ON/Multiple O2 Sensor DTC's Set
L-SB-0032-10
May 20, 2010
MIL "ON" DTC P2195, P2197, P0138, P0158, P0031, or P0051
Service Category
Engine/Hybrid System
Section
Engine Control
Market
USA
Applicability
Introduction
Some 2010 model year RX 350 vehicles may exhibit a MIL "ON" condition with one or more of the following Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)
stored in the Engine Control Module/ECM (SAE term:
Powertrain Control Module/PCM):
^ P2195 - Oxygen (A/F) Sensor Signal Stuck Lean (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
^ P2197 - Oxygen (A/F) Sensor Signal Stuck Lean (Bank 2 Sensor 1)
^ P0138 - Oxygen Sensor Circuit High Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
^ P0158 - Oxygen Sensor Circuit High Voltage (Bank 2 Sensor 2)
^ P0031 - Oxygen (A/F) Sensor Heater Control Circuit Low (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
^ P0051 - Oxygen (A/F) Sensor Heater Control Circuit Low (Bank 2 Sensor 1)
Use the following repair procedure to address this condition.
Production Change Information
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 452
This TSIB applies to vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VINs shown.
Warranty Information
^ This repair is covered under the Lexus Federal Emission Warranty. This warranty is in effect for 48 months or 50,000 miles, whichever occurs
first, from the vehicle's in-service date.
^ Warranty application is limited to occurrence of the specified condition described in this bulletin.
Parts Information
Required Tools & Equipment
Additional TIS Techstream or Techstream Lite units may be ordered by calling Approved Dealer Equipment (ADE).
Repair Procedure
1. Using TIS Techstream verify DTC P2195 P2197 P0138 P0158 P0031 or P0051 are present.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 453
2. Follow the procedure outlined in TSIB L-SB-0109-09, "MIL 'ON' DTC P0138 and/or P0158 Diagnostic Tips" to inspect the appropriate A/F and
02 sensor and circuit.
3. If the A/F sensor requires replacement, follow the procedure in the Repair Manual.
Refer to the Technical Information System (TIS), 2010 model year RX 350 Repair Manual:
4. Clear DTCs.
5. Test drive the vehicle to confirm the condition has been corrected.2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0034-10 Date: 100526
Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P0456 Set
L-SB-0034-10
May 26, 2010
MIL "ON" Code P0456
Service Category
Engine/Hybrid System
Section
Engine Control
Market
USA
Applicability
Introduction
Some 2010 model year RX 350 vehicles may exhibit a MIL "ON" condition with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0456 stored in the Engine
Control Module or ECM (SAE term: Powertrain Control Module/PCM). Use the following repair procedure to address this condition.
Production Change Information
This TSIB applies to vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VINs shown.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 454
Parts Information
Warranty Information
APPLICABLE WARRANTY
^ This repair is covered under the Lexus Federal Emission Warranty. This warranty is in effect for 48 months or 50,000 miles, whichever occurs
first, from the vehicle's in-service date.
^ For California specification vehicles sold, registered, and operated in California, Connecticut, Maine, Massachusetts, New Jersey, Oregon,
Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, Vermont, and Washington, the charcoal canister is covered under the California Emission Warranty.
^ This warranty is in effect for 84 months or 70,000 miles, whichever occurs first, from the vehicle's in-service date.
^ Warranty application is limited to occurrence of the specified condition described in this bulletin.
Required Tools & Equipment
NOTE
Additional TIS Techstream units may be ordered by calling Approved Dealer Equipment (ADE).
Repair Procedure
1. Using TIS Techstream clear any stored DTCs.
2. Using TIS Techstream perform the EVAP System Check to confirm DTC P0456 - Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected (Very
Small Leak) is pending.
3. Refer to the Technical Information System (TIS):
^ 2010 RX 350: 2GR-FE Engine Control: SFI System: Data List/Active Test
NOTE
If DTC P0456 does not return, this TSIB does not apply.
4. If P0456 is present confirm the charcoal canister pump electrical connector is fully seated and verify no Evap leaks are present.
5. If no Evap leaks are found replace the charcoal canister assembly.
^ 2010 RX350 (to 08/2009) (from 08/2009): 2GR-FE Emission Control: Canister: Removal
^ 2010 RX350 (to 08/2009) (from 08/2009): 2GR-FE Emission Control: Canister: Installation
6. After the repair is complete clear any DTCs and perform the EVAP System Check again to confirm normal system operation and there are NO
pending DTCs.2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0090-08R1 Date: 100512
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 455
Body - Tick Noise From Upper/Lower Windshield Area
L-SB-0090-08
Rev1
September 9, 2008
Upper/Lower Windshield Tick Noise
Service Category
Vehicle Exterior
Section
Window/Glass
Market
USA
Applicability
TSB REVISION NOTICE
^ May 12, 2010 Rev1:
^ Applicability has been updated to include 2009 - 2010 model years.
Any previous printed versions of this service bulletin should be discarded.
TSB SUPERSESSION NOTICE
The information contained in this TSB supersedes TSB No. NV005-06.
^ Applicability has been updated to include 2008 model year applicable vehicles.
TSB No. NV005-06 is Obsolete and any printed versions should be discarded. Be sure to review the entire content of this service bulletin before
proceeding.
Introduction
If a creak tick or rattle noise is heard at the top or bottom of the windshield the source of the noise may be the two windshield stoppers bonded to the
top of the windshield or the windshield retainers bonded to the lower edge of the windshield. This bulletin provides the recommended repair
procedure to eliminate these types of noises from the windshield area.
Some vehicles have both stoppers and retainers while others may only have stoppers at the top of the windshield. Use the chart in this bulletin to
determine the location of the windshield holding devices.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 456
Warranty Information
APPLICABLE WARRANTY
^ This repair is covered under the Lexus Comprehensive Warranty. This warranty is in effect for 48 months or 50,000 miles, whichever occurs
first, from the vehicle's in-service date.
^ Warranty application is limited to occurrence of the specified condition described in this bulletin.
Required Tool & Equipment
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 457
Stopper/Retainer Locations
Repair Procedure
Windshield Stopper Repair
1. Remove both sun visors and both A-pillar garnishes and then carefully lower the front of the headliner to gain access to the windshield stoppers
(refer to the appropriate model year Repair Manual for the proper procedure).
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 458
NOTICE
It is very important that the front of the headliner be lowered carefully and slowly. Applying too much downward force on the headliner will
cause it to develop a permanent crease in the surface material.
The stoppers are located on the inside of the passenger compartment behind the windshield glass blackout section (near the top front edge of the
metal roof opening). The stoppers are typically located 20 - 25 cm (7.9 - 9.8 in.) inboard of the top corners of the windshield glass.
2. Cut OFF the tip of the plastic stopper as shown in the illustration.
HINT
It is sometimes necessary to bend the metal body tab down to gain access to the shaft of the stopper.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 459
3. Once the tip of the stopper has been removed use a screwdriver to open a gap between the roof panel and the remainder of the plastic windshield
stopper.
4. Test drive vehicle prior to reassembly to confirm that the noise has been eliminated.
5. Reassemble the vehicle.
Windshield Retainer Repair:
1. Carefully remove the plastic cowl top ventilator louver at the base of the windshield and store it in a safe location for reinstallation later (refer to
the appropriate model year Repair Manual for the proper procedure).
2. Locate the windshield retainers at the lower edge of the windshield.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 460
The retainers are typically located 140 - 200 mm (5.5 - 7.9 in.) inboard of the lower corners of the windshield. The flat portion of the retainer is
adhered to the backside of the windshield with double-sided foam-backed tape.
3. Use a "Mini" Hacksaw with a fine tooth 10-inch blade to cut OFF the pin portion of the glass retainer flush with the flat portion of the windshield
retainer (see Figures 9 & 10 for pin location).
4. Test drive the vehicle to confirm the elimination of the noise.
5. Reinstall the plastic cowl top ventilator louver(s).2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0031-10 Date: 100517
Body - Power Liftgate Pops/Creaks During Operation
L-SB-0031-10
May 17, 2010
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 461
Power Back Door Noise
Service Category
Vehicle Exterior
Section
Door/Hatch
Market
USA
Applicability
TSIB SUPERSESSION NOTICE
The information contained in this bulletin supersedes TSIB No. EL013-07.
^ Applicability has been updated to include 2009 - 2010 RX 350, 2008 RX 400h and 2010 RX 450h vehicles.
^ Parts Information has been updated.
TSIB No. EL013-07 is Obsolete and any printed versions should be discarded. Be sure to review the entire content of this service bulletin before
proceeding.
Introduction
Some vehicles may exhibit a condition where the power back door will make a "popping" or "creaking" noise from the power back door unit. The
power back door drive assembly has been improved to remedy this condition. Use the following procedure to remove and replace the power back
door drive assembly.
Warranty Information
APPLICABLE WARRANTY
^ This repair is covered under the Lexus Comprehensive Warranty. This warranty is in effect for 48 months or 50,000 miles, whichever occurs
first, from the vehicle's in-service date.
^ Warranty application is limited to occurrence of the specified condition described in this bulletin.
Production Change Information
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 462
This TSIB applies to all 2004 - 2006 RX 330, 2007 - 2009 RX 350 2006 - 2008 RX 400h and 2010 RX 350 and RX 450h vehicles produced
BEFORE the Production Change Effective VINs shown.
Parts Information
Required Tools & Equipment
Repair Procedure
1. Record radio presets.
2. Disconnect the battery from the negative (-) battery terminal. For 2004 - 2009 model year vehicles continue to step 3.
For replacement of the Power Back Door Unit Assembly on 2010 MY RX 350 and 2010 RX 450h. Refer to the Technical Information System
(TIS) applicable model and model year Repair Manual:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 463
3. Remove the trim panel and power back door linkage from the back door.
Using the plastic pry tool disengage the 3 claws and remove the trim panel.
4. Remove the back window panel trim upper.
A. Using the plastic pry tool disengage the 2 claws and 7 clips and remove the trim upper.
B. Remove the 2 bolts holding the linkage to the door.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 464
5. Remove the roof headlining assembly. Refer to the Technical Information System (TIS) applicable model and model year Repair Manual:
6. Remove the power back door drive assembly.
A. Disconnect the connector.
B. Remove the 4 bolts and the power back door drive assembly.
7. Install the NEW power back door drive assembly.
A. Apply adhesive to the threads of the 6 bolts.
Adhesive: Three Bond 1324 (P/N 08833-00070) or equivalent
B. Install the NEW drive unit to the vehicle body with the 4 bolts in the order shown.
Torque: 31 N*m (316 kgf*cm, 23 ft*lbf)
C. Install the drive unit arm to the door with the 2 bolts.
Torque: 31 N*m (316 kgf*cm, 23 ft*lbf)
D. Install the trim panel.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 465
8. Install the roof headlining assembly in reverse order of disassembly.
9. Re-initialize any affected power systems.
10. Set radio presets and clock.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0035-10 Date: 100526
Interior - Front Center Console Slide Inoperative
L-SB-0035-10
May 26, 2010
Front Center Console Slide Inoperative
Service Category
Vehicle Interior
Section
Interior Panels/Trim
Market
USA
Applicability
Introduction
Some 2010 model year RX 350 and RX 450h vehicles may exhibit a condition where the front center console lid may be difficult to slide. A revised
Console Compartment Door Lock Assembly has been developed to improve this condition.
Production Change Information
This TSIB applies to vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VINs shown.
Warranty Information
APPLICABLE WARRANTY
^ This repair is covered under the Lexus Comprehensive Warranty. This warranty is in effect for 48 months or 50,000 miles, whichever occurs first,
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 466
from the vehicle's in-service date.
^ Warranty application is limited to occurrence of the specified condition described in this bulletin.
Parts Information
Required Tools & Equipment
Repair Procedure
1. Remove the Console Compartment Door Lock Sub-Assembly No.1 Upper Box Plate and No. 2 Upper Box Plate. Refer to the Technical
Information System (TIS) applicable model and model year Repair Manual.
2010 RX 3501450h vehicles with a production date of 07/2009 and earlier.
2010 RX 3501450h vehicles with a production date of 08/2009 and later.
2. Install the New Console Compartment Door Lock Sub-Assembly No.1 Upper Box Plate and No. 2 Upper Box Plate. Refer to the Technical
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 467
Information System (TIS) applicable model and model year Repair Manual.
2010 RX 3501450h vehicles with a production date of 07/2009 and earlier.
2010 RX 3501450h vehicles with a production date of 08/2009 and later.
3. Confirm front console box lock operation.2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0043-10 Date: 100630
Electrical - Console Pwer Extension Cable Int. Inop.
L-SB-0043-10
June 30, 2010
Center Console 12V Extension Cable, Intermittent Operation
Service Category
Power Source/Network
Section
Power Distribution
Market
USA
Applicability
Introduction
Some 2010 MY RX350 and RX450h vehicles may exhibit a condition where the optional center console 12V Power Outlet Extension Cable may not
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 468
operate or operate intermittently. This condition may be caused by dirty or contaminated contacts. Please refer to the following procedure contained
in this bulletin to diagnose and address this condition.
Parts Information
Required Tools & Equipment
Warranty Information
APPLICABLE WARRANTY
^ Lexus accessories installed as original equipment are covered under the Lexus Comprehensive Warranty. This warranty is in effect for 48 months
or 50,000 miles, whichever occurs first, from the vehicle's in-service date.
^ Lexus accessories installed after the new vehicle purchase are warranted for 12 months, regardless of mileage, from the date of installation on
vehicle, or the remainder of the applicable New Vehicle Limited Warranty, whichever provides the greater coverage.
^ Lexus accessories purchased over-the-counter are covered for 12 months from the date of purchase.
^ Warranty application is limited to occurrence of the specified condition described in this bulletin.
Diagnostic Procedure
Check the 12V Power outlet cable label for the presence of dots. There may be dots in the front of the label or the back of the label. They can be
different colors such as black blue or green.
^ If there are dots on the label and it is functioning intermittently replace the cable.
For replacement instructions refer to TIS, L-AI-0139-W, Power Outlet Extension Cable Accessories Installation.
^ If there are dots on the label and the cable does not function at all check the fuse prior to replacing the cable.
^ If there are no dots present on the label go to Step 3 to the cleaning process.
Repair Procedure
1. Remove the 12V power outlet extension cable.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 469
For removal instructions refer to TIS, L-AI-0139-W, Power Outlet Extension Cable Accessories Installation.
2. Check fuse.
A. Unscrew the plastic cap on the male end of the connector and remove the fuse and metal cap. (See Figure 3.)
B. If the 8 amp fuse is open replace.
3. Clean metal cap and fuse metal contacts.
A. Using an electronic contact cleaner clean the inside of the metal cap thoroughly with a cotton swab or similar cleaning device. (See Figure 4.)
Inside of cap should be cleaned to remove all residue.
B. Using an electronic contact cleaner clean the metal contacts on both sides of the fuse with a clean cloth. (See Figure 5.)
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 470
Fuse contacts on both sides should be cleaned to remove all residue.
C. Reassemble the connector and install it into the vehicle outlet.
4. Check cable operation.
A. Plug a power outlet (cigarette lighter adapter) checker into the female side of the cable.
B. With the vehicle in ACC or ON perform a function check to make sure there is no intermittence during the function check.
C. With the male connector completely plugged into the outlet the connector should be moved a few times up and down and side to side.
D. The wire at the base of the female connector should be moved a few times up and down and side to side.
^ If there is no voltage or there are signs of intermittent operation during this moved check the 12V power outlet extension cable should be
replaced.
^ If there is voltage and it is constant during this check put a black dot on the bottom right corner of the label on the side with the fuse
information.
5. Place a black dot on the bottom right corner to show cable has been cleaned and checked. (See Figure 7.)
Refer to L-AI-0139-W, Accessories Installation Guide on Technical Information System (TIS).
6. Install cable.2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0036-08R1 Date: 100707
Keyless Systems - Smart Key(R) Battery Diagnostics
L-SB-0036-08
Rev1
June 30, 2008
Smart Key Battery Diagnostics
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 471
Service Category
Vehicle Interior
Section
Theft Deterrent/Keyless Entry
Market
USA
Applicability
TSIB REVISION NOTICE
^ July 7, 2010 Rev1:
^ Applicability has been updated to include 2009 - 2011 model years.
^ Figure 1 has been updated.
Any previous printed versions of this service bulletin should be discarded.
Introduction
Some customers may experience limited battery life in their Smart Keys. The Smart Key "wakes up" by receiving a "ping" or electronic noise. Many
electronic devices emit a "ping" or electronic noise, therefore the Smart Key(s) could wake up resulting in reduced battery life.
If the Smart Key(s) is stored near any of the following components, battery life may be reduced:
^ TVs or computer monitors
^ DVD or VCR units
^ Desktop PCs or notebooks
^ Cordless phones or cell phones
^ Microwave ovens or other electronic cooking appliances
^ Modems
^ Certain lighting fixtures
NOTE
It is recommended to keep the Smart Key(s) at least one meter (40 inches) from these electronic devices.
Warranty Information
Diagnostic Procedure
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 472
Use the flowchart to test the Smart Key battery.2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0154-08R2 Date: 100729
Tires - Inflation Pressure Adjustment/Compensation
L-SB-0154-08
Rev2
October 29, 2008
Tire Inflation Pressure Compensation and Adjustment
Service Category
Suspension
Section
Tire/Wheel
Market
USA
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 473
Applicability
TSIB REVISION NOTICE
July 29, 2010 Rev2:
^ Applicability has been updated to include 2011 model year vehicles.
May 14, 2009 Rev1:
^ Applicability has been updated to include 2010 model year vehicles.
^ Figure 1 has been updated, and Celsius temperatures have been removed from the bulletin. Any previous printed versions of this service bulletin
should be discarded.
Introduction
The purpose of this bulletin is to provide a procedure to adjust tire pressure correctly when outside temperature is significantly colder or warmer
than shop temperature.
Seasonal temperature change can dramatically alter tire pressure, which can cause the tire pressure warning lamp to illuminate.
NOTE
This bulletin applies to some 2002 - 2007 model year Lexus vehicles with direct TPWS and all 2008 and newer model year Lexus vehicles.
Warranty Information
Tire Pressure vs. Tire Temperature
Tire temperature is dependent on "cold" tire pressure, driving distance and speed, ambient temperature and road surface temperature. As the
temperature of the tire changes, air in the tire expands and contracts, changing the tire's air pressure. The cold tire pressure for all Lexus models will
vary and will need to be adjusted accordingly.
"Cold" tire pressure, as shown on the tire pressure label on our vehicles, is generally considered to be the pressure in a tire that has not been driven
in the past 4 hours and has been parked outdoors.
The TPWS MUST be initialized with the tire pressure marked on the vehicle placard. Tires are then adjusted according to the information in this
bulletin to ensure that the TPWS light does not illuminate unnecessarily.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 474
Tire Pressure Adjustment
Recommended Tire Pressure Adjustment:
NOTE
Use a high quality accurate tire pressure gauge, and check its accuracy regularly.
^ Consider the difference of the air temperature in the workshop and the lowest ambient temperature that may be expected in the next few
weeks (especially in winter).
^ Use the chart (Figure 1) to compensate for temperature of the tires when adjusting tire pressure. Use temperature compensation Example 1
for the spare tire.
Example 1: Temperature Compensation - "Cold" Tires
^ The vehicle has been parked overnight outside shop (vehicle has "cold" tires) and tire pressures are set to 31.9 psi.
^ Workshop temperature is 68° F and expected lowest ambient temperature in the local area is to be 14° F.
^ Subtract the expected lowest temperature (14° F) from the highest expected temperature (68° F) = 54° F.
^ Using the tire pressure chart (Figure 1) find the intersection of the cold tire line at the point corresponding to 54° F and read off the value on
the tire pressure change axis. In this case it would be about 4.9 psi.
^ The tires should be filled to:
31.9 + 4.9 psi = 36.8 psi
Example 2: Temperature Compensation - "Warm" Tires
^ The vehicle has been driven to the shop on surface streets for about 30 minutes (vehicle has "warm" tires) and tire pressures are set to 31.9
psi.
^ Workshop temperature is 68° F and expected lowest ambient temperature in your area is to be 14° F.
^ Subtract the expected lowest temperature (14° F) from the highest expected temperature (68° F) = 54° F.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 475
^ Using the Tire Pressure Chart (Figure 1), find the intersection of the warm tire line at the point corresponding to 54° F and read off the value
on the tire pressure change axis. In this case it would be about 6.7 psi.
^ The tires should be filled to:
31.9 + 6.7 psi = 38.6 psi
Example 3: Temperature Compensation - "Hot" Tires
^ The vehicle has been driven to the shop on the highway for at least 60 minutes (vehicle has "hot" tires) and tire pressures are set to 31.9 psi.
^ Workshop temperature is 68° F, and the expected lowest ambient temperature in the area is expected to be 14° F.
^ Subtract the expected lowest temperature (14° F) from the highest expected temperature (68° F) = 54° F.
^ Using the tire pressure chart (Figure 1), find the intersection of the hot tire line at the point corresponding to 54° F, and read off the value on
the tire pressure change axis. In this case it would be about 9.0 psi.
^ The tires should be filled to:
31.9 + 9.0 psi = 40.9 psi2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # CRIB159 Date: 071201
Body - Corrosion Prevention & Sound Absorption Info.
COLLISION REPAIR INFORMATION
FOR THE COLLISION REPAIR PROFESSIONAL
TITLE: CORROSION PREVENTION & SOUND ABSORBING MEASURES
SECTION: EXTERIOR BULLETIN # 159
MODELS: ALL TOYOTA LEXUS and SCION
DATE: DECEMBER 2007
To assure repairs and replacement components meet strict factory standards, all corrosion preventive coatings and sound absorbing materials must be
replicated to match OE application and purpose. In addition, the use of weld thru primer is strongly recommended during welding operations.
If the following materials are not restored to OE like-kind and quality road noise may be amplified and the Toyota new car corrosion warranty may
be voided on the affected components and adjoining parts and systems which are caused to fail or rust by those components. Refer to
CPS-Toyota/Scion Policy 4.17 and CPS Lexus Policy 4.15 for details on what is not covered by the new vehicle limited warranty.
^ Seam Sealer ^ Cavity Wax ^ ED Primer
^ Undercoating ^ Frame Finish Coatings ^ Chip Resistant Coatings
^ Sound Absorbing Materials
Please refer to model-specific Collision Damage Repair Manuals (www.techinfo.toyota.com) for specifications illustrations instructions and
locations of these coatings.2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # CRIB175 Date: 091201
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 476
Body - HSS/UHSS Cabin Reinforcement Repair/Replacement
COLLISION REPAIR INFORMATION
FOR THE COLLISION REPAIR PROFESSIONAL
TITLE: HSS & UHSS CABIN REINFORCEMENT REPAIR & REPLACEMENT
SECTION: STRUCTURAL BULLETIN # 175 (revised)
MODELS: ALL TOYOTA LEXUS and SCION
DATE: DECEMBER 2009
Model-specific Collision Damage Repair Manuals' contain Structural Outline' illustrations that identify locations and strength ratings for High
Strength Steel (HSS) and Ultra High Strength Steel (UHSS) components throughout body and frame structures. This information is provided so that
collision repair professionals can make informed decisions on repair and replacement of components that provide high margins of crash safety to
vehicle occupants.
Because occupant safety is such a high priority, HSS and UHSS occupant cabin reinforcement repair is not recommended.
Do not use the following occupant cabin reinforcement repair procedures:
^ Hot and cold straightening methods
^ Sectioning of 980 MPa and 590 MPa strength-rated pillar reinforcements
^ Sectioning of 440 MPa rated components at locations other than those specified
This recommendation is based on a reduction in reinforcement strength and crash energy management revealed during research and testing
conducted by Toyota Motor Corporation. Repaired and/or improperly sectioned reinforcements failed to exhibit the strength and performance ratings
of genuine new original equipment service parts installed to specification. Therefore damaged occupant cabin reinforcements must be replaced.
When reinforcements must be replaced always follow welding specifications and adhere to documented model-specific cut and join locations and
procedures.2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # CRIB176 Date: 091201
Body - Approved Collision Repair Methods
COLLISION REPAIR INFORMATION
FOR THE COLLISION REPAIR PROFESSIONAL
TITLE: APPROVED COLLISION REPAIR METHODS
SECTION: STRUCTURAL BULLETIN # 176 (revised)
MODELS: ALL TOYOTA LEXUS and SCION
DATE: DECEMBER 2009
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 477
During collision repair straightening operations it is often necessary to stress-relieve metal components to return them or attached components to
original shape alignment and strength. It is also often necessary to replace or section damaged weld-on components. The following information is
intended to provide an overview of approved repair methods and repair methods that are not recommended for these operations. This information
also reinforces specific precautions currently published in Collision Repair Information Bulletins (CRIBs) and those covered in instructor-facilitated
hands-on training.
Instructor facilitated hands-on training information is available at www.crrtraining.com. All pertinent collision repair specifications and precautions
are covered in-depth during the following training courses:
^ Course # 301 Non-Structural Body Repair Training
^ Course # 460 Structural Body Repair Training
Collision Repair Information Bulletins can be accessed at www.techinfo.toyota.com. Refer to the following bulletins for more detailed information
on applicable collision repair topics and precautions:
^ CRIB # 122 Full Body Sectioning
^ CRIB # 155 Body & Frame Sectioning
^ CRIB # 157 Collision Parts Position Statement
^ CRIB # 158 Panel Adhesive
^ CRIB # 161 Collision Damage Repair Precautions
^ CRIB # 172 Bumper Component Repair
^ CRIB # 174 Welding Prius UHSS
^ CRIB # 175 HSS & UHSS Occupant Cabin Reinforcement Repair & Replacement2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # CRIB177 Date:
100301
Restraints - OCS System Initialization
COLLISION REPAIR INFORMATION
FOR THE COLLISION REPAIR PROFESSIONAL
TITLE: SRS OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM INITIALIZATION
SECTION: ELECTRICAL BULLETIN # 177
MODELS: ALL EQUIPPED TOYOTA LEXUS and SCION MODELS
DATE: MARCH 2010
Models equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Occupant Classification System (OCS) will enable or disable the passenger front and
side airbags based on seat occupancy passenger weight and seat belt latch engagement.
If an equipped vehicle sustains collision damage or if the front passenger seat or any of the OCS components are serviced the SRS Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) may illuminate setting a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).
NOTE:
It is necessary to diagnose and repair the root cause of a SRS or OCS DTC before initializing the OCS system. If SRS and OCS DTC's are not
cleared the system may not operate properly.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 478
Be sure to check and clear DTC's and perform OCS initialization per repair manual instructions with a Techstream Special Service Tool (SST) or
capable diagnostic tester.
Any of the following conditions could set a DTC illuminate the SRS MIL or cause the PASSENGER AIRBAG light to indicate incorrectly
regardless of occupancy:
^ The OCS Electronic Control Unit (ECU) is replaced
^ Accessories such as a seatback tray are installed on the passenger seat
^ The passenger seat is removed and replaced or reinstalled
^ The vehicle is involved in an accident or collision
Model-specific repair manuals can be accessed through the Technical Information System (TIS) www.techinfo.toyota.com.Technical Service
Bulletin # SB0152-10 Date: 101119
Audio - USB/iPod(R) Device Not Recognized
L-SB-0152-10
November 19, 2010
USB/Pod Not Recognized
Service Category
Audio/Visual/Telematics
Section
Audio/Video
Market
USA
Applicability
Introduction
Some 2010 Lexus vehicles may exhibit an intermittent operation of USB/iPod(TM) device condition while in use. A newly designed Multi-Media
Interface ECU has been developed to correct this condition. This bulletin applies to the following models:
This bulletin does not apply to the following models: iPod(TM) mini iPod(TM) shuffle iPod(TM) photo iPhone(TM)* and 4th generation and earlier
models. These versions of the iPod(TM) are NOT compatible with this system.
* iPhone(TM) has limited compatibility with this system. Some functions may not operate properly.
Production Change Information
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 479
This TSIB applies to vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VINs shown.
Warranty Information
APPLICABLE WARRANTY
^ This repair is covered under the Lexus Comprehensive Warranty. This warranty is in effect for 48 months or 50,000 miles, whichever occurs
first, from the vehicle's in-service date.
^ Warranty application is limited to occurrence of the specified condition described in this bulletin.
Required Tools & Equipment
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 480
Parts Information
Repair Procedure
1. Please compare customer's iPod(TM) with the compatible models table listed below. If the customer's iPod(TM) is NOT listed, this TSIB does
NOT apply.
2. Verify the condition.
If USB device error occurs during every use, visually inspect port.
3. Verify the error condition continues when using a known good USB cable.
4. Replace the Multi-Media Interface ECU by following procedures in the repair manual.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 481
Refer to the Technical Information System (TIS) applicable model and model year Repair Manual:
5. Verify the error condition continues when using a known good USB cable.2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0143-11 Date: 111110
Body - Seat Cover Replacement For Side Airbag Vehicles
L-SB-0143-11
November 10, 2011
Seat Cover Replacement for Side Airbag Equipped Vehicles
Service Category
Vehicle Interior
Section
Seat
Market
USA
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 482
Applicability
Introduction
Beginning in 1998, Lexus introduced side airbags as optional equipment.
Lexus does NOT recommend replacement of original seat covers with non-Lexus leather or other seat cover materials on vehicles due to the
following:
^ Seat covers NOT recommended by Lexus may affect side airbag performance, in general or in part, during an accident.
^ Modifications that negatively affect side airbag performance can result in severe occupant injuries.
^ Seat covers are an integral part of this safety system. Replacing fabric seat covers with non-Lexus leather or other seat cover materials may
compromise the effectiveness of this safety system.
^ The design of the seat is complex, integrating safety and strength with comfort and luxury.
NOTE
Lexus original seat covers that were NOT designed for side airbag equipped seats cannot be used due to the effect on proper airbag performance.
Lexus strongly discourages modifying original equipment seats that have optional side airbags.
Additionally, Lexus strongly advises against the installation or use of aftermarket seat covers, which could impair the performance of the side airbags
in the event of an accident.
Warranty Information2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # CAN-TSB3243L Date: 121107
Canada - Interior - Fibers Protruding From Front Seat Cushion
L-TCI-3243
November 7, 2012
FIBERS PROTRUDING THROUGH FRONT SEAT CUSHION PERFORATIONS
Service Category
Vehicle Interior
Section
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 483
Seat
Market
Canada
APPLICABILITY:
INTRODUCTION:
Some RX 350 and RX 450h vehicles may exhibit fibers of the seat leather protruding through the leather perforations of the front seat cushion
covers. Replace the Front Seat Cushion Cover Sub-Assembly to address this condition.
PRODUCTION CHANGE INFORMATION:
This TSB applies to vehicles produced BEFORE the Production Change Effective VINs shown.
PARTS INFORMATION:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 484
REQUIRED TOOLS & EQUIPMENT:
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
REPAIR PROCEDURE:
1. Remove the front seat assembly.
Refer to the ETAS/TIS library applicable model and model year Repair Manual:
2. Disassemble the front seat assembly. Follow disassembly steps up to and including "Remove Separate Type Front Seat Cushion Cover" (do NOT
remove Front Seat Cushion Heater Assembly) from the applicable Repair Manual.
Refer to the ETAS/TIS library applicable model and model year Repair Manual:
3. Reassemble the replacement cushion cover. Follow reassembly steps beginning with "Install Separate Type Front Seat Cushion Cover" from the
applicable Repair Manual.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 485
Refer to the ETAS/TIS library, applicable model and model year Repair Manual:
4. Install the seat assembly.
Refer to the ETAS/TIS library, applicable model and model year Repair Manual:
5. Reconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
6. Perform zero point calibration and sensitivity check, if the front passenger seat is repaired.
7. Confirm the seat cushion condition for proper appearance.
8. Reinitialize the following systems (if applicable) after the negative battery cable is reconnected:
^ Parking Assist Monitor System.
^ Side Monitor System (w/ Parking Assist Monitor System)
^ Back Door Closer System
^ Power Back Door System
NOTE:
Issue of the Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available. IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN
AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable, will apply.
? 2012 Lexus, a division of Toyota Motor Sales, Canada2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # CAN-TSB3263L Date: 121231
Canada - Vehicle - Flood Damage Inspection
L-TCI-3263
December 31, 2012
FLOOD DAMAGED VEHICLE INSPECTION & HANDLING
Service Category
Power Source/Network
Section
Battery/Charging
Market
Canada
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 486
APPLICABILITY:
INTRODUCTION:
In the event that a Lexus vehicle becomes submerged in water, many components may be physically damaged. Electrical and electronic components,
including wiring harnesses, are particularly susceptible to corrosion and subsequent malfunction. Although any flooding can be damaging, salt water
flooding elevates the potential for abnormal conditions and may increase risks due to its highly corrosive and conductive nature. Salt residue also
continues to corrode and remain conductive even after a vehicle dries. This bulletin is intended to assist with safe handling and inspection of flood
damaged vehicles as well as provide basic guidance on likely needed repairs.
NOTE
^ Damage associated with a vehicle being submerged in water is not covered by the Lexus new vehicle Warranty policy.
^ VIN and inspection results for vehicles currently within the warranty period should be forwarded to the Field Warranty Consultant (FWC) for
their reference and updates to the Warranty system.
^ This bulletin provides general guidance and inspection areas. Each individual vehicle must be carefully reviewed based on the situation
(water level, water type, and duration of exposure).
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
TSB OVERVIEW:
This TSB contains 3 main sections:
1. Vehicle Safing - Making sure the vehicle is in a safe condition and the electrical system is disabled to minimize risks from corrosion, damaged
circuits, and attempted operation.
2. Vehicle Inspection - Assessing the level of damage and determining necessary parts replacement, cleaning procedures, and potential long term
effects.
3. Vehicle Repair - Guidance for repair decisions on vehicle systems, sub-systems, and components.
NOTE
^ Due to the potential level of damage after an extended partial or full submersion some vehicles may not be repairable and should be
decommissioned.
^ Final decisions on repair costs, vehicle value, and possible salvage or decommissioning are the responsibility of the customer, dealership, and
insurer. Inspection and repair of flood damaged vehicles is NOT warrantable.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 487
REQUIRED TOOLS & EQUIPMENT:
REQUIRED TOOLS & EQUIPMENT:
1. Vehicle Safing
The most important aspect of handling flooded vehicles is making sure the vehicle is safe. Water entry and resulting corrosion may cause
electrical system anomalies or performance issues including:
^ Improper power distribution / system operation / overcurrent conditions.
^ High resistance from corrosion and abnormal heat generation that could lead to a potential fire.
^ Potential SRS Airbag Pretensioner and/or Side Curtain Airbag false activation/deployment.
CAUTION
Read all instructions and cautions before approaching a suspected flooded vehicle.
^ If the flooded vehicle is equipped with a hybrid drivetrain, be sure to use Electrical Insulating Gloves (high voltage safety gloves).
^ If any water is found in the vehicle or carpet is found wet, DO NOT attempt to start the vehicle until after the inspection and potential needed
repairs can be completed.
^ Flood waters can be contaminated. Take precautions to minimize exposure including use of a respirator, face shield, safety glasses, and
gloves. Wash exposed skin thoroughly after any contact with flood damaged components.
^ If fire, smoke, or abnormal sounds are detected, DO NOT approach or open vehicle.
^ Keep ignition sources away from the vehicle due to potential battery outgassing.
^ If the 12V battery is found disconnected in a potential flood vehicle, DO NOT connect battery until a complete inspection is performed and
course of action determined.
1.) Determine if the vehicle has been flooded with water above the rocker panels into the floor of the vehicle.
HINT
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 488
If no standing water is detected on the vehicle floor and the carpet is wet, assume that internal flooding has occurred.
^ If YES - Continue to step 2.
^ If NO - Go to section 2 for vehicle inspection.
2.) Open doors and trunk or hatch to release trapped water ventilate the cabin, and allow the interior to air dry.
3.) Locate and remove body drain plugs at the rear corners of cabin floor and/or in spare tire well (if available) to assist with draining the
vehicle.
4.) Disconnect the 12V battery and make sure the cable is folded down and away from the terminal.
5.) On hybrid vehicles, disconnect the HV Battery Service Plug Connector (ONLY after the 12V auxiliary battery is disconnected).
CAUTION
If battery area contains standing water, drain BEFORE removing HV Battery Service Plug Connector.
6.) Using a floor jack or GoJaks, move and store the vehicle away from structures and vehicles.
2. Vehicle Inspection
Determining the level of water intrusion and whether the vehicle was contaminated with fresh or salt water will help assess the extent of damage
that has occurred and may continue to occur. As salt water is more damaging, this bulletin focuses primarily on salt water flooding. If the vehicle
was driven in flood waters, additional inspections may be necessary.
Use the following illustration to identify inspection level based on depth and angle of vehicle submersion.
NOTE
^ Key inspection areas are cumulative from Level I through 5 as water level increases (for example, Level 4 includes all inspection areas
from Levels 1 to 4).
^ Any vehicle that was driven through flood waters will require BOTH the Parked Vehicle Inspection and Driven Vehicle Inspection.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 489
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 490
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 491
Parked Vehicle Inspection - Salt Water
Driven Vehicle Inspection - Salt Water
NOTE
If the vehicle was driven in flood waters, continue with the following checks after performing static inspection items.
Additional inspections must be made when the vehicle has been driven through or in flood waters. After a full inspection, repair of electrical
systems, replacement of fluids, and other potential repairs, the vehicle should be driven while monitoring live Techstream data for each vehicle
system. A full Health Check should be performed to complete confirmation of vehicle operation.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 492
Please review the following inspection list:
NOTE
For Fresh Water Flooding:
^ The dynamic inspection tables serve as a general inspection guide.
^ Residual corrosion and conductivity, once vehicle is dried, is not as great a concern as with salt water. All flooding situations should be
inspected and judged individually.
3. Vehicle Repair
After identifying affected components and when making repair decisions, please consider the following.
Electrical
Any electrical components that have been submerged in salt water (examples: harnesses, connectors, terminals, ECUs, hybrid and PHV batteries,
switches, buttons, sensors) need to be replaced before operating the vehicle and should NOT be reused.
NOTE
^ Even after salt water has dried, salt residue may remain on nearby surfaces.
^ Cleaning and/or replacement of surrounding components may also be necessary to ensure proper operation of electrical systems.
Chassis
Brakes and suspension components not only need to move and slide freely for proper operation, but additional consideration needs to be given
for subsequent corrosion that could impact future system performance. Disassemble, clean, reassemble, and lubricate all chassis components that
have been submerged or subjected to extensive salt water exposure.
Powertrain
As in-depth performance analysis can be conducted using Techstream, repair must include testing and confirmation of proper live data
performance, general Health Check (full Health Check for possible DTCs), inspection for oil and fuel contamination, consideration of all
electrical components (as previously described in this bulletin), inspection and replacement of any rubber, plastic, and metal components that are
deteriorating or damaged, and removal of salt water residue using appropriate cleaning agents.
Body and Interior
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 493
Vehicle body designs generally incorporate pressure relief vents (to minimize door closing pressure). These can allow water entry into the passenger
cabin during a flood situation and also have inherent low points or pockets that can retain flood water. Be sure to inspect, drain, and clean these
locations.
Any component that became wet or saturated that has fabric, cloth, padding, or soft trim such as those listed below may need to be replaced and/or
require follow-up mold remediation.
^ Carpet and padding ^ Console
^ Seats ^ Package tray
^ Door trim panels ^ Seals
Remaining salt water residue in any part of the vehicle may accelerate corrosion and affect vehicle operation. Be sure to clean all affected internal
and external surfaces thoroughly to prevent long term damage.
NOTE:
Issue of the Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available. IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN
AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable, will apply.
? 2012 Lexus, a division of Toyota Motor Sales, Canada2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0013-13 Date: 130228
Suspension - Rear Shock Absorber Squeaks and Fluid Leakage
L-SB-0013-13
February 28, 2013
Rear Shock Squeak and/or Leak
Service Category
Suspension
Section
Rear Suspension
Market
USA
Applicability
Introduction
Some 2010 - 2012 model year RX 350 and RX 450h vehicles may exhibit a squeak coming from the rear of the vehicle when going over an uneven
road surface. In addition some vehicles may also display evidence of an oil leak from the rear shock absorber(s). Use the following repair procedure
to address these conditions.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 494
Warranty Information
Parts Information
Repair Procedure
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 495
1. Confirm the rear shock absorber(s) are leaking oil and/or squeaking when going over bumps.
2. Remove rear shock absorber.
Refer to the Technical Information System (TIS) applicable model and model year Repair Manual:
3. Replace rear shock absorber.
Refer to TIS applicable model and model year Repair Manual:
4. Drive the vehicle to confirm that squeak is not heard and oil is not leaking from the rear shock absorber(s).
? 2013 Lexus, a division of Toyota Motor Sales, USA2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # CRIB122R Date: 130219
Body/Frame - Body Sectioning Information
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 496
TITLE: BODY SECTIONING
SECTION: STRUCTURAL BULLETIN # 122
MODELS: ALL TOYOTA, LEXUS, and SCION
DATE: REVISED - FEBRUARY 2013
Body Sectioning With Salvage Parts
Body sectioning is generally performed by joining portions of vehicles that have sustained severe damage, where a presumed salvageable portion of
one vehicle is joined to another. This practice can compromise overall vehicle quality, crashworthiness, and occupant safety.
Body sectioning with the use of any weld-on salvage components is not an approved repair procedure for Toyota, Lexus, and Scion Vehicles.
Body sectioning is not approved for the following reasons:
^ Quality of salvage components cannot be certified or verified.
^ Installation welding can reduce strength and safety from the original design.
^ Body and drive-train components can exhibit poor fit and alignment.
^ Squeaks, rattles, wind noise, and water leaks can occur.
^ Extensive corrosion potential can occur.
Refer to Collision Repair Information Bulletin # 180 Use of Non-OEM Parts on Toyota Vehicles' for other important information regarding the use
of salvage and aftermarket parts.
? 2013 Toyota Motor Sales, USA2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0011-13 Date: 130226
A/T - U660E/F Fluid Level Inspection/Adjustment
L-SB-0011-13
February 26, 2013
WS ATF Level Adjustment for U660E/F Transmissions
Service Category
Drivetrain
Section
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle
Market
USA
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 497
Applicability
Introduction
This Service Bulletin includes basic procedures for inspecting and adjusting World Standard (WS) Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) level at
normal vehicle operating temperature.
Introduction
The following adjustment procedures are for U660E/F transmissions.
Warranty Information
Parts Information
Required Tools & Equipment
Inspection Procedure
1. Inspect fluid level at vehicle operating temperature.
NOTE
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 498
This procedure references a Lexus vehicle equipped with a U660F transaxle as an example. Refer to the Repair Manual of the corresponding
vehicle model for specific details about procedures that vary by model such as fluid type, oil level, filling method, the location of the refill
plug, and overflow plug, torque, etc.
CAUTION
^ Use caution while the engine is idling and the radiator fan is operating.
^ Use caution when the transmission fluid temperature is high.
2. Warm up and stop the engine.
3. Connect Techstream to the DLC3 with the ignition switch OFF.
4. Turn the ignition switch to ON and turn Techstream ON.
NOTE
To reduce load, make sure that all electrical systems, such as the air conditioning, lighting system, electric fan, and audio system are OFF.
5. On Techstream, enter the following menus:
Powertrain / ECT / Data List
6. Select the Data List menu: "A/T Oil Temperature 1"
7. Select the Data List menu: "Engine Speed"
8. Check the ATF temperature.
NOTE
Ensure the transmission fluid temperature is between 185°F - 194°F (85°C - 90°C) before starting work.
9. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
10. Start the engine.
11. Slowly move the shift lever from P to D, and then back to P.
12. Lift the vehicle.
NOTE
Set the vehicle on a lift so that the vehicle is kept level (make sure the tilt angle from the front to rear and side to side of the vehicle is
within +/- 1°)
13. Remove the 2 bolts clip and front fender apron seal LH.
14. Remove the refill plug and gasket.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 499
15. Install the Transmission Fill Adapter into the transmission fill port.
SST: P/N 10002-00101-3
16. Attach the Vacuum Regulator Manifold quick connect fitting to the Transmission Fill Adapter.
SST: P/N 10002-00101-2
17. Attach the Fluid Extraction Tank hose quick connect to the Vacuum Regulator Manifold.
SST: P/N 10002-001014
NOTE
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 500
Ensure both of the Fluid Extraction Tank valves are OFF by turning the valve handle perpendicular to the hose.
18. Connect a shop air hose to the Fluid Extraction Tool Tank.
CAUTION
Do NOT exceed 100 psi of shop air pressure to the Fluid Extraction Tool Tank.
19. Open the Fluid Extraction Tank LOWER valve by turning the handle in-line with the hose.
20. Open the Fluid Extraction Tank UPPER valve by turning the handle in-line with the hose.
HINT
Vacuum will be applied to the transmission when both of the Fluid Extraction Tank valves are opened to prevent fluid loss when
removing/installing the transmission overflow/drain plug.
NOTE
Ensure the Vacuum Regulator Manifold gauge is between 2 - 5 in. Hg (10 - 20 KPa).
21. Using a 6 mm hexagon socket wrench remove the overflow/drain plug and gasket.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 501
22. Install the WS ATF Level Gauge into the overflow/drain plug port using the 12 mm Adapter and ensure the WS ATF Level Gauge is fully
seated against the oil pan.
SST: P/N 10002-00101-1
SST: P/N 10002-00101-6
23. Adjust the WS ATF Level Gauge to the correct measurement according to the table below and lock the sliding scale by securing the thumb
screw:
24. Close the Fluid Extraction Tank upper valve by turning the handle perpendicular to the hose. This will stop vacuum flow to the transmission
and the vacuum gauge should read 0 in. Hg (0 KPa).
25. Observe transmission fluid leaking from the hose at the bottom of the WS ATF Level Gauge.
^ If fluid flows out slowly and only drips, then the transmission fluid level is within specifications.
^ If fluid flows out rapidly, allow excess fluid to drain to a slight drip.
^ If no fluid flows out, add fluid using the Transmission Fill System until fluid begins to drip (refer to "Fluid Level Adjustment Procedure"
for instructions).
26. Confirm fluid level is within specifications per steps 23 - 25.
27. Open the Fluid Extraction Tank upper valve by turning the handle in-line with the hose. This will allow vacuum to be applied to the
transmission and the vacuum gauge should read between 2 - 5 in. Hg (10 - 20 KPa).
NOTE
Ensure vacuum is being applied to the transmission before proceeding to step 28.
28. Remove the WS ATF Level Gauge.
29. Install the overflow/drain plug with a new gasket.
Torque: 40 N*m (408 kgf*cm, 36 ft*lbf)
30. Close the Fluid Extraction Tank UPPER valve by turning the handle perpendicular to the hose. This will stop vacuum flow to the transmission
and the vacuum gauge should read 0 in. Hg (0 KPa).
31. Close the Fluid Extraction Tank LOWER valve by turning the handle perpendicular to the hose.
32. Disconnect the shop air hose from the Fluid Extraction Tank.
33. Disconnect the Fluid Extraction Tank hose quick connect from the Vacuum Regulator Manifold.
34. Disconnect the Vacuum Regulator Manifold quick connect from the Transmission Fill Adapter.
35. Remove the Transmission Fill Adapter from the transmission fill port.
36. Install the refill plug with a new gasket.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 502
Torque: 40 N*m (408 kgf*cm, 36 ft*lbf)
37. Check for fluid leaks.
38. Clean any remaining oil residue from the transmission case/oil pan.
39. Install the front fender apron seal LH with the 2 bolts and clip.
40. Lower the vehicle.
41. Remove Techstream from the DLC3.
Perform the following procedures if low fluid level is present using the WS ATF Level Gauge during step 25:
NOTE
^ Before adding transmission fluid, ensure the WS ATF Level Gauge is set to the correct level according to the table in step 23.
^ Ensure the transmission fluid temperature is between 185°F - 194°F (85°C - 90°C) and the engine idle speed is within the range specified in
the table in step 23.
^ Ensure both of the Transmission Fluid Extraction Tank valves are closed and no vacuum is being applied to the transmission (Vacuum
Regulator Manifold gauge should read 0 in. Hg [0 KPa]).
1. Disconnect the Vacuum Regulator Manifold quick connect fitting from the Transmission Fill Adapter.
2. Connect the Transmission Fill System quick connect fitting to the Transmission Fill Adapter.
SST: P/N 00002-11100-02
3. Operate the manual pump slowly to add Toyota genuine WS transmission fluid to the transmission.
4. Observe for transmission fluid leaking from the hose at the base of the WS ATF Level Gauge.
NOTE
^ If fluid flows out slowly and only drips, then the transmission fluid level is within specifications.
^ If transmission fluid flows out rapidly, allow excess fluid to drain to a slight drip.
^ If no transmission fluid flows out, continue adding fluid using the Transmission Fill System until fluid begins to drip.
5. Confirm fluid level is within specifications per step 4.
6. After confirming fluid level is correct disconnect the Transmission Fill System hose quick connect from the Transmission Fill Adapter.
7. Re-Connect the Vacuum Regulator Manifold hose quick connect to the Transmission Fill Adapter.
8. Open both of the Fluid Extraction Tank valves by turning the handle in-line with the hose to stop additional fluid loss. This will allow vacuum to
be applied to the transmission and the vacuum gauge should read between 2 - 5 in. Hg (10 - 20 KPa).
9. Remove the WS ATF Level Gauge.
10. Install the overflow plug with a new gasket.
Torque: 40 N*m (408 kgf*cm, 36 ft*lbf)
11. Close the Fluid Extraction Tank UPPER valve by turning the handle perpendicular to the hose.
12. Close the Fluid Extraction Tank LOWER valve by turning the handle perpendicular to the hose.
13. Disconnect the shop air hose from the Fluid Extraction Tank.
14. Disconnect the Fluid Extraction Tank from the Vacuum Regulator Manifold.
15. Disconnect the Vacuum Regulator Manifold from the Transmission Fill Adapter.
16. Remove the Transmission Fill Adapter from the transmission fill port.
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 503
17. Install the refill plug with a new gasket.
Torque: 40 N*m (408 kgf*cm, 36 ft*lbf)
18. Check for fluid leaks.
19. Clean any remaining oil residue from the transmission case/oil pan.
20. Install the front fender apron seal LH with the 2 bolts and clip.
21. Lower the vehicle.
22. Remove Techstream from the DLC3.
? 2013 Lexus, a division of Toyota Motor Sales, USA2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0007-13 Date: 130219
Keyless Systems - Smart Key Specifications
L-SB-0007-13
February 19, 2013
Smart Key Specifications
Service Category
Vehicle Interior
Section
Theft Deterrent/Keyless Entry
Market
USA
Applicability
Introduction
Some customers may inquire about the frequency and power output of the Smart Key/Smart Entry Systems used on various models. The Smart
Key/Smart Entry systems conform to all applicable FCC rules. This bulletin details the applicable specifications for these systems.
CAUTION
Implanted pacemakers, cardiac defibrillators, or other electrical medical devices may be affected by radio waves emitted by the Smart Key/Smart
Entry Antenna (in detection area). Customers with concerns about these systems and their effects on implanted electronic medical devices should
consult their physician or the device manufacturer. This information is also included in the Owner's Manual for each applicable model.
If necessary details on disabling the Smart Key/Smart Entry functions can be found in the appropriate vehicle Repair Manual. Refer to the Technical
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 504
Information System (TIS) for additional details.
Warranty Information
Smart Key Detection Area
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 505
Specifications: Smart Key Antenna (Communication from Vehicle to Key)
Specifications: Smart Key Transmitter/Wireless Remote (Communication from Key to Vehicle)Technical Service Bulletin #
CAN-TSB3274L Date: 130227
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 506
Canada - Keyless Systems - Smart Key Specifications
L-TCI-3274
February 27, 2013
SMART KEY SPECIFICATIONS
Service Category
Vehicle Interior
Section
Theft Deterrent/Keyless Entry
Market
Canada
APPLICABILITY:
INTRODUCTION:
Some customers may inquire about the frequency and power output of the Smart Key/Smart Entry Systems used on various models. The Smart
Key/Smart Entry systems conform to all applicable FCC rules and Industry Canada Radio Standards Specifications (RSS). This bulletin details the
applicable specifications for these systems.
CAUTION
Implanted pacemakers, cardiac defibrillators, or other electrical medical devices may be affected by radio waves emitted by the Smart
Key/Smart Entry Antenna (in detection area). Customers with concerns about these systems and their effects on implanted electronic medical
devices should consult their physician or the device manufacturer. This information is also included in the Owner's Manual for each
applicable model.
If necessary details on disabling the Smart Key/Smart Entry functions can be found in the appropriate vehicle Repair Manual. Refer to the
ETAS/TIS library for additional details.
WARRANTY INFORMATION:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 507
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 508
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 509
SMART KEY DETECTION AREA:
NOTE:
Issue of the Technical Service Bulletin is to ensure that proper repair information is available. IT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN
AUTHORIZATION FOR REPAIR. Normal provisions of the formal warranty policy, as applicable, will apply.
? 2012 Lexus, a division of Toyota Motor Sales, Canada2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR,MAINTENANCE, Technical Service Bulletin # SB0010-13 Date: 130221
Brakes - Park Brake Pedal Force Gauge
L-SB-0010-13
February 21, 2013
Brake Pedal Force Gauge SST for Parking Brake Inspection
Service Category
Brake
Section
Parking Brake
Market
USA
Applicability
Introduction
A new Special Service Tool (SST 09809-00002) has been introduced to aid in the inspection procedure for certain vehicles equipped with a floor
pedal-type parking brake system. This bulletin references the correct method for installing the Brake Pedal Force Gauge. Refer to the appropriate
Repair Manual for parking brake pedal travel inspection and adjustment specification.
NOTE
Please review the procedure below for correct use of this special service tool.
Warranty Information
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 510
Required Tools & Equipment
SST Installation Procedure
1. Ensure that the parking brake pedal is in the fully released position.
2. Inspect the Brake Pedal Force Gauge and verify that the force indicator needle reads "0".
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 511
3. Attach the Brake Pedal Force Gauge to the parking brake pedal so that the mounting bracket fits securely over the pedal pad and the gauge faces
to the right towards the brake pedal.
4. Firmly depress the Brake Pedal Force Gauge with your foot according to the appropriate procedure in the vehicle's Repair Manual. Follow the
specifications indicated in the Repair Manual as the number of clicks and force applied to the parking brake pedal may vary from vehicle to
vehicle.
Refer to the following Service Category and Section in the Technical Information System (TIS) for the applicable model and model year Repair
Manual:
^ Brake - Parking Brake - "Parking Brake:
Parking Brake Pedal"
CAUTION
When applying force to the Brake Pedal Force Gauge plunger platform (non-slip machined aluminum face), ensure the contact surface on the
bottom of your shoe is dry to avoid potential injury and/or vehicle damage.
5. Read the maximum force achieved during parking brake pedal inspection by relieving the pressure applied to the Brake Pedal Force Gauge
plunger platform (non-slip machined aluminum face) and observe the force value recorded by the red indicator.
6. To reset the gauge, turn the white knob counterclockwise until the red needle reads "0".
7. Verify the force measurement according to the appropriate Repair Manual.
Refer to TIS for the applicable model and model year Repair Manual:
2010 Lexus Truck RX 350 AWD V6-3.5L (2GR-FE) Page 512
^ Brake - Parking Brake - "Parking Brake: Parking Brake Pedal"
? 2013 Lexus, a division of Toyota Motor Sales, USA
No comments:
Post a Comment